1 files changed, 11127 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/5075-0.txt b/5075-0.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbc6eab
--- /dev/null
+++ b/5075-0.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11127 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of The Lion of the North, by G.A. Henty
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Lion of the North
+
+Author: G.A. Henty
+
+Release Date: February, 2004  [EBook #5075]
+Posting Date: April 14, 2009
+Last Updated: March 11, 2018
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: UTF-8
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE LION OF THE NORTH ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Martin Robb
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+THE LION OF THE NORTH
+
+A Tale of the Times of Gustavus Adolphus,
+
+
+By G. A. Henty
+
+
+
+
+PREFACE.
+
+
+MY DEAR LADS,
+
+You are nowadays called upon to acquire so great a mass of learning
+and information in the period of life between the ages of twelve and
+eighteen that it is not surprising that but little time can be spared
+for the study of the history of foreign nations. Most lads are,
+therefore, lamentably ignorant of the leading events of even the most
+important epochs of Continental history, although, as many of these
+events have exercised a marked influence upon the existing state of
+affairs in Europe, a knowledge of them is far more useful, and, it
+may be said, far more interesting than that of the comparatively petty
+affairs of Athens, Sparta, Corinth, and Thebes.
+
+Prominent among such epochs is the Thirty Years' War, which arose from
+the determination of the Emperor of Austria to crush out Protestantism
+throughout Germany. Since the invasion of the Huns no struggle which
+has taken place in Europe has approached this in the obstinacy of the
+fighting and the terrible sufferings which the war inflicted upon the
+people at large. During these thirty years the population of Germany
+decreased by nearly a third, and in some of the states half the towns
+and two-thirds of the villages absolutely disappeared.
+
+The story of the Thirty Years' War is too long to be treated in one
+volume. Fortunately it divides itself naturally into two parts. The
+first begins with the entry of Sweden, under her chivalrous monarch
+Gustavus Adolphus, upon the struggle, and terminates with his death and
+that of his great rival Wallenstein. This portion of the war has been
+treated in the present story. The second period begins at the point when
+France assumed the leading part in the struggle, and concluded with the
+peace which secured liberty of conscience to the Protestants of Germany.
+This period I hope to treat some day in another story, so that you may
+have a complete picture of the war. The military events of the present
+tale, the battles, sieges, and operations, are all taken from the best
+authorities, while for the account of the special doings of Mackay's,
+afterwards Munro's Scottish Regiment, I am indebted to Mr. J. Grant's
+Life of Sir John Hepburn.
+
+Yours sincerely,
+
+G. A. HENTY
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I THE INVITATION
+
+
+It was late in the afternoon in the spring of the year 1630; the
+hilltops of the south of Scotland were covered with masses of cloud, and
+a fierce wind swept the driving rain before it with such force that it
+was not easy to make way against it. It had been raining for three days
+without intermission. Every little mountain burn had become a boiling
+torrent, while the rivers had risen above their banks and flooded the
+low lands in the valleys.
+
+The shades of evening were closing in, when a lad of some sixteen years
+of age stood gazing across the swollen waters of the Nith rushing past
+in turbid flood. He scarce seemed conscious of the pouring rain; but
+with his lowland bonnet pressed down over his eyes, and his plaid
+wrapped tightly round him, he stood on a rising hummock of ground at the
+edge of the flood, and looked across the stream.
+
+“If they are not here soon,” he said to himself, “they will not get
+across the Nith tonight. None but bold riders could do so now; but
+by what uncle says, Captain Hume must be that and more. Ah! here they
+come.”
+
+As he spoke two horsemen rode down the opposite side of the valley and
+halted at the water's edge. The prospect was not a pleasant one. The
+river was sixty or seventy feet wide, and in the centre the water swept
+along in a raging current.
+
+“You cannot cross here,” the boy shouted at the top of his voice. “You
+must go higher up where the water's deeper.”
+
+The wind swept his words away, but his gestures were understood.
+
+“The boy is telling us to go higher up,” said one of the horsemen.
+
+“I suppose he is,” the other replied; “but here is the ford. You see the
+road we have travelled ends here, and I can see it again on the other
+side. It is getting dark, and were we to cross higher up we might lose
+our way and get bogged; it is years since I was here. What's the boy
+going to do now? Show us a place for crossing?”
+
+The lad, on seeing the hesitation of the horsemen, had run along the
+bank up the stream, and to their surprise, when he had gone a little
+more than a hundred yards he dashed into the water. For a time the water
+was shallow, and he waded out until he reached the edge of the regular
+bank of the river, and then swam out into the current.
+
+“Go back,” the horseman shouted; but his voice did not reach the
+swimmer, who, in a few strokes, was in the full force of the stream, and
+was soon lost to the sight of the horsemen among the short foaming waves
+of the torrent.
+
+“The boy will be drowned,” one of the horsemen said, spurring his horse
+up the valley; but in another minute the lad was seen breasting the
+calmer water just above the ford.
+
+“You cannot cross here, Captain Hume,” he said, as he approached the
+horsemen. “You must go nigh a mile up the river.”
+
+“Why, who are you, lad?” the horseman asked, “and how do you know my
+name?”
+
+“I'm the nephew of Nigel Graheme. Seeing how deep the floods were I came
+out to show you the way, for the best horse in the world could not swim
+the Nith here now.”
+
+“But this is the ford,” Captain Hume said.
+
+“Yes, this is the ford in dry weather. The bottom here is hard rock and
+easy to ride over when the river is but waist deep, but below and above
+this place it is covered with great boulders. The water is six feet
+deep here now, and the horses would be carried down among the rocks, and
+would never get across. A mile up the river is always deep, and though
+the current is strong there is nothing to prevent a bold horseman from
+swimming across.”
+
+“I thank you heartily, young sir,” Captain Hume said. “I can see how
+broken is the surface of the water, and doubt not that it would have
+fared hard with us had we attempted to swim across here. In faith,
+Munro, we have had a narrow escape.”
+
+“Ay, indeed,” the other agreed. “It would have been hard if you and I,
+after going through all the battlefields of the Low Countries, should
+have been drowned here together in a Scottish burn. Your young friend is
+a gallant lad and a good swimmer, for in truth it was no light task to
+swim that torrent with the water almost as cold as ice.”
+
+“Now, sirs, will you please to ride on,” the boy said; “it is getting
+dark fast, and the sooner we are across the better.”
+
+So saying he went off at a fast run, the horses trotting behind him. A
+mile above he reached the spot he had spoken of. The river was narrower
+here, and the stream was running with great rapidity, swirling and
+heaving as it went, but with a smooth even surface.
+
+“Two hundred yards farther up,” the boy said, “is the beginning of the
+deep; if you take the water there you will get across so as to climb up
+by that sloping bank just opposite.”
+
+He led the way to the spot he indicated, and then plunged into the
+stream, swimming quietly and steadily across, and allowing the stream to
+drift him down.
+
+The horsemen followed his example. They had swum many a swollen river,
+and although their horses snorted and plunged at first, they soon
+quieted down and swam steadily over. They just struck the spot which the
+boy had indicated. He had already arrived there, and, without a word,
+trotted forward.
+
+It was soon dark, and the horsemen were obliged to keep close to his
+heels to see his figure. It was as much as they could do to keep up with
+him, for the ground was rough and broken, sometimes swampy, sometimes
+strewn with boulders.
+
+“It is well we have a guide,” Colonel Munro said to his companion; “for
+assuredly, even had we got safely across the stream, we should never
+have found our way across such a country as this. Scotland is a fine
+country, Hume, a grand country, and we are all proud of it, you know,
+but for campaigning, give me the plains of Germany; while, as for your
+weather here, it is only fit for a water rat.”
+
+Hume laughed at this outburst.
+
+“I sha'n't be sorry, Munro, for a change of dry clothes and a corner by
+a fire; but we must be nearly there now if I remember right. Graheme's
+hold is about three miles from the Nith.”
+
+The boy presently gave a loud shout, and a minute later lights were seen
+ahead, and in two or three minutes the horsemen drew up at a door beside
+which two men were standing with torches; another strolled out as they
+stopped.
+
+“Welcome, Hume! I am glad indeed to see you; and--ah! is it you, Munro?
+it is long indeed since we met.”
+
+“That is it, Graheme; it is twelve years since we were students together
+at St. Andrews.”
+
+“I did not think you would have come on such a night,” Graheme said.
+
+“I doubt that we should have come tonight, or any other night, Nigel, if
+it had not been that that brave boy who calls you uncle swam across
+the Nith to show us the best way to cross. It was a gallant deed, and I
+consider we owe him our lives.”
+
+“It would have gone hard with you, indeed, had you tried to swim the
+Nith at the ford; had I not made so sure you would not come I would have
+sent a man down there. I missed Malcolm after dinner, and wondered what
+had become of him. But come in and get your wet things off. It is a
+cold welcome keeping you here. My men will take your horses round to the
+stable and see that they are well rubbed down and warmly littered.”
+
+In a quarter of an hour the party were assembled again in the sitting
+room. It was a bare room with heavily timbered ceiling and narrow
+windows high up from the ground; for the house was built for purposes
+of defence, like most Scottish residences in those days. The floor was
+thickly strewn with rushes. Arms and trophies of the chase hung on
+the walls, and a bright fire blazing on the hearth gave it a warm and
+cheerful aspect. As his guests entered the room Graheme presented them
+with a large silver cup of steaming liquor.
+
+“Drain this,” he said, “to begin with. I will warrant me a draught of
+spiced wine will drive the cold of the Nith out of your bones.”
+
+The travellers drank off the liquor.
+
+“'Tis a famous drink,” Hume said, “and there is nowhere I enjoy it so
+much as in Scotland, for the cold here seems to have a knack of getting
+into one's very marrow, though I will say there have been times in the
+Low Countries when we have appreciated such a draught. Well, and how
+goes it with you, Graheme?”
+
+“Things might be better; in fact, times in Scotland have been getting
+worse and worse ever since King James went to England, and all the court
+with him. If it were not for an occasional raid among the wild folks of
+Galloway, and a few quarrels among ourselves, life would be too dull to
+bear here.”
+
+“But why bear it?” Captain Hume asked. “You used to have plenty of
+spirit in our old college days, Graheme, and I wonder at your rusting
+your life out here when there is a fair field and plenty of honour,
+to say nothing of hard cash, to be won in the Low Country. Why, beside
+Hepburn's regiment, which has made itself a name throughout all Europe,
+there are half a score of Scottish regiments in the service of the King
+of Sweden, and his gracious majesty Gustavus Adolphus does not keep them
+idle, I warrant you.”
+
+“I have thought of going a dozen times,” Graheme said, “but you see
+circumstances have kept me back; but I have all along intended to cross
+the seas when Malcolm came of an age to take the charge of his father's
+lands. When my brother James was dying from that sword thrust he got in
+a fray with the Duffs, I promised him I would be a father to the boy,
+and see that he got his rights.”
+
+“Well, we will talk of the affair after supper, Graheme, for now that
+I have got rid of the cold I begin to perceive that I am well nigh
+famished.”
+
+As the officer was speaking, the servitors were laying the table, and
+supper was soon brought in. After ample justice had been done to this,
+and the board was again cleared, the three men drew their seats round
+the fire, Malcolm seating himself on a low stool by his uncle.
+
+“And now to business, Nigel,” Colonel Munro said. “We have not come back
+to Scotland to see the country, or to enjoy your weather, or even for
+the pleasure of swimming your rivers in flood.
+
+“We are commissioned by the King of Sweden to raise some 3000 or 4000
+more Scottish troops. I believe that the king intends to take part in
+the war in Germany, where the Protestants are getting terribly mauled,
+and where, indeed, it is likely that the Reformed Religion will be
+stamped out altogether unless the Swedes strike in to their rescue. My
+chief object is to fill up to its full strength of two thousand men
+the Mackay Regiment, of which I am lieutenant colonel. The rest of the
+recruits whom we may get will go as drafts to fill up the vacancies in
+the other regiments. So you see here we are, and it is our intention
+to beat up all our friends and relations, and ask them each to raise a
+company or half a company of recruits, of which, of course, they would
+have the command.
+
+“We landed at Berwick, and wrote to several of our friends that we were
+coming. Scott of Jedburgh has engaged to raise a company. Balfour of
+Lauderdale, who is a cousin of mine, has promised to bring another; they
+were both at St. Andrew's with us, as you may remember, Graheme. Young
+Hamilton, who had been an ensign in my regiment, left us on the way. He
+will raise a company in Douglasdale. Now, Graheme, don't you think you
+can bring us a band of the men of Nithsdale?”
+
+“I don't know,” Graheme said hesitatingly. “I should like it of all
+things, for I am sick of doing nothing here, and my blood often runs
+hot when I read of the persecutions of the Protestants in Germany; but I
+don't think I can manage it.”
+
+“Oh, nonsense, Nigel!” said Hume; “you can manage it easily enough if
+you have the will. Are you thinking of the lad there? Why not bring him
+with you? He is young, certainly, but he could carry a colour; and as
+for his spirit and bravery, Munro and I will vouch for it.”
+
+“Oh, do, uncle,” the lad exclaimed, leaping to his feet in his
+excitement. “I promise you I would not give you any trouble; and as for
+marching, there isn't a man in Nithsdale who can tire me out across the
+mountains.”
+
+“But what's to become of the house, Malcolm, and the land and the
+herds?”
+
+“Oh, they will be all right,” the boy said. “Leave old Duncan in charge,
+and he will look after them.”
+
+“But I had intended you to go to St. Andrews next year, Malcolm, and
+I think the best plan will be for you to go there at once. As you say,
+Duncan can look after the place.”
+
+Malcolm's face fell.
+
+“Take the lad with you, Graheme,” Colonel Munro said. “Three years under
+Gustavus will do him vastly more good than will St. Andrews. You know it
+never did us any good to speak of. We learned a little more Latin than
+we knew when we went there, but I don't know that that has been of any
+use to us; whereas for the dry tomes of divinity we waded through, I
+am happy to say that not a single word of the musty stuff remains in my
+brains. The boy will see life and service, he will have opportunities
+of distinguishing himself under the eye of the most chivalrous king in
+Europe, he will have entered a noble profession, and have a fair chance
+of bettering his fortune, all of which is a thousand times better than
+settling down here in this corner of Scotland.”
+
+“I must think it over,” Graheme said; “it is a serious step to take.
+I had thought of his going to the court at London after he left the
+university, and of using our family interest to push his way there.”
+
+“What is he to do in London?” Munro said. “The old pedant James, who
+wouldn't spend a shilling or raise a dozen men to aid the cause of his
+own daughter, and who thought more of musty dogmatic treatises than of
+the glory and credit of the country he ruled over, or the sufferings
+of his co-religionists in Germany, has left no career open to a lad of
+spirit.”
+
+“Well, I will think it over by the morning,” Graheme said. “And now tell
+me a little more about the merits of this quarrel in Germany. If I
+am going to fight, I should like at least to know exactly what I am
+fighting about.”
+
+“My dear fellow,” Hume laughed, “you will never make a soldier if you
+always want to know the ins and outs of every quarrel you have to fight
+about; but for once the tenderest conscience may be satisfied as to
+the justice of the contention. But Munro is much better versed in the
+history of the affair than I am; for, to tell you the truth, beyond the
+fact that it is a general row between the Protestants and Catholics, I
+have not troubled myself much in the matter.”
+
+“You must know,” Colonel Munro began, “that some twenty years ago the
+Protestant princes of Germany formed a league for mutual protection and
+support, which they called the Protestant Union; and a year later the
+Catholics, on their side, constituted what they called the Holy League.
+At that time the condition of the Protestants was not unbearable. In
+Bohemia, where they constituted two-thirds of the population, Rudolph
+II, and after him Mathias, gave conditions of religious freedom.
+
+“Gradually, however, the Catholic party about the emperor gained the
+upper hand; then various acts in breach of the conditions granted to the
+Protestants were committed, and public spirit on both sides became
+much embittered. On the 23d of May, 1618, the Estates of Bohemia met
+at Prague, and the Protestant nobles, headed by Count Thurn, came there
+armed, and demanded from the Imperial councillors an account of the high
+handed proceedings. A violent quarrel ensued, and finally the Protestant
+deputies seized the councillors Martinitz and Slavata, and their
+secretary, and hurled them from the window into the dry ditch, fifty
+feet below. Fortunately for the councillors the ditch contained a
+quantity of light rubbish, and they and their secretary escaped without
+serious damage. The incident, however, was the commencement of war.
+Bohemia was almost independent of Austria, administering its own
+internal affairs. The Estates invested Count Thurn with the command of
+the army. The Protestant Union supported Bohemia in its action. Mathias,
+who was himself a tolerant and well meaning man, tried to allay the
+storm; but, failing to do so, marched an army into Bohemia.
+
+“Had Mathias lived matters would probably have arranged themselves,
+but he died the following spring, and was succeeded by Ferdinand II.
+Ferdinand is one of the most bigoted Catholics living, and is at the
+same time a bold and resolute man; and he had taken a solemn vow at
+the shrine of Loretto that, if ever he came to the throne, he would
+re-establish Catholicism throughout his dominions. Both parties prepared
+for the strife; the Bohemians renounced their allegiance to him and
+nominated the Elector Palatine Frederick V, the husband of our Scotch
+princess, their king.
+
+“The first blow was struck at Zablati. There a Union army, led by
+Mansfeldt, was defeated by the Imperial general Bucquoi. A few days
+later, however, Count Thurn, marching through Moravia and Upper Austria,
+laid siege to Vienna. Ferdinand's own subjects were estranged from him,
+and the cry of the Protestant army, 'Equal rights for all Christian
+churches,' was approved by the whole population--for even in Austria
+itself there were a very large number of Protestants. Ferdinand had but
+a few soldiers, the population of the city were hostile, and had Thurn
+only entered the town he could have seized the emperor without any
+resistance.
+
+“Thurn hesitated, and endeavoured instead to obtain the conditions of
+toleration which the Protestants required; and sixteen Austrian barons
+in the city were in the act of insisting upon Ferdinand signing these
+when the head of the relieving army entered the city. Thurn retired
+hastily. The Catholic princes and representatives met at Frankfort and
+elected Ferdinand Emperor of Germany. He at once entered into a strict
+agreement with Maximilian of Bavaria to crush Protestantism throughout
+Germany. The Bohemians, however, in concert with Bethlem Gabor, king
+of Hungary, again besieged Vienna; but as the winter set in they were
+obliged to retire. From that moment the Protestant cause was lost;
+Saxony and Hesse-Darmstadt left the Union and joined Ferdinand. Denmark,
+which had promised its assistance to the Protestants, was persuaded to
+remain quiet. Sweden was engaged in a war with the Poles.
+
+“The Protestant army was assembled at Ulm; the army of the League, under
+the order of Maximilian of Bavaria, was at Donauworth. Maximilian worked
+upon the fears of the Protestant princes, who, frightened at the contest
+they had undertaken, agreed to a peace, by which they bound themselves
+to offer no aid to Frederick V.
+
+“The Imperial forces then marched to Bohemia and attacked Frederick's
+army outside Prague, and in less than an hour completely defeated it.
+Frederick escaped with his family to Holland. Ferdinand then took steps
+to carry out his oath. The religious freedom granted by Mathias was
+abolished. In Bohemia, Moravia, Silesia, and Austria proper. Many of the
+promoters of the rebellion were punished in life and property. The year
+following all members of the Calvinistic sect were forced to leave their
+country, a few months afterwards the Lutherans were also expelled, and
+in 1627 the exercise of all religious forms except those of the Catholic
+Church was forbidden; 200 of the noble, and 30,000 of the wealthier and
+industrial classes, were driven into exile; and lands and property to
+the amount of 5,000,000 or 6,000,000 pounds were confiscated.
+
+“The hereditary dominions of Frederick V were invaded, the Protestants
+were defeated, the Palatinate entirely subdued, and the electorate was
+conferred upon Maximilian of Bavaria; and the rigid laws against the
+Protestants were carried into effect in the Palatinate also. It had now
+become evident to all Europe that the Emperor of Austria was determined
+to stamp out Protestantism throughout Germany; and the Protestant
+princes, now thoroughly alarmed, besought aid from the Protestant
+countries, England, Holland, and Denmark. King James, who had seen
+unmoved the misfortunes which had befallen his daughter and her husband,
+and who had been dead to the general feeling of the country, could no
+longer resist, and England agreed to supply an annual subsidy; Holland
+consented to supply troops; and the King of Denmark joined the League,
+and was to take command of the army.
+
+“In Germany the Protestants of lower Saxony and Brunswick, and the
+partisan leader Mansfeldt, were still in arms. The army under the king
+of Denmark advanced into Brunswick, and was there confronted by that of
+the league under Tilly, while an Austrian army, raised by Wallenstein,
+also marched against it. Mansfeldt endeavoured to prevent Wallenstein
+from joining Tilly, but was met and defeated by the former general.
+Mansfeldt was, however, an enterprising leader, and falling back into
+Brandenburg, recruited his army, joined the force under the Duke of
+Saxe-Weimar, and started by forced marches to Silesia and Moravia, to
+join Bethlem Gabor in Hungary. Wallenstein was therefore obliged to
+abandon his campaign against the Danes and to follow him. Mansfeldt
+joined the Hungarian army, but so rapid were his marches that his force
+had dwindled away to a mere skeleton, and the assistance which it
+would be to the Hungarians was so small that Bethlem Gabor refused to
+cooperate with it against Austria.
+
+“Mansfeldt disbanded his remaining soldiers, and two months afterwards
+died. Wallenstein then marched north. In the meantime Tilly had attacked
+King Christian at Lutter, and completely defeated him. I will tell you
+about that battle some other time. When Wallenstein came north it
+was decided that Tilly should carry the war into Holland, and that
+Wallenstein should deal with the King of Denmark and the Protestant
+princes. In the course of two years he drove the Danes from Silesia,
+subdued Brandenburg and Mecklenburg, and, advancing into Pomerania,
+besieged Stralsund.
+
+“What a siege that was to be sure! Wallenstein had sworn to capture the
+place, but he didn't reckon upon the Scots. After the siege had begun
+Lieutenant General Sir Alexander Leslie, with 5000 Scots and Swedes,
+fought his way into the town; and though Wallenstein raised fire upon
+it, though we were half starved and ravaged by plague, we held out for
+three months, repulsing every assault, till at last the Imperialists
+were obliged to draw off; having lost 12,200 men.
+
+“This, however, was the solitary success on our side, and a few months
+since, Christian signed a peace, binding himself to interfere no more in
+the affairs of Germany. When Ferdinand considered himself free to carry
+out his plans, he issued an edict by which the Protestants throughout
+Germany were required to restore to the Catholics all the monasteries
+and land which had formerly belonged to the Catholic Church. The
+Catholic service was alone to be performed, and the Catholic princes
+of the empire were ordered to constrain their subjects, by force if
+necessary, to conform to the Catholic faith; and it was intimated to the
+Protestant princes that they would be equally forced to carry the edict
+into effect. But this was too much. Even France disapproved, not from
+any feeling of pity on the part of Richelieu for the Protestants, but
+because it did not suit the interests of France that Ferdinand should
+become the absolute monarch of all Germany.
+
+“In these circumstances Gustavus of Sweden at once resolved to assist
+the Protestants in arms, and ere long will take the field. That is
+what has brought us here. Already in the Swedish army there are 10,000
+Scotchmen, and in Denmark they also form the backbone of the force; and
+both in the Swedish and Danish armies the greater part of the native
+troops are officered and commanded by Scotchmen.
+
+“Hitherto I myself have been in the Danish service, but my regiment is
+about to take service with the Swedes. It has been quietly intimated to
+us that there will be no objection to our doing so, although Christian
+intends to remain neutral, at any rate for a time. We suffered very
+heavily at Lutter, and I need 500 men to fill up my ranks to the full
+strength.
+
+“Now, Graheme, I quite rely upon you. You were at college with Hepburn,
+Hume, and myself, and it will be a pleasure for us all to fight side by
+side; and if I know anything of your disposition I am sure you cannot
+be contented to be remaining here at the age of nine-and-twenty, rusting
+out your life as a Scotch laird, while Hepburn has already won a name
+which is known through Europe.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II SHIPWRECKED
+
+
+Upon the following morning Nigel Graheme told his visitors that he had
+determined to accept their offer, and would at once set to work to raise
+a company.
+
+“I have,” he said, “as you know, a small patrimony of my own, and as
+for the last eight years I have been living here looking after Malcolm
+I have been laying by any rents, and can now furnish the arms and
+accoutrements for a hundred men without difficulty. When Malcolm comes
+of age he must act for himself, and can raise two or three hundred men
+if he chooses; but at present he will march in my company. I understand
+that I have the appointment of my own officers.”
+
+“Yes, until you join the regiment,” Munro said. “You have the first
+appointments. Afterwards the colonel will fill up vacancies. You must
+decide how you will arm your men, for you must know that Gustavus'
+regiments have their right and left wings composed of musketeers, while
+the centre is formed of pikemen, so you must decide to which branch your
+company shall belong.”
+
+“I would choose the pike,” Nigel said, “for after all it must be by the
+pike that the battle is decided.”
+
+“Quite right, Nigel. I have here with me a drawing of the armour in use
+with us. You see they have helmets of an acorn shape, with a rim turning
+up in front; gauntlets, buff coats well padded in front, and large
+breast plates. The pikes vary from fourteen to eighteen feet long
+according to the taste of the commander. We generally use about sixteen.
+If your company is a hundred strong you will have two lieutenants and
+three ensigns. Be careful in choosing your officers. I will fill in the
+king's commission to you as captain of the company, authorizing you to
+enlist men for his service and to appoint officers thereto.”
+
+An hour or two later Colonel Munro and Captain Hume proceeded on their
+way. The news speedily spread through Nithsdale that Nigel Graheme had
+received a commission from the King of Sweden to raise a company in his
+service, and very speedily men began to pour in. The disbandment of the
+Scottish army had left but few careers open at home to the youth of
+that country, and very large numbers had consequently flocked to the
+Continent and taken service in one or other of the armies there, any
+opening of the sort, therefore, had only to be known to be freely
+embraced. Consequently, in eight-and-forty hours Nigel Graheme had
+applications from a far larger number than he could accept, and he was
+enabled to pick and choose among the applicants. Many young men of
+good family were among them, for in those days service in the ranks was
+regarded as honourable, and great numbers of young men of good family
+and education trailed a pike in the Scotch regiments in the service of
+the various powers of Europe. Two young men whose property adjoined
+his own, Herries and Farquhar, each of whom brought twenty of his own
+tenants with him, were appointed lieutenants, while two others, Leslie
+and Jamieson, were with Malcolm named as ensigns. The noncommissioned
+officers were appointed from men who had served before. Many of the men
+already possessed armour which was suitable, for in those day's there
+was no strict uniformity of military attire, and the armies of the
+various nationalities differed very slightly from each other. Colonel
+Munro returned in the course of a fortnight, Nigel Graheme's company
+completing the number of men required to fill up the ranks of his
+regiment.
+
+Captain Hume had proceeded further north. Colonel Munro stopped for
+a week in Nithsdale, giving instructions to the officers and
+noncommissioned officers as to the drill in use in the Swedish army.
+Military manoeuvres were in these days very different to what they have
+now become. The movements were few and simple, and easily acquired.
+Gustavus had, however, introduced an entirely new formation into his
+army. Hitherto troops had fought in solid masses, twenty or more deep.
+Gustavus taught his men to fight six deep, maintaining that if troops
+were steady this depth of formation should be able to sustain any
+assault upon it, and that with a greater depth the men behind were
+useless in the fight. His cavalry fought only three deep. The recruits
+acquired the new tactics with little difficulty. In Scotland for
+generations every man and boy had received a certain military training,
+and all were instructed in the use of the pike; consequently, at the end
+of a week Colonel Munro pronounced Nigel Graheme's company capable
+of taking their place in the regiment without discredit, and so went
+forward to see to the training of the companies of Hamilton, Balfour,
+and Scott, having arranged with Graheme to march his company to Dunbar
+in three weeks' time, when he would be joined by the other three
+companies. Malcolm was delighted with the stir and bustle of his new
+life. Accustomed to hard exercise, to climbing and swimming, he was a
+strong and well grown lad, and was in appearance fully a year beyond
+his age. He felt but little fatigued by the incessant drill in which the
+days were passed, though he was glad enough of an evening to lay aside
+his armour, of which the officers wore in those days considerably more
+than the soldiers, the mounted officers being still clad in full armour,
+while those on foot wore back and arm pieces, and often leg pieces, in
+addition to the helmet and breastplate. They were armed with swords and
+pistols, and carried besides what were called half pikes, or pikes some
+7 feet long. They wore feathers in their helmets, and the armour was of
+fine quality, and often richly damascened, or inlaid with gold.
+
+Very proud did Malcolm feel as on the appointed day he marched with
+the company from Nithsdale, with the sun glittering on their arms and a
+drummer beating the march at their head. They arrived in due course
+at Dunbar, and were in a few hours joined by the other three companies
+under Munro himself. The regiment which was now commanded by Lieutenant
+Colonel Munro had been raised in 1626 by Sir Donald Mackay of Farre and
+Strathnaver, 1500 strong, for the service of the King of Denmark.
+Munro was his cousin, and when Sir Donald went home shortly before, he
+succeeded to the command of the regiment. They embarked at once on board
+a ship which Munro had chartered, and were landed in Denmark and marched
+to Flensberg, where the rest of the regiment was lying.
+
+A fortnight was spent in severe drill, and then orders were received
+from Oxenstiern, the chancellor of Sweden, to embark the regiment on
+board two Swedish vessels, the Lillynichol and the Hound. On board
+the former were the companies of Captains Robert Munro, Hector Munro,
+Bullion, Nigel Graheme, and Hamilton. Colonel Munro sailed in this
+ship, while Major Sennot commanded the wing of the regiment on board the
+Hound. The baggage horses and ammunition were in a smaller vessel.
+
+The orders were that they were to land at Wolgast on the southern shore
+of the Baltic. Scarcely had they set sail than the weather changed, and
+a sudden tempest burst upon them. Higher and higher grew the wind,
+and the vessels were separated in the night. The Lillynichol laboured
+heavily in the waves, and the discomfort of the troops, crowded together
+between decks, was very great. Presently it was discovered that she had
+made a leak, and that the water was entering fast. Munro at once called
+forty-eight soldiers to the pumps. They were relieved every quarter
+of an hour, and by dint of the greatest exertions barely succeeded in
+keeping down the water. So heavily did the vessel labour that Munro bore
+away for Dantzig; but when night came on the storm increased in fury.
+They were now in shoal water, and the vessel, already half waterlogged,
+became quite unmanageable in the furious waves. Beyond the fact that
+they were fast driving on to the Pomeranian coast, they were ignorant of
+their position.
+
+“This is a rough beginning,” Nigel said to his nephew. “We bargained to
+run the risk of being killed by the Germans, but we did not expect to
+run the hazard of being drowned. I doubt if the vessel can live till
+morning. It is only eleven o'clock yet, and in spite of the pumps she is
+getting lower and lower in the water.”
+
+Before Malcolm had time to answer him there was a tremendous crash which
+threw them off their feet. All below struggled on deck, but nothing
+could be seen in the darkness save masses of foam as the waves broke on
+the rock on which they had struck. There were two more crashes, and
+then another, even louder and more terrible, and the vessel broke in two
+parts.
+
+“Come aft all,” Colonel Munro shouted; “this part of the wreck is
+fixed.”
+
+With great efforts all on board managed to reach the after portion of
+the vessel, which was wedged among the rocks, and soon afterwards the
+forepart broke up and disappeared. For two hours the sea broke wildly
+over the ship, and all had to hold on for life.
+
+Malcolm, even in this time of danger, could not but admire the calmness
+and coolness of his young colonel. He at once set men to work with
+ropes to drag towards the vessel the floating pieces of wreck which
+were tossing about in the boiling surf. The masts and yards were hauled
+alongside, and the colonel instructed the men to make themselves fast to
+these in case the vessel should go to pieces.
+
+Hour after hour passed, and at last, to the joy of all, daylight
+appeared. The boats had all been broken to pieces, and Munro now set the
+men to work to bind the spars and timbers together into a raft. One
+of the soldiers and a sailor volunteered to try to swim to shore with
+lines, but both were dashed to pieces.
+
+At one o'clock in the day some natives were seen collecting on the
+shore, and these presently dragged down a boat and launched it, and with
+great difficulty rowed out to the ship. A line was thrown to them, and
+with this they returned to shore, where they made the line fast. The
+storm was now abating somewhat, and Munro ordered the debarkation to
+commence.
+
+As many of the troops as could find a place on the raft, or could cling
+to the ropes fastened on its sides, started first, and by means of the
+line hauled the raft ashore. A small party then brought it back to the
+ship, while others manned the boat; and so after a number of trips the
+whole of the troops and crew were landed, together with all the weapons
+and armour that could be saved.
+
+From the peasantry Munro now learned that they had been wrecked upon
+the coast of Rugenwalde, a low lying tract of country in the north
+of Pomerania. The forts upon it were all in the possession of the
+Imperialists, while the nearest post of the Swedes was eighty miles
+away.
+
+The position was not a pleasant one. Many of the arms had been lost, and
+the gunpowder was of course destroyed. The men were exhausted and worn
+out with their long struggle with the tempest. They were without food,
+and might at any moment be attacked by their enemies.
+
+“Something must be done, and that quickly,” Munro said, “or our fate
+will be well nigh as bad as that of the Sinclairs; but before night we
+can do nothing, and we must hope that the Germans will not discover us
+till then.”
+
+Thereupon he ordered all the men to lie down under shelter of the bushes
+on the slopes facing the shore, and on no account to show themselves on
+the higher ground. Then he sent a Walloon officer of the regiment to the
+Pomeranian seneschal of the old castle of Rugenwalde which belonged to
+Bogislaus IV, Duke of Pomerania, to inform him that a body of Scotch
+troops in the service of the Swedish king had been cast on the coast,
+and begging him to supply them with a few muskets, some dry powder, and
+bullets, promising if he would do so that the Scotch would clear the
+town of its Imperial garrison.
+
+The castle itself, which was a very old feudal building, was held only
+by the retainers of the duke, and the seneschal at once complied
+with Munro's request, for the Duke of Pomerania, his master, although
+nominally an ally of the Imperialists, had been deprived of all
+authority by them, and the feelings of his subjects were entirely with
+the Swedes.
+
+Fifty old muskets, some ammunition, and some food were sent out by a
+secret passage to the Scots. There was great satisfaction among the men
+when these supplies arrived. The muskets which had been brought ashore
+were cleaned up and loaded, and the feeling that they were no longer
+in a position to fall helplessly into the hands of any foe who might
+discover them restored the spirits of the troops, and fatigue and hunger
+were forgotten as they looked forward to striking a blow at the enemy.
+
+“What did the colonel mean by saying that our position was well nigh as
+bad as that of the Sinclairs?” Malcolm asked Captain Hector Munro, who
+with two or three other officers was sheltering under a thick clump of
+bushes.
+
+“That was a bad business,” Captain Munro replied. “It happened now nigh
+twenty years ago. Colonel Monkhoven, a Swedish officer, had enlisted
+2300 men in Scotland for service with Gustavus, and sailed with them and
+with a regiment 900 strong raised by Sinclair entirely of his own clan
+and name. Sweden was at war with Denmark, and Stockholm was invested by
+the Danish fleet when Monkhoven arrived with his ships. Finding that he
+was unable to land, he sailed north, landed at Trondheim, and marching
+over the Norwegian Alps reached Stockholm in safety, where the
+appearance of his reinforcements discouraged the Danes and enabled
+Gustavus to raise the siege.
+
+“Unfortunately Colonel Sinclair's regiment had not kept with Monkhoven,
+it being thought better that they should march by different routes so as
+to distract the attention of the Norwegians, who were bitterly
+hostile. The Sinclairs were attacked several times, but beat off their
+assailants; when passing, however, through the tremendous gorge of
+Kringellen, the peasantry of the whole surrounding country gathered in
+the mountains. The road wound along on one side of the gorge. So steep
+was the hill that the path was cut in solid rock which rose almost
+precipitously on one side, while far below at their feet rushed a rapid
+torrent. As the Sinclairs were marching along through this rocky gorge a
+tremendous fire was opened upon them from the pine forests above, while
+huge rocks and stones came bounding down the precipice.
+
+“The Sinclairs strove in vain to climb the mountainside and get at their
+foes. It was impossible, and they were simply slaughtered where they
+stood, only one man of the whole regiment escaping to tell the story.”
+
+“That was a terrible massacre indeed,” Malcolm said. “I have read of a
+good many surprises and slaughters in our Scottish history, but never of
+such complete destruction as that only one man out of 900 should escape.
+And was the slaughter never avenged?”
+
+“No,” Munro replied. “We Scots would gladly march north and repay these
+savage peasants for the massacre of our countrymen, but the King of
+Sweden has had plenty of occupation for his Scotchmen in his own wars.
+What with the Russians and the Poles and the Danes his hands have been
+pretty full from that day to this, and indeed an expedition against the
+Norsemen is one which would bring more fatigue and labour than profit.
+The peasants would seek shelter in their forests and mountains, and
+march as we would we should never see them, save when they fell upon us
+with advantage in some defile.”
+
+At nightfall the troops were mustered, and, led by the men who had
+brought the arms, they passed by the secret passage into the castle,
+and thence sallied suddenly into the town below. There they fell upon a
+patrol of Imperial cavalry, who were all shot down before they had
+time to draw their swords. Then scattering through the town, the whole
+squadron of cuirassiers who garrisoned it were either killed or taken
+prisoners. This easy conquest achieved, the first care of Munro was to
+feed his troops. These were then armed from the stores in the town, and
+a strong guard being placed lest they should be attacked by the Austrian
+force, which was, they learned, lying but seven miles away, on the other
+side of the river, the troops lay down to snatch a few hours of needed
+rest.
+
+In the morning the country was scoured, and a few detached posts of the
+Austrians captured. The main body then advanced and blew up the bridge
+across the river. Five days later an order came from Oxenstiern, to
+whom Munro had at once despatched the news of his capture of Rugenwalde,
+ordering him to hold it to the last, the position being a very valuable
+one, as opening an entrance into Pomerania.
+
+The passage of the river was protected by entrenchments, strong redoubts
+were thrown up round Rugenwalde, and parties crossing the river in boats
+collected provisions and stores from the country to the very gates of
+Dantzig. The Austrians rapidly closed in upon all sides, and for nine
+weeks a constant series of skirmishes were maintained with them.
+
+At the end of that time Sir John Hepburn arrived from Spruce, having
+pushed forward by order of Oxenstiern by forced marches to their relief.
+Loud and hearty was the cheering when the two Scotch regiments united,
+and the friends, Munro and Hepburn, clasped hands. Not only had they
+been at college together, but they had, after leaving St. Andrews,
+travelled in companionship on the Continent for two or three years
+before taking service, Munro entering that of France, while Hepburn
+joined Sir Andrew Gray as a volunteer when he led a band to succour the
+Prince Palatine at the commencement of the war.
+
+“I have another old friend in my regiment, Hepburn,” the colonel
+said after the first greeting was over--“Nigel Graheme, of course you
+remember him.”
+
+“Certainly I do,” Hepburn exclaimed cordially, “and right glad will I
+be to see him again; but I thought your regiment was entirely from the
+north.”
+
+“It was originally,” Munro said; “but I have filled up the gaps with men
+from Nithsdale and the south. I was pressed for time, and our glens of
+Farre and Strathnaver had already been cleared of all their best men.
+The other companies are all commanded by men who were with us at St.
+Andrews--Balfour, George Hamilton, and James Scott.”
+
+“That is well,” Hepburn said. “Whether from the north or the south
+Scots fight equally well; and with Gustavus 'tis like being in our own
+country, so large a proportion are we of his majesty's army. And now,
+Munro, I fear that I must supersede you in command, being senior to
+you in the service, and having, moreover, his majesty's commission as
+governor of the town and district.”
+
+“There is no one to whom I would more willingly resign the command. I
+have seen some hard fighting, but have yet my name to win; while you,
+though still only a colonel, are famous throughout Europe.”
+
+“Thanks to my men rather than to myself,” Hepburn said, “though, indeed,
+mine is no better than the other Scottish regiments in the king's
+service; but we have had luck, and in war, you know, luck is
+everything.”
+
+There were many officers in both regiments who were old friends and
+acquaintances, and there was much feasting that night in the Scotch
+camp. In the morning work began again. The peasants of the district,
+8000 strong, were mustered and divided into companies, armed and
+disciplined, and with these and the two Scotch regiments Hepburn
+advanced through Pomerania to the gates of Colberg, fifty miles away,
+clearing the country of the Austrians, who offered, indeed, but a faint
+resistance.
+
+The Lord of Kniphausen, a general in the Swedish service, now arrived
+with some Swedish troops, and prepared to besiege the town. The rest
+of Munro's regiment accompanied him, having arrived safely at their
+destination, and the whole were ordered to aid in the investment
+of Colberg, while Hepburn was to seize the town and castle of
+Schiefelbrune, five miles distant, and there to check the advance of the
+Imperialists, who were moving forward in strength towards it.
+
+Hepburn performed his mission with a party of cavalry, and reported that
+although the castle was dilapidated it was a place of strength, and that
+it could be held by a resolute garrison; whereupon Munro with 500 men of
+his regiment was ordered to occupy it. Nigel Graheme's company was one
+of those which marched forward on the 6th of November, and entering
+the town, which was almost deserted by its inhabitants, set to work to
+prepare it for defence. Ramparts of earth and stockades were hastily
+thrown up, and the gates were backed by piles of rubbish to prevent them
+being blown in by petards.
+
+Scarcely were the preparations completed before the enemy were seen
+moving down the hillside.
+
+“How many are there of them, think you?” Malcolm asked Lieutenant
+Farquhar.
+
+“I am not skilled in judging numbers, Malcolm, but I should say that
+there must be fully five thousand.”
+
+There were indeed eight thousand Imperialists approaching, led by the
+Count of Montecuculi, a distinguished Italian officer, who had with
+him the regiments of Coloredo, Isslani, Goetz, Sparre, and Charles
+Wallenstein, with a large force of mounted Croats.
+
+Munro's orders were to hold the town as long as he could, and afterwards
+to defend the castle to the last man. The Imperial general sent in a
+message requesting him to treat for the surrender of the place; but
+Munro replied simply, that as no allusion to the word treaty was
+contained in his instructions he should defend the place to the last.
+The first advance of the Imperialists was made by the cavalry covered by
+1000 musketeers, but these were repulsed without much difficulty by the
+Scottish fire.
+
+The whole force then advanced to the attack with great resolution.
+Desperately the Highlanders defended the town, again and again the
+Imperialists were repulsed from the slight rampart, and when at last
+they won their way into the place by dint of numbers, every street,
+lane, alley, and house was defended to the last. Malcolm was almost
+bewildered at the din, the incessant roll of musketry, the hoarse shouts
+of the contending troops, the rattling of the guns, and the shrieks of
+pain.
+
+Every time the Imperialists tried to force their way in heavy columns
+up the streets the Scots poured out from the houses to resist them, and
+meeting them pike to pike hurled them backwards. Malcolm tried to keep
+cool, and to imitate the behaviour of his senior officers, repeating
+their orders, and seeing that they were carried out.
+
+Time after time the Austrians attempted to carry the place, and were
+always hurled back, although outnumbering the Scots by nigh twenty
+to one. At last the town was in ruins, and was on fire in a score of
+places. Its streets and lanes were heaped with dead, and it was no
+longer tenable. Munro therefore gave orders that the houses should
+everywhere be set on fire, and the troops fall back to the castle.
+
+Steadily and in good order his commands were carried out, and with
+levelled pikes, still facing the enemy, the troops retired into the
+castle. The Imperial general, seeing how heavy had been his losses in
+carrying the open town, shrank from the prospect of assaulting a castle
+defended by such troops, and when night fell he quietly marched away
+with the force under his command.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III SIR JOHN HEPBURN
+
+
+Munro's first care, when he found that the Imperialists had retreated
+in the direction of Colberg, was to send out some horsemen to discover
+whether the Swedes were in a position to cover that town. The men
+returned in two hours with the report that Field Marshal Horn, with the
+Swedish troops from Stettin, had joined Kniphausen and Hepburn, and were
+guarding the passage between the enemy and Colberg.
+
+Two days later a message arrived to the effect that Sir Donald Mackay,
+who had now been created Lord Reay, had arrived to take the command of
+his regiment, and that Nigel Graheme's company was to march and join
+him; while Munro with the rest of his command was to continue to hold
+the Castle of Schiefelbrune.
+
+Shortly afterwards General Bauditzen arrived with 4000 men and 18 pieces
+of cannon to press the siege of Colberg, which was one of the strongest
+fortresses in North Germany. On the 13th of November the news arrived
+that Montecuculi was again advancing to raise the siege; and Lord Reay
+with his half regiment, Hepburn with half his regiment, and a regiment
+of Swedish infantry marched out to meet him, Kniphausen being in
+command. They took up a position in a little village a few miles from
+the town; and here, at four o'clock in the morning, they were attacked
+by the Imperialists, 7000 strong. The Swedish infantry fled almost
+without firing a shot, but the Scottish musketeers of Hepburn and Reay
+stood their ground.
+
+For a time a desperate conflict raged. In the darkness it was utterly
+impossible to distinguish friend from foe, and numbers on both sides
+were mown down by the volleys of their own party. In the streets and
+gardens of the little village men fought desperately with pikes and
+clubbed muskets. Unable to act in the darkness, and losing many men from
+the storm of bullets which swept over the village, the Swedish cavalry
+who had accompanied the column turned and fled; and being unable to
+resist so vast a superiority of force, Kniphausen gave the word, and the
+Scotch fell slowly back under cover of the heavy mist which rose with
+the first breath of day, leaving 500 men, nearly half their force, dead
+behind them.
+
+Nigel Graheme's company had suffered severely; he himself was badly
+wounded. A lieutenant and one of the ensigns were killed, with thirty of
+the men, and many others were wounded with pike or bullet. Malcolm had
+had his share of the fighting. Several times he and the men immediately
+round him had been charged by the Imperialists, but their long pikes had
+each time repulsed the assaults.
+
+Malcolm had before this come to the conclusion, from the anecdotes he
+heard from the officers who had served through several campaigns, that
+the first quality of an officer is coolness, and that this is even more
+valuable than is reckless bravery. He had therefore set before himself
+that his first duty in action was to be perfectly calm, to speak without
+hurry or excitement in a quiet and natural tone.
+
+In his first fight at Schiefelbrune he had endeavoured to carry this
+out, but although he gained much commendation from Nigel and the other
+officers of the company for his coolness on that occasion, he had by no
+means satisfied himself; but upon the present occasion he succeeded
+much better in keeping his natural feelings in check, forcing himself to
+speak in a quiet and deliberate way without flurry or excitement, and in
+a tone of voice in no way raised above the ordinary. The effect had been
+excellent, and the soldiers, in talking over the affair next day, were
+loud in their praise of the conduct of the young ensign.
+
+“The lad was as cool as an old soldier,” one of the sergeants said, “and
+cooler. Just as the Austrian column was coming on for the third time,
+shouting, and cheering, and sending their bullets in a hail, he said to
+me as quietly as if he was giving an order about his dinner, 'I think,
+Donald, it would be as well to keep the men out of fire until the last
+moment. Some one might get hurt, you see, before the enemy get close
+enough to use the pikes.' And then when they came close he said, 'Now,
+sergeant, I think it is time to move out and stop them.' When they came
+upon us he was fighting with his half pike with the best of us. And when
+the Austrians fell back and began to fire again, and we took shelter
+behind the houses, he walked about on the road, stooping down over those
+who had fallen, to see if all were killed, and finding two were alive he
+called out, 'Will one of you just come and help me carry these men under
+shelter? They may get hit again if they remain here.' I went out to him,
+but I can tell you I didn't like it, for the bullets were coming along
+the road in a shower. His helmet was knocked off by one, and one of the
+men we were carrying in was struck by two more bullets and killed, and
+the lad seemed to mind it no more than if it had been a rainstorm in the
+hills at home. I thought when we left Nithsdale that the captain was in
+the wrong to make so young a boy an officer, but I don't think so now.
+Munro himself could not have been cooler. If he lives he will make a
+great soldier.”
+
+The defence of the Scots had been so stubborn that Montecuculi abandoned
+his attempt to relieve Colberg that day, and so vigilant was the watch
+which the besiegers kept that he was obliged at last to draw off his
+troops and leave Colberg to its fate. The place held out to the 26th of
+February, when the garrison surrendered and were allowed to march out
+with the honours of war, with pikes carried, colours flying, drums
+beating, matches lighted, with their baggage, and with two pieces of
+cannon loaded and ready for action. They were saluted by the army as
+they marched away to the nearest town held by the Austrians, and as they
+passed by Schiefelbrune Munro's command were drawn up and presented
+arms to the 1500 men who had for three months resisted every attempt to
+capture Colberg by assault.
+
+Nigel Graheme's wound was so severe that he was obliged for a time to
+relinquish the command of his company, which he handed over to Herries.
+
+As there had been two vacancies among the officers Malcolm would
+naturally have been promoted to the duties of lieutenant, but at his
+urgent request his uncle chose for the purpose a young gentleman of good
+family who had fought in the ranks, and had much distinguished himself
+in both the contests. Two others were also promoted to fill up the
+vacancies as ensigns.
+
+The troops after the capture of Colberg marched to Stettin, around which
+town they encamped for a time, while Gustavus completed his preparations
+for his march into Germany. While a portion of his army had been
+besieging Colberg, Gustavus had been driving the Imperialists out of the
+whole of Pomerania. Landing on the 24th of June with an army in all of
+15,000 infantry, 2000 cavalry, and about 3000 artillery, he had, after
+despatching troops to aid Munro and besiege Colberg, marched against the
+Imperialists under Conti. These, however, retreated in great disorder
+and with much loss of men, guns, and baggage, into Brandenburg; and in
+a few weeks after the Swedish landing only Colberg, Greifswald, and
+Demming held out. In January Gustavus concluded a treaty with France,
+who agreed to pay him an annual subsidy of 400,000 thalers on the
+condition that Gustavus maintained in the field an army of 30,000
+infantry and 6000 cavalry, and assured to the princes and peoples whose
+territory he might occupy the free exercise of their religion. England
+also promised a subsidy, and the Marquis of Hamilton was to bring over
+6000 infantry; but as the king did not wish openly to take part in
+the war this force was not to appear as an English contingent. Another
+regiment of Highlanders was brought over by Colonel John Munro of
+Obstell, and also a regiment recruited in the Lowlands by Colonel Sir
+James Lumsden.
+
+Many other parties of Scotch were brought over by gentlemen of rank.
+Four chosen Scottish regiments, Hepburn's regiment, Lord Reay's
+regiment, Sir James Lumsden's musketeers, and Stargate's corps, were
+formed into one brigade under the command of Hepburn. It was called the
+Green Brigade, and the doublets, scarfs, feathers, and standards were
+of that colour. The rest of the infantry were divided into the Yellow,
+Blue, and White Brigades.
+
+One evening when the officers of Reay's regiment were sitting round the
+campfire Lieutenant Farquhar said to Colonel Munro:
+
+“How is it that Sir John Hepburn has, although still so young, risen to
+such high honour in the counsel of the king; how did he first make his
+way?”
+
+“He first entered the force raised by Sir Andrew Gray, who crossed from
+Leith to Holland, and then uniting with a body of English troops under
+Sir Horace Vere marched to join the troops of the Elector Palatine. It
+was a work of danger and difficulty for so small a body of men to march
+through Germany, and Spinola with a powerful force tried to intercept
+them. They managed, however, to avoid him, and reached their destination
+in safety.
+
+“Vere's force consisted of 2200 men, and when he and Sir Andrew Gray
+joined the Margrave of Anspach the latter had but 4000 horse and
+4000 foot with him. There was a good deal of fighting, and Hepburn
+so distinguished himself that although then but twenty years old he
+obtained command of a company of pikemen in Sir Andrew Gray's band, and
+this company was specially selected as a bodyguard for the king.
+
+“There was one Scotchman in the band who vied even with Hepburn in the
+gallantry of his deeds. He was the son of a burgess of Stirling named
+Edmund, and on one occasion, laying aside his armour, he swam the Danube
+at night in front of the Austrian lines, and penetrated to the very
+heart of the Imperial camp. There he managed to enter the tent of the
+Imperialist general, the Count de Bucquoi, gagged and bound him, carried
+him to the river, swam across with him and presented him as a prisoner
+to the Prince of Orange, under whose command he was then serving.
+
+“It was well for Hepburn that at the battle of Prague he was guarding
+the king, or he also might have fallen among the hosts who died on that
+disastrous day. When the elector had fled the country Sir Andrew Gray's
+bands formed part of Mansfeldt's force, under whom they gained great
+glory. When driven out of the Palatinate they still kept up the war
+in various parts of Germany and Alsace. With the Scotch companies of
+Colonel Henderson they defended Bergen when the Marquis of Spinola
+besieged it. Morgan with an English brigade was with them, and right
+steadily they fought. Again and again the Spaniards attempted to storm
+the place, but after losing 12,000 men they were forced to withdraw on
+the approach of Prince Maurice.
+
+“The elector now made peace with the emperor, and Mansfeldt's bands
+found themselves without employment. Mansfeldt in vain endeavoured to
+obtain employment under one of the powers, but failing, marched into
+Lorraine. There, it must be owned, they plundered and ravaged till they
+were a terror to the country. At last the Dutch, being sorely pressed
+by the Spaniards, offered to take them into their pay, and the bands
+marched out from Lorraine in high spirits.
+
+“They were in sore plight for fighting, for most of them had been
+obliged to sell even their arms and armour to procure food. Spinola,
+hearing of their approach pushed forward with a strong force to
+intercept them, and so came upon them at Fleurus, eight miles from
+Namur, on the 30th of August, 1622.
+
+“The Scots were led by Hepburn, Hume, and Sir James Ramsay; the English
+by Sir Charles Rich, brother to the Earl of Warwick, Sir James Hayes,
+and others. The odds seemed all in favour of the Spaniards who were
+much superior in numbers, and were splendidly accoutred and well
+disciplined, and what was more, were well fed, while Mansfeldt's bands
+were but half armed and almost wholly starving.
+
+“It was a desperate battle, and the Spaniards in the end remained
+masters of the field, but Mansfeldt with his bands had burst their
+way through them, and succeeded in crossing into Holland. Here their
+position was bettered; for, though there was little fighting for them to
+do, and they could get no pay, they lived and grew fat in free quarters
+among the Dutch. At last the force broke up altogether; the Germans
+scattered to their homes, the English crossed the seas, and Hepburn led
+what remained of Sir Andrew Gray's bands to Sweden, where he offered
+their services to Gustavus. The Swedish king had already a large number
+of Scotch in his service, and Hepburn was made a colonel, having
+a strong regiment composed of his old followers inured to war and
+hardship, and strengthened by a number of new arrivals. When in 1625
+hostilities were renewed with Poland Hepburn's regiment formed part
+of the army which invaded Polish Prussia. The first feat in which he
+distinguished himself in the service of Sweden was at the relief of
+Mewe, a town in Eastern Prussia, which was blockaded by King Sigismund
+at the head of 30,000 Poles. The town is situated at the confluence of
+the Bersa with the Vistula, which washes two sides of its walls.
+
+“In front of the other face is a steep green eminence which the Poles
+had very strongly entrenched, and had erected upon it ten batteries
+of heavy cannon. As the town could only be approached on this side the
+difficulties of the relieving force were enormous; but as the relief of
+the town was a necessity in order to enable Gustavus to carry out the
+campaign he intended, the king determined to make a desperate effort to
+effect it.
+
+“He selected 3000 of his best Scottish infantry, among whom was
+Hepburn's own regiment, and 500 horse under Colonel Thurn. When they
+were drawn up he gave them a short address on the desperate nature of
+the service they were about to perform, namely, to cut a passage over a
+strongly fortified hill defended by 30,000 men. The column, commanded
+by Hepburn, started at dusk, and, unseen by the enemy, approached their
+position, and working round it began to ascend the hill by a narrow
+and winding path encumbered by rocks and stones, thick underwood, and
+overhanging trees.
+
+“The difficulty for troops with heavy muskets, cartridges, breastplates,
+and helmets, to make their way up such a place was enormous, and the
+mountain side was so steep that they were frequently obliged to haul
+themselves up by the branches of the trees; nevertheless, they managed
+to make their way through the enemy's outposts unobserved, and reached
+the summit, where the ground was smooth and level.
+
+“Here they fell at once upon the Poles, who were working busily at their
+trenches, and for a time gained a footing there; but a deadly fire of
+musketry with showers of arrows and stones, opened upon them from all
+points, compelled the Scots to recoil from the trenches, when they were
+instantly attacked by crowds of horsemen in mail shirts and steel caps.
+Hepburn drew off his men till they reached a rock on the plateau, and
+here they made their stand, the musketeers occupying the rock, the
+pikemen forming in a wall around it.
+
+“They had brought with them the portable chevaux-de-frise carried by the
+infantry in the Swedish service. They fixed this along in front, and
+it aided the spearmen greatly in resisting the desperate charges of the
+Polish horsemen. Hepburn was joined by Colonel Mostyn, an Englishman,
+and Count Brahe, with 200 German arquebusiers, and this force for two
+days withstood the incessant attacks of the whole of the Polish army.
+
+“While this desperate strife was going on, and the attention of the
+enemy entirely occupied, Gustavus managed to pass a strong force of men
+and a store of ammunition into the town, and the Poles, seeing that
+he had achieved his purpose, retired unmolested. In every battle which
+Gustavus fought Hepburn bore a prominent part. He distinguished himself
+at the storming of Kesmark and the defeat of the Poles who were marching
+to its relief.
+
+“He took part in the siege and capture of Marienburg and in the defeat
+of the Poles at Dirschau. He was with Leslie when last year he defended
+Stralsund against Wallenstein, and inflicted upon the haughty general
+the first reverse he had ever met with. Truly Hepburn has won his
+honours by the edge of the sword.”
+
+“Wallenstein is the greatest of the Imperial commanders, is he not?”
+ Farquhar asked.
+
+“He and Tilly,” Munro replied. “'Tis a question which is the greatest.
+They are men of a very different stamp. Tilly is a soldier, and nothing
+but a soldier, save that he is a fanatic in religion. He is as cruel as
+he is brave, and as portentously ugly as he is cruel.
+
+“Wallenstein is a very different man. He has enormous ambition and great
+talent, and his possessions are so vast that he is a dangerous subject
+for any potentate, even the most powerful. Curiously enough, he was born
+of Protestant parents, but when they died, while he was yet a child, he
+was committed to the care of his uncle, Albert Slavata, a Jesuit, and
+was by him brought up a strict Catholic. When he had finished the course
+of his study at Metz he spent some time at the University of Altdorf,
+and afterwards studied at Bologna and Padua. He then travelled in Italy,
+Germany, France, Spain, England, and Holland, studying the military
+forces and tactics of each country.
+
+“On his return to Bohemia he took service under the Emperor Rudolph
+and joined the army of General Basta in Hungary, where he distinguished
+himself greatly at the siege of Grau. When peace was made in 1606
+Wallenstein returned to Bohemia, and though he was but twenty-three
+years old he married a wealthy old widow, all of whose large properties
+came to him at her death eight years afterwards.
+
+“Five years later he raised at his own cost two hundred dragoons to
+support Ferdinand of Gratz in his war against the Venetians. Here he
+greatly distinguished himself, and was promoted to a colonelcy. He
+married a second time, and again to one of the richest heiresses of
+Austria. On the outbreak of the religious war of 1618 he raised a
+regiment of Cuirassiers, and fought at its head. Two years later he was
+made quartermaster general of the army, and marched at the head of an
+independent force into Moravia, and there re-established the Imperial
+authority.
+
+“The next year he bought from the Emperor Ferdinand, for a little over
+7,000,000 florins, sixty properties which the emperor had confiscated
+from Protestants whom he had either executed or banished. He had been
+made a count at the time of his second marriage; he was now named a
+prince, which title was changed into that of the Duke of Friedland. They
+say that his wealth is so vast that he obtains two millions and a half
+sterling a year from his various estates.
+
+“When in 1625 King Christian of Denmark joined in the war against the
+emperor, Wallenstein raised at his own cost an army of 50,000 men
+and defeated Mansfeldt's army. After that he cleared the Danes out
+of Silesia, conquered Brandenburg and Mecklenburg, and laid siege to
+Stralsund, and there broke his teeth against our Scottish pikes. For his
+services in that war Wallenstein received the duchy of Mecklenburg.
+
+“At present he is in retirement. The conquests which his army have
+made for the emperor aroused the suspicion and jealousy of the German
+princes, and it may be that the emperor himself was glad enough of an
+excuse to humble his too powerful subject. At any rate, Wallenstein's
+army was disbanded, and he retired to one of his castles. You may
+be sure we shall hear of him again. Tilly, you know, is the Bavarian
+commander, and we shall probably encounter him before long.”
+
+New Brandenburg and several other towns were captured and strongly
+garrisoned, 600 of Reay's regiment under Lieutenant Colonel Lindsay
+being left in New Brandenburg. Nigel Graheme was still laid up, but his
+company formed part of the force.
+
+“This is ill fortune indeed,” Malcolm said to Lieutenant Farquhar, “thus
+to be shut up here while the army are marching away to win victories in
+the field.”
+
+“It is indeed, Malcolm, but I suppose that the king thinks that Tilly is
+likely to try and retake these places, and so to threaten his rear as
+he marches forward. He would never have placed as strong a force of his
+best soldiers here if he had not thought the position a very important
+one.”
+
+The troops were quartered in the larger buildings of New Brandenburg;
+the officers were billeted upon the burghers. The position of the
+country people and the inhabitants of the towns of Germany during this
+long and desolating war was terrible; no matter which side won, they
+suffered. There were in those days no commissariat wagons bringing
+up stores from depots and magazines to the armies. The troops lived
+entirely upon the country through which they marched. In exceptional
+cases, when the military chest happened to be well filled, the
+provisions acquired might be paid for, but as a rule armies upon the
+march lived by foraging. The cavalry swept in the flocks and herds
+from the country round. Flour, forage, and everything else required was
+seized wherever found, and the unhappy peasants and villagers thought
+themselves lucky if they escaped with the loss of all they possessed,
+without violence, insult, and ill treatment. The slightest resistance
+to the exactions of the lawless foragers excited their fury, and
+indiscriminate slaughter took place. The march of an army could be
+followed by burned villages, demolished houses, crops destroyed, and
+general ruin, havoc, and desolation.
+
+In the cases of towns these generally escaped indiscriminate plunder by
+sending deputies forward to meet advancing armies, when an offer would
+be made to the general to supply so much food and to pay so much money
+on condition that private property was respected. In these cases the
+main body of the troops was generally encamped outside the town. Along
+the routes frequently followed by armies the country became a desert,
+the hapless people forsook their ruined homes, and took refuge in the
+forests or in the heart of the hills, carrying with them their portable
+property, and driving before them a cow or two and a few goats.
+
+How great was the general slaughter and destruction may be judged by the
+fact that the population of Germany decreased by half during the war,
+and in Bohemia the slaughter was even greater. At the commencement of
+the war the population of Bohemia consisted of 3,000,000 of people,
+inhabiting 738 towns and 34,700 villages. At the end of the war there
+were but 780,000 inhabitants, 230 towns, and 6000 villages. Thus three
+out of four of the whole population had been slaughtered during the
+struggle.
+
+Malcolm was, with Lieutenant Farquhar, quartered upon one of the
+principal burghers of New Brandenburg, and syndic of the weavers. He
+received them cordially.
+
+“I am glad,” he said, “to entertain two Scottish officers, and, to speak
+frankly, your presence will be of no slight advantage, for it is only
+the houses where officers are quartered which can hope to escape from
+the plunder and exactions of the soldiers. My wife and I will do our
+best to make you comfortable, but we cannot entertain you as we could
+have done before this war began, for trade is altogether ruined. None
+have money wherewith to buy goods. Even when free from the presence of
+contending armies, the country is infested with parties of deserters or
+disbanded soldiers, who plunder and murder all whom they meet, so that
+none dare travel along the roads save in strong parties. I believe that
+there is scarce a village standing within twenty miles, and many parts
+have suffered much more than we have. If this war goes on, God help the
+people, for I know not what will become of them. This is my house, will
+you please to enter.”
+
+Entering a wide hall, he led them into a low sitting room where his wife
+and three daughters were at work. They started up with looks of alarm at
+the clatter of steel in the hall.
+
+“Wife,” the syndic said as he entered, “these are two gentlemen,
+officers of the Scottish regiment; they will stay with us during the
+occupation of the town. I know that you and the girls will do your best
+to make their stay pleasant to them.”
+
+As the officers removed their helmets the apprehensions of the women
+calmed down on perceiving that one of their guests was a young man of
+three or four and twenty, while the other was a lad, and that both had
+bright pleasant faces in no way answering the terrible reputation gained
+by the invincible soldiers of the Swedish king.
+
+“I hope,” Farquhar said pleasantly, “that you will not put yourselves
+out of your way for us. We are soldiers of fortune accustomed to sleep
+on the ground and to live on the roughest fare, and since leaving
+Scotland we have scarcely slept beneath a roof. We will be as little
+trouble to you as we can, and our two soldier servants will do all that
+we need.”
+
+Farquhar spoke in German, for so large a number of Germans were serving
+among the Swedes that the Scottish officers had all learned to speak
+that language and Swedish, German being absolutely necessary for their
+intercourse with the country people. This was the more easy as the two
+languages were akin to each other, and were less broadly separated from
+English in those days than they are now.
+
+It was nearly a year since Farquhar and Malcolm had landed on the shores
+of the Baltic, and living as they had done among Swedes and Germans,
+they had had no difficulty in learning to speak both languages fluently.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV NEW BRANDENBURG
+
+
+Farquhar and Malcolm Graheme were soon at home with their hosts. The
+syndic had offered to have their meals prepared for them in a separate
+chamber, but they begged to be allowed to take them with the family,
+with whom they speedily became intimate.
+
+Three weeks after the capture of New Brandenburg the news came that
+Tilly with a large army was rapidly approaching.
+
+Every effort was made to place the town in a position of defence. Day
+after day messengers came in with the news that the other places which
+had been garrisoned by the Swedes had been captured, and very shortly
+the Imperialist army was seen approaching. The garrison knew that they
+could expect no relief from Gustavus, who had ten days before marched
+northward, and all prepared for a desperate resistance. The townsfolk
+looked on with trembling apprehension, their sympathies were with the
+defenders, and, moreover, they knew that in any case they might expect
+pillage and rapine should the city be taken, for the property of the
+townspeople when a city was captured was regarded by the soldiery as
+their lawful prize, whether friendly to the conquerors or the reverse.
+The town was at once summoned to surrender, and upon Lindsay's refusal
+the guns were placed in position, and the siege began.
+
+As Tilly was anxious to march away to the north to oppose Gustavus he
+spared no effort to reduce New Brandenburg as speedily as possible, and
+his artillery fired night and day to effect breaches in the walls. The
+Scotch officers saw little of their hosts now, for they were almost
+continually upon the walls.
+
+At the first news of the approach of the Imperialists the syndic had
+sent away his daughters to the house of a relative at Stralsund, where
+his son was settled in business. When Farquhar and Malcolm returned to
+eat a meal or to throw themselves on their beds to snatch a short sleep,
+the syndic anxiously questioned them as to the progress of the
+siege. The reports were not hopeful. In several places the walls were
+crumbling, and it was probable that a storm would shortly be attempted.
+The town itself was suffering heavily, for the balls of the besiegers
+frequently flew high, and came crashing among the houses. Few of the
+inhabitants were to be seen in the streets; all had buried their most
+valuable property, and with scared faces awaited the issue of the
+conflict.
+
+After six days' cannonade the walls were breached in many places, and
+the Imperialists advanced to the assault. The Scotch defended them with
+great resolution, and again and again the Imperialists recoiled, unable
+to burst their way through the lines of pikes or to withstand the heavy
+musketry fire poured upon them from the walls and buildings.
+
+But Tilly's army was so strong that he was able continually to bring up
+fresh troops to the attack, while the Scotch were incessantly engaged.
+For eight-and-forty hours the defenders resisted successfully, but at
+last, worn out by fatigue, they were unable to withstand the onslaught
+of the enemy, and the latter forced their way into the town. Still the
+Scots fought on. Falling back from the breaches, they contested every
+foot of the ground, holding the streets and lanes with desperate
+tenacity, and inflicting terrible losses upon the enemy.
+
+At last, twelve hours later, they were gathered in the marketplace,
+nearly in the centre of the town, surrounded on all sides by the enemy.
+Several times the Scottish bugles had sounded a parley, but Tilly,
+furious at the resistance, and at the loss which the capture of the town
+had entailed, had issued orders that no quarter should be given, and his
+troops pressed the now diminished band of Scotchmen on all sides.
+
+Even now they could not break through the circle of spears, but from
+every window and roof commanding them a deadly fire was poured in.
+Colonel Lindsay was shot dead. Captain Moncrieff, Lieutenant Keith, and
+Farquhar fell close to Malcolm. The shouts of “Kill, kill, no quarter,”
+ rose from the masses of Imperialists. Parties of the Scotch, preferring
+to die sword in hand rather than be shot down, flung themselves into the
+midst of the enemy and died fighting.
+
+At last, when but fifty men remained standing, these in a close body
+rushed at the enemy and drove them by the fury of their attack some
+distance down the principal street. Then numbers told. The band was
+broken up, and a desperate hand-to-hand conflict raged for a time.
+
+Two of the Scottish officers alone, Captain Innes and Lieutenant
+Lumsden, succeeded in breaking their way down a side lane, and thence,
+rushing to the wall, leapt down into the moat, and swimming across,
+succeeded in making their escape, and in carrying the news of the
+massacre to the camp of Gustavus, where the tale filled all with
+indignation and fury. Among the Scotch regiments deep vows of vengeance
+were interchanged, and in after battles the Imperialists had cause
+bitterly to rue having refused quarter to the Scots at New Brandenburg.
+
+When the last melee was at its thickest, and all hope was at an end,
+Malcolm, who had been fighting desperately with his half pike, found
+himself for a moment in a doorway. He turned the handle, and it opened
+at once. The house, like all the others, was full of Imperialists, who
+had thrown themselves into it when the Scots made their charge, and were
+now keeping up a fire at them from the upper windows. Closing the door
+behind him, Malcolm stood for a moment to recover his breath. He had
+passed unscathed through the three days' fighting, though his armour and
+helmet were deeply dinted in many places.
+
+The din without and above was tremendous. The stroke of sword on armour,
+the sharp crack of the pistols, the rattle of musketry, the shouts of
+the Imperialists, and the wild defiant cries of the Highlanders mingled
+together.
+
+As Malcolm stood panting he recalled the situation, and, remembering
+that the syndic's house was in the street behind, he determined to gain
+it, feeling sure that his host would shelter him if he could. Passing
+through the house he issued into a courtyard, quickly stripped off his
+armour and accoutrements, and threw them into an outhouse. Climbing on
+the roof of this he got upon the wall, and ran along it until behind the
+house of the syndic. He had no fear of being observed, for the attention
+of all in the houses in the street he had left would be directed to the
+conflict below.
+
+The sound of musketry had already ceased, telling that the work of
+slaughter was well nigh over, when Malcolm dropped into the courtyard
+of the syndic; the latter and his wife gave a cry of astonishment as the
+lad entered the house, breathless and pale as death.
+
+“Can you shelter me awhile?” he said. “I believe that all my countrymen
+are killed.”
+
+“We will do our best, my lad,” the syndic said at once. “But the houses
+will be ransacked presently from top to bottom.”
+
+“Let him have one of the servant's disguises,” the wife said; “they can
+all be trusted.”
+
+One of the serving men was at once called in, and he hurried off with
+Malcolm.
+
+The young Scotchmen had made themselves very popular with the servants
+by their courtesy and care to avoid giving unnecessary trouble, and in
+a few minutes Malcolm was attired as a serving man, and joined the
+servants who were busy in spreading the tables with provisions, and
+in broaching a large cask of wine to allay the passions of the
+Imperialists.
+
+It was not long before they came. Soon there was a thundering knocking
+at the door, and upon its being opened a number of soldiers burst in.
+Many were bleeding from wounds. All bore signs of the desperate strife
+in which they had been engaged.
+
+“You are welcome,” the host said, advancing towards them. “I have made
+preparations for your coming; eat and drink as it pleases you.”
+
+Rushing to the wine casks, the soldiers appeased their thirst with long
+draughts of wine, and then fell upon the eatables. Other bands followed,
+and the house was soon filled from top to bottom with soldiers, who
+ransacked the cupboards, loaded themselves with such things as they
+deemed worth carrying away, and wantonly broke and destroyed what they
+could not. The servants were all kept busy bringing up wine from the
+cellars. This was of good quality, and the soldiers, well satisfied,
+abstained from personal violence.
+
+All night long pandemonium reigned in the town. Shrieks and cries, oaths
+and sounds of conflict arose from all quarters, as citizens or their
+wives were slaughtered by drunken soldiers, or the latter quarrelled and
+fought among themselves for some article of plunder. Flames broke out in
+many places, and whole streets were burned, many of the drunken soldiers
+losing their lives in the burning houses; but in the morning the bugles
+rang out, the soldiers desisted from their orgies, and such as were able
+to stand staggered away to join their colours.
+
+A fresh party marched into the town; these collected the stragglers,
+and seized all the horses and carts for the carriage of the baggage and
+plunder. The burgomaster had been taken before Tilly and commanded to
+find a considerable sum of money the first thing in the morning, under
+threat that the whole town would be burned down, and the inhabitants
+massacred if it was not forthcoming.
+
+A council of the principal inhabitants was hastily summoned at daybreak.
+The syndics of the various guilds between them contributed the necessary
+sum either in money or in drafts, and at noon Tilly marched away with
+his troops, leaving the smoking and ruined town behind him. Many of the
+inhabitants were forced as drivers to accompany the horses and carts
+taken away. Among these were three of the syndic's serving men, Malcolm
+being one of the number.
+
+It was well that the Pomeranian dialect differed so widely from the
+Bavarian, so Malcolm's German had consequently passed muster without
+suspicion. The Imperialist army, although dragging with them an immense
+train of carts laden with plunder, marched rapidly. The baggage was
+guarded by horsemen who kept the train in motion, galloping up and down
+the line, and freely administering blows among their captives whenever a
+delay or stoppage occurred.
+
+The whole country through which they passed was desolated and wasted,
+and the army would have fared badly had it not been for the herds of
+captured cattle they drove along with them, and the wagons laden with
+flour and wine taken at New Brandenburg and the other towns they had
+stormed. The marches were long, for Tilly was anxious to accomplish his
+object before Gustavus should be aware of the direction he was taking.
+
+This object was the capture of the town of Magdeburg, a large and
+important city, and one of the strongholds of Protestantism. Here he was
+resolved to strike a blow which would, he believed, terrify Germany into
+submission.
+
+When Gustavus heard that Tilly had marched west, he moved against
+Frankfort-on-the-Oder, where the Imperialists were commanded by Count
+Schomberg. The latter had taken every measure for the defence of the
+town, destroying all the suburbs, burning the country houses and mills,
+and cutting down the orchards and vineyards.
+
+Gustavus, accompanied by Sir John Hepburn, at once reconnoitred the
+place and posted his troops. The Blue and Yellow Brigades were posted
+among the vineyards on the road to Custrin; the White Brigade took post
+opposite one of the two gates of the town. Hepburn and the Green Brigade
+were stationed opposite the other.
+
+As the Swedes advanced the Imperialist garrison, who were 10,000 strong,
+opened fire with musketry and cannon from the walls. The weakest point
+in the defence was assigned by Schomberg to Colonel Walter Butler, who
+commanded a regiment of Irish musketeers in the Imperialist service.
+In the evening Hepburn and some other officers accompanied the king
+to reconnoitre near the walls. A party of Imperialists, seeing some
+officers approaching, and judging by their waving plumes they were
+of importance, sallied quietly out of a postern gate unperceived and
+suddenly opened fire. Lieutenant Munro, of Munro's regiment, was shot in
+the leg, and Count Teuffel, a colonel of the Life Guards, in the arm.
+A body of Hepburn's regiment, under Major Sinclair, rushed forward and
+drove in the Imperialists, a lieutenant colonel and a captain being
+captured.
+
+So hotly did they press the Imperialists that they were able to make a
+lodgment, on some high ground near the rampart, on which stood an old
+churchyard surrounded by a wall, and whence their fire could sweep
+the enemy's works. Some cannon were at once brought up and placed in
+position here, and opened fire on the Guben gate. Captain Gunter, of
+Hepburn's regiment, went forward with twelve men, and in spite of a very
+heavy fire from the walls reconnoitred the ditch and approaches to the
+walls.
+
+The next day all was ready for the assault. It was Palm Sunday, the
+3d of April, and the attack was to take place at five o'clock in the
+afternoon. Before advancing, Hepburn and several of the other officers
+wished to lay aside their armour, as its weight was great, and would
+impede their movements. The king, however, forbade them to do so.
+
+“No,” he said; “he who loves my service will not risk life lightly. If
+my officers are killed, who is to command my soldiers?”
+
+Fascines and scaling ladders were prepared. The Green Brigade were to
+head the assault, and Gustavus, addressing them, bade them remember New
+Brandenburg.
+
+At five o'clock a tremendous cannonade was opened on the walls from all
+the Swedish batteries, and under cover of the smoke the Green Brigade
+advanced to the assault. From the circle of the walls a cloud of smoke
+and fire broke out from cannon and arquebus, muskets, and wall pieces.
+Sir John Hepburn and Colonel Lumsden, side by side, led on their
+regiments against the Guben gate; both carried petards.
+
+In spite of the tremendous fire poured upon them from the wall they
+reached the gate, and the two colonels fixed the petards to it and
+retired a few paces. In a minute there was a tremendous explosion, and
+the gate fell scattered in fragments. Then the Scottish pikemen rushed
+forward. As they did so there was a roar of cannon, and a storm of
+bullets ploughed lanes through the close ranks of the pikemen, for the
+Imperialists, expecting the attack, had placed cannon, loaded to the
+muzzle with bullets, behind the gates.
+
+Munro's regiment now leapt into the moat, waded across, and planting
+their ladders under a murderous fire, stormed the works flanking the
+gate, and then joined their comrades, who were striving to make an
+entrance. Hepburn, leading on the pikemen, was hit on the knee, where he
+had in a former battle been badly wounded.
+
+“Go on, bully Munro,” he said jocularly to his old schoolfellow, “for I
+am wounded.”
+
+A major who advanced to take his place at the head of the regiment
+was shot dead, and so terrible was the fire that even the pikemen of
+Hepburn's regiment wavered for a moment; but Munro and Lumsden, with
+their vizors down and half pikes in their hands, cheered on their men,
+and, side by side, led the way.
+
+“My hearts!” shouted Lumsden, waving his pike--“my brave hearts, let's
+enter.”
+
+“Forward!” shouted Munro; “advance pikes!”
+
+With a wild cheer the Scots burst forward; the gates were stormed,
+and in a moment the cannon, being seized, were turned, and volleys of
+bullets poured upon the dense masses of the Imperialists. The pikemen
+pressed forward in close column, shoulder to shoulder, the pikes
+levelled in front, the musketeers behind firing on the Imperialists in
+the houses.
+
+In the meantime Gustavus, with the Blue and Yellow Swedish Brigades,
+stormed that part of the wall defended by Butler with his Irishmen.
+These fought with extreme bravery, and continued their resistance until
+almost every man was killed, when the two brigades burst into the
+town, the White Brigade storming the wall in another quarter. Twice the
+Imperialist drums beat a parley, but their sound was deadened by the
+roar of musketry and the boom of cannon from wall and battery, and the
+uproar and shouting in every street and house. The Green Brigade, under
+its commander, maintained its regular order, pressing forward with
+resistless strength. In vain the Austrians shouted for quarter. They
+were met by shouts of--“Remember New Brandenburg!”
+
+Even now, when all was lost, Tilly's veterans fought with extreme
+bravery and resolution; but at last, when Butler had fallen, and
+Schomberg and Montecuculi, and a few other officers had succeeded in
+escaping, all resistance ceased. Four colonels, 36 officers, and 3000
+men were killed. Fifty colours and ten baggage wagons, laden with gold
+and silver plate, were captured.
+
+Many were taken prisoners, and hundreds were drowned in the Oder, across
+which the survivors of the garrison made their escape. Plundering at
+once began, and several houses were set on fire; but Gustavus ordered
+the drums to beat, and the soldiers to repair to their colours outside
+the town, which was committed to the charge of Sir John Hepburn, with
+his regiment.
+
+The rumour that Magdeburg was the next object of attack circulated among
+Tilly's troops the day after they marched west from New Brandenburg. It
+originated in some chance word dropped by a superior officer, and seemed
+confirmed by the direction which they were taking which was directly
+away from the Swedish army. There was a report, too, that Count
+Pappenheim, who commanded a separate army, would meet Tilly there, and
+that every effort would be made to capture the town before Gustavus
+could march to its assistance.
+
+Malcolm could easily have made his escape the first night after leaving
+New Brandenburg; but the distance to be traversed to join the Swedish
+army was great, confusion and disorder reigned everywhere, and he had
+decided that it would be safer to remain with the Imperialist army until
+Gustavus should approach within striking distance. On the road he kept
+with the other two men who had been taken with the horses from the
+syndic of the weavers, and, chatting with them when the convoy halted,
+he had not the least fear of being questioned by others. Indeed, none of
+those in the long train of carts and wagons paid much attention to their
+fellows, all had been alike forced to accompany the Imperialists, and
+each was too much occupied by the hardships of his own lot, and by
+thoughts of the home from which he had been torn, to seek for the
+companionship of his comrades in misfortune.
+
+As soon, however, as Malcolm heard the report of Tilly's intentions, he
+saw that it was of the utmost importance that the King of Sweden should
+be informed of the Imperialist plans as early as possible, and he
+determined at once to start and endeavour to make his way across the
+country. At nightfall the train with the baggage and plunder was as
+usual so placed that it was surrounded by the camps of the various
+brigades of the army in order to prevent desertion. The previous night
+an escape would have been comparatively easy, for the soldiers were worn
+out by their exertions at the siege of New Brandenburg, and were still
+heavy from the drink they had obtained there; but discipline was now
+restored, and the sentries were on the alert. A close cordon of these
+was placed around the baggage train; and when this was passed, there
+would still be the difficulty of escaping through the camps of soldiery,
+and of passing the outposts. Malcolm waited until the camp became quiet,
+or rather comparatively quiet, for the supplies of wine were far from
+exhausted, and revelling was still going on in various parts of the
+camp, for the rigid discipline in use in modern armies was at that time
+unknown, and except when on duty in the ranks a wide amount of license
+was permitted to the soldiers. The night was fine and bright, and
+Malcolm saw that it would be difficult to get through the line of
+sentries who were stationed some thirty or forty yards apart.
+
+After thinking for some time he went up to a group of eight or ten
+horses which were fastened by their bridles to a large store wagon on
+the outside of the baggage camp. Malcolm unfastened the bridles and
+turned the horses heads outwards. Then he gave two of them a sharp prick
+with his dagger, and the startled animals dashed forward in affright,
+followed by their companions. They passed close to one of the sentries,
+who tried in vain to stop them, and then burst into the camp beyond,
+where their rush startled the horses picketed there. These began to kick
+and struggle desperately to free themselves from their fastenings. The
+soldiers, startled at the sudden noise, sprang to their feet, and much
+confusion reigned until the runaway horses were secured and driven back
+to their lines.
+
+The instant he had thus diverted the attention of the whole line of
+sentries along that side of the baggage camp, Malcolm crept quietly up
+and passed between them. Turning from the direction in which the horses
+had disturbed the camp, he made his way cautiously along. Only the
+officers had tents, the men sleeping on the ground around their fires.
+He had to move with the greatest caution to avoid treading upon the
+sleepers, and was constantly compelled to make detours to get beyond
+the range of the fires, round which groups of men were sitting and
+carousing.
+
+At last he reached the outside of the camp, and taking advantage of
+every clump of bushes he had no difficulty in making his way through the
+outposts, for as the enemy was known to be far away, no great vigilance
+was observed by the sentries. He had still to be watchful, for fires
+were blazing in a score of places over the country round, showing that
+the foragers of the army were at their usual work of rapine, and he
+might at any moment meet one of these returning laden with spoil.
+
+Once or twice, indeed, he heard the galloping of bodies of horse, and
+the sound of distant pistol shots and the shrieks of women came faintly
+to his ears. He passed on, however, without meeting with any of the
+foraging parties, and by morning was fifteen miles away from Tilly's
+camp. Entering a wood he threw himself down and slept soundly for some
+hours. It was nearly noon before he started again. After an hour's
+walking he came upon the ruins of a village. Smoke was still curling up
+from the charred beams and rafters of the cottages, and the destruction
+had evidently taken place but the day before. The bodies of several
+men and women lay scattered among the houses; two or three dogs were
+prowling about, and these growled angrily at the intruder, and would
+have attacked him had he not flourished a club which he had cut in the
+woods for self defence.
+
+Moving about through the village he heard a sound of wild laughter, and
+going in that direction saw a woman sitting on the ground. In her lap
+was a dead child pierced through with a lance. The woman was talking
+and laughing to it, her clothes were torn, and her hair fell in wild
+disorder over her shoulders. It needed but a glance to tell Malcolm that
+the poor creature was mad, distraught by the horrors of the previous
+day.
+
+A peasant stood by leaning on a stick, mournfully regarding her. He
+turned suddenly round with the weapon uplifted at the sound of Malcolm's
+approach, but lowered it on seeing that the newcomer was a lad.
+
+“I hoped you were a soldier,” the peasant said, as he lowered his stick.
+“I should like to kill one, and then to be killed myself. My God, what
+is life worth living for in this unhappy country? Three times since the
+war began has our village been burned, but each time we were warned of
+the approach of the plunderers, and escaped in time. Yesterday they came
+when I was away, and see what they have done;” and he pointed to his
+wife and child, and to the corpses scattered about.
+
+“It is terrible,” Malcolm replied. “I was taken a prisoner but two days
+since at the sack of New Brandenburg, but I have managed to escape. I am
+a Scot, and am on my way now to join the army of the Swedes, which will,
+I hope, soon punish the villains who have done this damage.”
+
+“I shall take my wife to her mother,” the peasant said, “and leave
+her there. I hope God will take her soon, and then I will go and take
+service under the Swedish king, and will slay till I am slain. I would
+kill myself now, but that I would fain avenge my wife and child on some
+of these murderers of Tilly's before I die.”
+
+Malcolm felt that the case was far beyond any attempt at consolation.
+
+“If you come to the Swedish army ask for Ensign Malcolm Graheme of
+Reay's Scottish regiment, and I will take you to one of the German
+corps, where you will understand the language of your comrades.” So
+saying he turned from the bloodstained village and continued his way.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V MARAUDERS
+
+
+Malcolm had brought with him from Tilly's camp a supply of provisions
+sufficient for three or four days, and a flask of wine. Before he
+started from New Brandenburg the syndic had slipped into his band a
+purse containing ten gold pieces, and whenever he came to a village
+which had escaped the ravages of the war he had no difficulty in
+obtaining provisions.
+
+It was pitiable at each place to see the anxiety with which the
+villagers crowded round him upon his arrival and questioned him as to
+the position of the armies and whether he had met with any parties
+of raiders on the way. Everywhere the cattle had been driven into the
+woods; boys were posted as lookouts on eminences at a distance to bring
+in word should any body of men be seen moving in that direction; and the
+inhabitants were prepared to fly instantly at the approach of danger.
+
+The news that Tilly's army was marching in the opposite direction was
+received with a deep sense of thankfulness and relief, for they were
+now assured of a respite from his plunderers, although still exposed to
+danger from the arrival of some of the numerous bands. These, nominally
+fighting for one or other of the parties, were in truth nothing but
+marauders, being composed of deserters and desperadoes of all kinds, who
+lived upon the misfortunes of the country, and were even more cruel and
+pitiless than were the regular troops.
+
+At one of these villages Malcolm exchanged his attire as a serving man
+of a rich burgher for that of a peasant lad. He was in ignorance of the
+present position of the Swedish army, and was making for the intrenched
+camp of Schwedt, on the Oder, which Gustavus had not left when he had
+last heard of him.
+
+On the fourth day after leaving the camp of Tilly, as Malcolm was
+proceeding across a bare and desolate country he heard a sound of
+galloping behind him, and saw a party of six rough looking horsemen
+coming along the road. As flight would have been useless he continued
+his way until they overtook him. They reined up when they reached him.
+
+“Where are you going, boy, and where do you belong to?” the leader of
+the party asked.
+
+“I am going in search of work,” Malcolm answered. “My village is
+destroyed and my parents killed.”
+
+“Don't tell me that tale,” the man said, drawing a pistol from his
+holster. “I can tell by your speech that you are not a native of these
+parts.”
+
+There was nothing in the appointments of the men to indicate which party
+they favoured, and Malcolm thought it better to state exactly who he
+was, for a doubtful answer might be followed by a pistol shot, which
+would have brought his career to a close.
+
+“You are right,” he said quietly; “but in these times it is not safe
+always to state one's errand to all comers. I am a Scotch officer in the
+army of the King of Sweden. I was in New Brandenburg when it was stormed
+by Tilly. I disguised myself, and, passing unnoticed, was forced to
+accompany his army as a teamster. The second night I escaped, and am now
+making my way to Schwedt, where I hope to find the army.”
+
+The man replaced his pistol.
+
+“You are an outspoken lad,” he said laughing, “and a fearless one. I
+believe that your story is true, for no German boor would have looked
+me in the face and answered so quietly; but I have heard that the Scotch
+scarce know what danger is, though they will find Tilly and Pappenheim
+very different customers to the Poles.”
+
+“Which side do you fight on?” Malcolm asked.
+
+“A frank question and a bold one!” the leader laughed. “What say you,
+men? Whom are we for just at present? We were for the Imperialists the
+other day, but now they have marched away, and as it may be the Swedes
+will be coming in this direction, I fancy that we shall soon find
+ourselves on the side of the new religion.”
+
+The men laughed. “What shall we do with this boy? To begin with, if he
+is what he says, no doubt he has some money with him.”
+
+Malcolm at once drew out his purse. “Here are nine gold pieces,” he
+said. “They are all I have, save some small change.”
+
+“That is better than nothing,” the leader said, pocketing the purse.
+“And now what shall we do with him?”
+
+“He is a Protestant,” one of the men replied; “best shoot him.”
+
+“I should say,” another said, “that we had best make him our cook. Old
+Rollo is always grumbling at being kept at the work, and his cooking
+gets worse and worse. I could not get my jaws into the meat this
+morning.”
+
+A murmur of agreement was raised by the other horsemen.
+
+“So be it,” the leader said. “Dost hear, lad? You have the choice
+whether you will be cook to a band of honourable gentlemen or be shot at
+once.”
+
+“The choice pleases me not,” Malcolm replied. “Still, if it must
+needs be, I would prefer for a time the post of cook to the other
+alternative.”
+
+“And mind you,” the leader said sharply, “at the first attempt to escape
+we string you up to the nearest bough. Carl, do you lead him back and
+set him to work, and tell the men there to keep a sharp watch upon him.”
+
+One of the men turned his horse, and, with Malcolm walking by his side,
+left the party. They soon turned aside from the road, and after a ride
+of five miles across a rough and broken country entered a wood. Another
+half mile and they reached the foot of an eminence, on the summit of
+which stood a ruined castle. Several horses were picketed among the
+trees at the foot of the hill, and two men were sitting near them
+cleaning their arms. The sight of these deterred Malcolm from carrying
+into execution the plan which he had formed--namely, to strike down his
+guard with his club as he dismounted, to leap on his horse, and ride
+off.
+
+“Who have you there, Carl?” one of the men asked as they rose and
+approached the newcomers.
+
+“A prisoner,” Carl said, “whom the captain has appointed to the
+honourable office of cook instead of old Rollo, whose food gets harder
+and tougher every day. You are to keep a sharp eye over the lad, who
+says he is a Scotch officer of the Swedes, and to shoot him down if he
+attempts to escape.”
+
+“Why, I thought those Scots were very devils to fight,” one of the men
+said, “and this is but a boy. How comes he here?”
+
+“He told the captain his story, and he believed it,” Carl said
+carelessly, “and the captain is not easily taken in. He was captured by
+Tilly at New Brandenburg, which town we heard yesterday he assaulted and
+sacked, killing every man of the garrison; but it seems this boy put
+on a disguise, and being but a boy I suppose passed unnoticed, and was
+taken off as a teamster with Tilly's army. He gave them the slip, but
+as he has managed to fall into our hands I don't know that he has gained
+much by the exchange. Now, youngster, go up to the castle.”
+
+Having picketed his horse the man led the way up the steep hill. When
+they reached the castle Malcolm saw that it was less ruined than it had
+appeared to be from below. The battlements had indeed crumbled away,
+and there were cracks and fissures in the upper parts of the walls,
+but below the walls were still solid and unbroken, and as the rock was
+almost precipitous, save at the point at which a narrow path wound up
+to the entrance, it was still capable of making a stout defence against
+attack.
+
+A strong but roughly made gate, evidently of quite recent make, hung
+on the hinges, and passing through it Malcolm found himself in the
+courtyard of the castle. Crossing this he entered with his guide what
+had once been the principal room of the castle. A good fire blazed in
+the centre; around this half a dozen men were lying on a thick couch of
+straw. Malcolm's guide repeated the history of the newcomer, and then
+passed through with him into a smaller apartment, where a man was
+attending to several sauce pans over a fire.
+
+“Rollo,” he said, “I bring you a substitute. You have been always
+grumbling about being told off for the cooking, just because you
+happened to be the oldest of the band. Here is a lad who will take your
+place, and tomorrow you can mount your horse and ride with the rest of
+us.”
+
+“And be poisoned, I suppose, with bad food when I return,” the man
+grumbled--“a nice lookout truly.”
+
+“There's one thing, you old grumbler, it is quite certain he cannot do
+worse than you do. My jaws ache now with trying to eat the food you gave
+us this morning. Another week and you would have starved the whole band
+to death.”
+
+“Very well,” the man said surlily; “we will see whether you have gained
+by the exchange. What does this boy know about cooking?”
+
+“Very little, I am afraid,” Malcolm said cheerfully; “but at least I can
+try. If I must be a cook I will at least do my best to be a good one.
+Now, what have you got in these pots?”
+
+Rollo grumblingly enumerated their contents, and then putting on his
+doublet went out to join his comrades in the hall, leaving Malcolm to
+his new duties.
+
+The latter set to work with a will. He saw that it was best to appear
+contented with the situation, and to gain as far as possible the
+goodwill of the band by his attention to their wants. In this way their
+vigilance would become relaxed, and some mode of escape might open
+itself to him. At dusk the rest of the band returned, and Malcolm found
+that those who had met him with the captain were but a portion of the
+party, as three other companies of equal strength arrived at about the
+same time, the total number mounting up to over thirty.
+
+Malcolm was conscious that the supper was far from being a success; but
+for this he was not responsible, as the cooking was well advanced when
+he undertook it; however the band were not dissatisfied, for it was
+much better than they had been accustomed to, as Malcolm had procured
+woodwork from the disused part of the castle, and had kept the fire
+briskly going; whereas his predecessor in the office had been too
+indolent to get sufficient wood to keep the water on the boil.
+
+In the year which Malcolm had spent in camp he had learned a good deal
+of rough cookery, for when on active duty the officers had often to
+shift for themselves, and consequently next day he was able to produce
+a dinner so far in advance of that to which the band was accustomed that
+their approbation was warmly and loudly expressed.
+
+The stew was juicy and tender, the roast done to a turn, and the
+bread, baked on an iron plate, was pronounced to be excellent. The band
+declared that their new cook was a treasure. Malcolm had already found
+that though he could move about the castle as he chose, one of the band
+was now always stationed at the gate with pike and pistols, while at
+night the door between the room in which he cooked and the hall was
+closed, and two or three heavy logs thrown against it.
+
+Under the pretence of getting wood Malcolm soon explored the castle. The
+upper rooms were all roofless and open to the air. There were no windows
+on the side upon which the path ascended, and by which alone an attack
+upon the castle was possible. Here the walls were pierced only by narrow
+loopholes for arrows or musketry. On the other sides the windows were
+large, for here the steepness of the rock protected the castle from
+attack.
+
+The kitchen in which he cooked and slept had no other entrance save that
+into the hall, the doorway into the courtyard being closed by a heap of
+fallen stones from above. Two or three narrow slits in the wall allowed
+light and air to enter. Malcolm saw that escape at night, after he had
+once been shut in, was impossible, and that in the daytime he could not
+pass out by the gate; for even if by a sudden surprise he overpowered
+the sentry there, he would be met at the bottom of the path by the
+two men who were always stationed as guards to the horses, and to give
+notice of the approach of strangers.
+
+The only chance of escape, therefore, was by lowering himself from one
+of the windows behind, down the steep rock. To do this a rope of some
+seventy feet long was necessary, and after a careful search through the
+ruins he failed to discover even the shortest piece of rope.
+
+That afternoon some of the band on their return from foraging drove in
+half a dozen cattle, and one of these was with much difficulty compelled
+to climb up the path to the castle, and was slaughtered in the yard.
+
+“There, Scot, are victuals for the next week; cut it up, and throw the
+head and offal down the rock behind.”
+
+As Malcolm commenced his unpleasant task a thought suddenly struck him,
+and he laboured away cheerfully and hopefully. After cutting up the
+animal into quarters he threw the head, the lower joints of the legs,
+and the offal, from the window. The hide he carried, with the four
+quarters, into his kitchen, and there concealed it under the pile of
+straw which served for his bed.
+
+When the dinner was over, and the usual carousal had begun, and he knew
+there was no chance of any of the freebooters coming into the room, he
+spread out the hide on the floor, cut off the edges, and trimmed it up
+till it was nearly circular in form, and then began to cut a strip two
+inches wide round and round till he reached the centre. This gave him a
+thong of over a hundred feet long. Tying one end to a ring in the wall
+he twisted the long strip until it assumed the form of a rope, which
+was, he was sure, strong enough to bear many times his weight.
+
+This part of the work was done after the freebooters had retired to
+rest. When he had finished cutting the hide he went in as usual and sat
+down with them as they drank, as he wished to appear contented with his
+position. The freebooters were discussing an attack upon a village some
+thirty miles away. It lay in a secluded position, and had so far escaped
+pillage either by the armies or wandering bands. The captain said he had
+learned that the principal farmer was a well-to-do man with a large herd
+of cattle, some good horses, and a well stocked house. It was finally
+agreed that the band should the next day carry out another raid which
+had already been decided upon, and that they should on the day following
+that sack and burn Glogau.
+
+As soon as the majority of the band had started in the morning Malcolm
+made his way with his rope to the back of the castle, fastened it to the
+window, and launched himself over the rock, which, although too steep
+to climb, was not perpendicular; and holding by the rope Malcolm had
+no difficulty in lowering himself down. He had before starting taken
+a brace of pistols and a sword from the heap of weapons which the
+freebooters had collected in their raids, and as soon as he reached the
+ground he struck off through the wood.
+
+Enough had been said during the conversation the night before to
+indicate the direction in which Glogau lay, and he determined, in the
+first place, to warn the inhabitants of the village of the fate which
+the freebooters intended for them.
+
+He walked miles before seeing a single person in the deserted fields. He
+had long since left the wood, and was now traversing the open country,
+frequently turning round to examine the country around him, for at
+any moment after he had left, his absence from the castle might be
+discovered, and the pursuit begun. He hoped, however, that two or three
+hours at least would elapse before the discovery was made.
+
+He had, before starting, piled high the fire in the hall, and had placed
+plenty of logs for the purpose of replenishing it close at hand. He put
+tankards on the board, and with them a large jug full of wine, so that
+the freebooters would have no occasion to call for him, and unless they
+wanted him they would be unlikely to look into the kitchen. Except when
+occasionally breaking into a walk to get breath, he ran steadily on.
+It was not until he had gone nearly ten miles that he saw a goatherd
+tending a few goats, and from him he learned the direction of Glogau,
+and was glad to find he had not gone very far out of the direct line.
+At last, after asking the way several times, he arrived within a short
+distance of the village. The ground had now become undulating, and the
+slopes were covered with trees. The village lay up a valley, and it
+was evident that the road he was travelling was but little frequented,
+ending probably at the village itself. Proceeding for nearly two miles
+through a wood he came suddenly upon Glogau.
+
+It stood near the head of the valley, which was here free of trees,
+and some cultivated fields lay around it. The houses were surrounded
+by fruit trees, and an air of peace and tranquillity prevailed such as
+Malcolm had not seen before since he left his native country. One house
+was much larger than the rest; several stacks stood in the rick yard,
+and the large stables and barns gave a proof of the prosperity of its
+owner. The war which had already devastated a great part of Germany had
+passed by this secluded hamlet.
+
+No signs of work were to be seen, the village was as still and quiet as
+if it was deserted. Suddenly Malcolm remembered that it was the Sabbath,
+which, though always kept strictly by the Scotch and Swedish soldiers
+when in camp, for the most part passed unobserved when they were engaged
+in active service. Malcolm turned his steps towards the house; as he
+neared it he heard the sound of singing within. The door was open, and
+he entered and found himself on the threshold of a large apartment in
+which some twenty men and twice as many women and children were standing
+singing a hymn which was led by a venerable pastor who stood at the head
+of the room, with a powerfully built elderly man, evidently the master
+of the house, near him.
+
+The singing was not interrupted by the entrance of the newcomer. Many
+eyes were cast in his direction, but seeing that their leaders went on
+unmoved, the little congregation continued their hymn with great fervour
+and force. When they had done the pastor prayed for some time, and then
+dismissed the congregation with his blessing. They filed out in a quiet
+and orderly way, but not until the last had left did the master of the
+house show any sign of observing Malcolm, who had taken his place near
+the door.
+
+Then he said gravely, “Strangers do not often find their way to Glogau,
+and in truth we can do without them, for a stranger in these times too
+often means a foe; but you are young, my lad, though strong enough to
+bear weapons, and can mean us no ill. What is it that brings you to our
+quiet village?”
+
+“I have, sir, but this morning escaped from the hands of the freebooters
+at Wolfsburg, and I come to warn you that last night I heard them agree
+to attack and sack your village tomorrow; therefore, before pursuing my
+own way, which is to the camp of the Swedish king, in whose service I
+am, I came hither to warn you of their intention.”
+
+Exclamations of alarm arose from the females of the farmer's family, who
+were sitting at the end of the room. The farmer waved his hand and the
+women were instantly silent.
+
+“This is bad news, truly,” he said gravely; “hitherto God has protected
+our village and suffered us to worship Him in our own way in peace and
+in quiet in spite of the decrees of emperors and princes. This gang
+of Wolfsburg have long been a scourge to the country around it, and
+terrible are the tales we have heard of their violence and cruelty.
+I have for weeks feared that sooner or later they would extend their
+ravages even to this secluded spot.”
+
+“And, indeed, I thank you, brave youth, for the warning you have given
+us, which will enable us to send our womenkind, our cattle and horses,
+to a place of safety before these scourges of God arrive here. Gretchen,
+place food and wine before this youth who has done us so great a
+service; doubtless he is hungry and thirsty, for 'tis a long journey
+from Wolfsburg hither.”
+
+“What think you, father, shall I warn the men at once of the coming
+danger, or shall I let them sleep quietly this Sabbath night for the
+last time in their old homes?”
+
+“What time, think you, will these marauders leave their hold?” the
+pastor asked Malcolm.
+
+“They will probably start by daybreak,” Malcolm said, “seeing that the
+journey is a long one; but this is not certain, as they may intend
+to remain here for the night, and to return with their plunder on the
+following day to the castle.”
+
+“But, sir,” he went on, turning to the farmer, “surely you will not
+abandon your home and goods thus tamely to these freebooters. You have
+here, unless I am mistaken, fully twenty stout men capable of bearing
+arms; the marauders number but thirty in all, and they always leave at
+least five to guard the castle and two as sentries over the horses; thus
+you will not have more than twenty-three to cope with. Had they, as they
+expected, taken you by surprise, this force would have been ample to
+put down all resistance here; but as you will be prepared for them, and
+will, therefore, take them by surprise, it seems to me that you should
+be able to make a good fight of it, stout men-at-arms though the
+villains be.”
+
+“You speak boldly, sir, for one but a boy in years,” the pastor said;
+“it is lawful, nay it is right to defend one's home against these
+lawless pillagers and murderers, but as you say, evil though their ways
+are, these freebooters are stout men-at-arms, and we have heard that
+they have taken a terrible vengeance on the villages which have ventured
+to oppose them.”
+
+“I am a Scottish officer in the King of Sweden's army,” Malcolm said,
+“and fought at Schiefelbrune and New Brandenburg, and in the fight when
+the Imperialists tried to relieve Colberg, and having, I hope, done my
+duty in three such desperate struggles against the Imperialist veterans,
+I need not shrink from an encounter with these freebooters. If you
+decide to defend the village I am ready to strike a blow at them, for
+they have held me captive for five days, and have degraded me by making
+me cook for them.”
+
+A slight titter was heard among the younger females at the indignant
+tone in which Malcolm spoke of his enforced culinary work.
+
+“And you are truly one of those Scottish soldiers of the Swedish hero
+who fight so stoutly for the Faith and of whose deeds we have heard so
+much!” the pastor said. “Truly we are glad to see you. Our prayers have
+not been wanting night and morning for the success of the champions of
+the Reformed Faith. What say you, my friend? Shall we take the advice of
+this young soldier and venture our lives for the defence of our homes?”
+
+“That will we,” the farmer said warmly. “He is used to war, and can give
+us good advice. As far as strength goes, our men are not wanting. Each
+has his sword and pike, and there are four or five arquebuses in the
+village. Yes, if there be a chance of success, even of the slightest, we
+will do our best as men in defence of our homes.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI THE ATTACK ON THE VILLAGE
+
+
+“And now,” the farmer said to Malcolm, “what is your advice? That we
+will fight is settled. When, where, and how? This house is strongly
+built, and we could so strengthen its doors and windows with beams that
+we might hold out for a long time against them.”
+
+“No,” Malcolm said, “that would not be my advice. Assuredly we might
+defend the house; but in that case the rest of the village, the herds
+and granaries, would fall into their hands. To do any good, we must
+fight them in the wood on their way hither. But although I hope for
+a favourable issue, I should strongly advise that you should have the
+herds and horses driven away. Send off all your more valuable goods in
+the wagons, with your women and children, to a distance. We shall fight
+all the better if we know that they are all in safety. Some of the old
+men and boys will suffice for this work. And now, methinks, you had best
+summon the men, for there will be work for them tonight.”
+
+The bell which was used to call the hands from their work in the fields
+and woods at sunset soon sounded, and the men in surprise came trooping
+in at the summons. When they were assembled the farmer told them the
+news he had heard, and the determination which had been arrived at to
+defend the village.
+
+After the first movement of alarm caused by the name of the dreaded band
+of the Wolfsburg had subsided Malcolm was glad to see an expression
+of stout determination come over the faces of the assemblage, and all
+declared themselves ready to fight to the last. Four of the elder men
+were told off at once to superintend the placing of the more movable
+household goods of the village in wagons, which were to set out at
+daybreak with the cattle and families.
+
+“Now,” Malcolm said, “I want the rest to bring mattocks and shovels and
+to accompany me along the road. There is one spot which I marked as I
+came along as being specially suited for defence.”
+
+This was about half a mile away, and as darkness had now set in the men
+lighted torches, and with their implements followed him. At the spot
+which he had selected there was for the distance of a hundred yards a
+thick growth of underwood bordering the track on either side. Across the
+road, at the end of the passage nearest to the farm, Malcolm directed
+ten of the men to dig a pit twelve feet wide and eight feet deep. The
+rest of the men he set to work to cut nearly through the trunks of the
+trees standing nearest the road until they were ready to fall.
+
+Ten trees were so treated, five on either side of the road. Standing, as
+they did, among the undergrowth, the operation which had been performed
+on them was invisible to any one passing by. Ropes were now fastened to
+the upper part of the trees and carried across the road, almost hidden
+from sight by the foliage which met over the path. When the pit was
+completed the earth which had been taken from it was scattered in the
+wood out of sight. Light boughs were then placed over the hole. These
+were covered with earth and sods trampled down until the break in the
+road was not perceptible to a casual eye.
+
+This was done by Malcolm himself, as the lightest of the party, the
+boughs sufficing to bear his weight, although they would give way
+at once beneath that of a horse. The men all worked with vigour and
+alacrity as soon as they understood Malcolm's plans. Daylight was
+breaking when the preparations were completed. Malcolm now divided the
+party, and told them off to their respective posts. They were sixteen in
+all, excluding the pastor.
+
+Eight were placed on each side of the road. Those on one side were
+gathered near the pit which had been dug, those on the other were
+opposite to the tree which was farthest down the valley. The freebooters
+were to be allowed to pass along until the foremost fell into the pit.
+The men stationed there were at once to haul upon the rope attached to
+the tree near it and to bring it down. Its fall would bar the road and
+prevent the horsemen from leaping the pit. Those in the rear were,
+if they heard the crash before the last of the marauders had passed
+through, to wait until they had closed up, which they were sure to do
+when the obstacle was reached, and then to fell the tree to bar their
+retreat.
+
+The instant this was done both parties were to run to other ropes and
+to bring down the trees upon the horsemen gathered on the road, and were
+then to fall upon them with axe, pike, and arquebus.
+
+“If it works as well as I expect,” Malcolm said, “not one of them will
+escape from the trap.”
+
+Soon after daybreak bowls of milk and trays of bread and meat were
+brought down to the workers by some of the women. As there was no
+immediate expectation of attack, the farmer himself, with the pastor,
+went back to the village to cheer the women before their departure.
+
+“You need not be afraid, wife,” the farmer said. “I shall keep to my
+plans, because when you have once made a plan it is foolish to change
+it; but I deem not that there is any real need for sending you and
+the wagons and beasts away. This young Scotch lad seems made for a
+commander, and truly, if all his countrymen are like himself, I wonder
+no longer that the Poles and Imperialists have been unable to withstand
+them. Truly he has constructed a trap from which this band of villains
+will have but little chance of escape, and I trust that we may slay them
+without much loss to ourselves. What rejoicings will there not be in
+the fifty villages when the news comes that their oppressors have
+been killed! The good God has assuredly sent this youth hither as His
+instrument in defeating the oppressors, even as He chose the shepherd
+boy David out of Israel to be the scourge of the Philistines.”
+
+By this time all was ready for a start, and having seen the wagons
+fairly on their way the farmer returned to the wood, the pastor
+accompanying the women. Three hours passed before there were any signs
+of the marauders, and Malcolm began to think that the idea might
+have occurred to them that he had gone to Glogau, and that they might
+therefore have postponed their raid upon that village until they could
+make sure of taking it by surprise, and so capturing all the horses
+and valuables before the villagers had time to remove them. Glogau was,
+however, quite out of Malcolm's direct line for the Swedish camp, and
+it was hardly likely that the freebooters would think that their late
+captive would go out of his way to warn the village, in which he had no
+interest whatever; indeed they would scarcely be likely to recall the
+fact that he had been present when they were discussing their proposed
+expedition against it.
+
+All doubts were, however, set at rest when a boy who had been stationed
+in a high tree near the edge of the wood ran in with the news that a
+band of horsemen were riding across the plain, and would be there in a
+few minutes. Every one fell into his appointed place. The farmer himself
+took the command of the party on one side of the road, Malcolm of that
+on the other. Matches were blown, and the priming of the arquebuses
+looked to; then they gathered round the ropes, and listened for the
+tramp of horses.
+
+Although it was but a few minutes before it came, the time seemed long
+to those waiting; but at last a vague sound was heard, which rapidly
+rose into a loud trampling of horses. The marauders had been riding
+quietly until they neared the wood, as speed was no object; but as they
+wished to take the village by surprise--and it was just possible that
+they might have been seen approaching--they were now riding rapidly.
+
+Suddenly the earth gave way under the feet of the horses of the captain
+and his lieutenant, who were riding at the head of the troop, and men
+and animals disappeared from the sight of those who followed. The two
+men behind them pulled their horses back on their haunches, and checked
+them at the edge of the pit into which their leaders had fallen.
+
+As they did so a loud crack was heard, and a great tree came crashing
+down, falling directly upon them, striking them and their horses to the
+ground. A loud cry of astonishment and alarm rose from those behind,
+followed by curses and exclamations of rage. A few seconds after the
+fall of the tree there was a crash in the rear of the party, and to
+their astonishment the freebooters saw that another tree had fallen
+there, and that a barricade of boughs and leaves closed their way behind
+as in front. Deprived of their leaders, bewildered and alarmed at this
+strange and unexpected occurrence, the marauders remained irresolute.
+Two or three of those in front got off their horses and tried to make
+their way to the assistance of their comrades who were lying crushed
+under the mass of foliage, and of their leaders in the pit beyond.
+
+But now almost simultaneously two more crashes were heard, and a tree
+from each side fell upon them. Panic stricken now the horsemen strove to
+dash through the underwood, but their progress was arrested, for among
+the bushes ropes had been fastened from tree to tree; stakes had been
+driven in, and the bushes interlaced with cords. The trees continued to
+fall till the portion of the road occupied by the troop was covered by a
+heap of fallen wood and leaf. Then for the first time the silence in the
+wood beyond them was broken, the flashes of firearms darted out from the
+brushwood, and then with a shout a number of men armed with pikes and
+axes sprang forward to the attack.
+
+A few only of the marauders were in a position to offer any resistance
+whatever. The greater portion were buried under the mass of foliage.
+Many had been struck down by the trunks or heavy arms of the trees.
+All were hampered and confused by the situation in which they found
+themselves. Under such circumstances it was a massacre rather than a
+fight. Malcolm, seeing the inability of the freebooters to oppose any
+formidable resistance, sheathed his sword, and left it to the peasants
+to avenge the countless murders which the band had committed, and the
+ruin and misery which they had inflicted upon the country.
+
+In a few minutes all was over. The brigands were shot down, piked, or
+slain by the heavy axes through the openings in their leafy prison.
+Quarter was neither asked for nor given. The freebooters knew that it
+would be useless, and died cursing their foes and their own fate in
+being thus slaughtered like rats in a trap. Two or three of the peasants
+were wounded by pistol shots, but this was all the injury that their
+success cost them.
+
+“The wicked have digged a pit, and they have fallen into it themselves,”
+ the farmer said as he approached the spot where Malcolm was standing,
+some little distance from the scene of slaughter. “Verily the Lord hath
+delivered them into our hands. I understand, my young friend, why you
+as a soldier did not aid in the slaughter of these villains. It is your
+trade to fight in open battle, and you care not to slay your enemies
+when helpless; but with us it is different. We regard them as wild
+beasts, without heart or pity, as scourges to be annihilated when we
+have the chance; just as in winter we slay the wolves who come down to
+attack our herds.”
+
+“I blame you not,” Malcolm said. “When men take to the life of wild
+beasts they must be slain as such. Now my task is done, and I will
+journey on at once to join my countrymen; but I will give you one piece
+of advice before I go.
+
+“In the course of a day or two the party left at Wolfsburg will grow
+uneasy, and two of their number are sure to ride hither to inquire as to
+the tarrying of the band. Let your men with arquebuses keep watch night
+and day and shoot them down when they arrive. Were I in your place I
+would then mount a dozen of your men and let them put on the armour of
+these dead robbers and ride to Wolfsburg, arriving there about daybreak.
+If they see you coming they will take you to be the band returning. The
+two men below you will cut down without difficulty, and there will then
+be but three or four to deal with in the castle.
+
+“I recommend you to make a complete end of them; and for this reason: if
+any of the band survive they will join themselves with some other party
+and will be sure to endeavour to get them to avenge this slaughter;
+for although these bands have no love for each other, yet they would be
+ready enough to take up each other's quarrel as against country folk,
+especially when there is a hope of plunder. Exterminate them, then, and
+advise your men to keep their secret. Few can have seen the brigands
+riding hither today. When it is found that the band have disappeared the
+country around will thank God, and will have little curiosity as to how
+they have gone. You will of course clear the path again and bury their
+bodies; and were I you I would prepare at once another ambush like that
+into which they have fallen, and when a second band of marauders comes
+into this part of the country set a watch night and day. Your men will
+in future be better armed than hitherto, as each of those freebooters
+carries a brace of pistols. And now, as I would fain be off as soon as
+possible, I would ask you to let your men set to work with their axes
+and cut away the boughs and to get me out a horse. Several of them
+must have been killed by the falling trees, and some by the fire of the
+arquebuses; but no doubt there are some uninjured.”
+
+In a quarter of an hour a horse was brought up, together with the helmet
+and armour worn by the late captain of the band.
+
+As Malcolm mounted, the men crowded round him and loaded him with thanks
+and blessings for the danger from which he had delivered them, their
+wives and families.
+
+When the fugitives had left the village a store of cooked provisions
+had been left behind for the use of the defenders during the day. As
+the women could not be fetched back before nightfall, the farmer had
+despatched a man for some of this food and the wallets on the saddle
+were filled with sufficient to last Malcolm for three or four days.
+
+A brace of pistols were placed in the holsters, and with a last farewell
+to the farmer Malcolm gave the rein to his horse and rode away from the
+village. He travelled fast now and without fear of interruption. The
+sight of armed men riding to join one or other of the armies was too
+common to attract any attention, and avoiding large towns Malcolm rode
+unmolested across the plain.
+
+He presently heard the report that the Swedes had captured
+Frankfort-on-the-Oder, and as he approached that town, after four days'
+riding, heard that they had moved towards Landsberg. Thither he followed
+them, and came up to them outside the walls of that place six days after
+leaving Glogau. The main body of the Swedish army had remained in and
+around Frankfort, Gustavus having marched against Landsberg with only
+3200 musketeers, 12 pieces of cannon, and a strong body of horse.
+Hepburn and Reay's Scotch regiments formed part of the column, and
+Malcolm with delight again saw the green scarves and banners.
+
+As he rode into the camp of his regiment he was unnoticed by the
+soldiers until he reached the tents of the officers, before which
+Colonel Munro was standing talking with several others. On seeing
+an officer approach in full armour they looked up, and a cry of
+astonishment broke from them on recognizing Malcolm.
+
+“Is it you, Malcolm Graheme, or your wraith?” Munro exclaimed.
+
+“It is I in the flesh, colonel, sound and hearty.”
+
+“Why, my dear lad,” Munro exclaimed, holding out his hand, “we thought
+you had fallen at the sack of New Brandenburg. Innes and Lumsden were
+believed to be the only ones who had escaped.”
+
+“I have come through it, nevertheless,” Malcolm said; “but it is a long
+story, colonel, and I would ask you first if the king has learned what
+Tilly is doing.”
+
+“No, he has received no news whatever of him since he heard of the
+affair at New Brandenburg, and is most anxious lest he should fall upon
+the army at Frankfort while we are away. Do you know aught about him?”
+
+“Tilly marched west from New Brandenburg,” Malcolm said, “and is now
+besieging Magdeburg.”
+
+“This is news indeed,” Munro said; “you must come with me at once to the
+king.”
+
+Malcolm followed Colonel Munro to the royal tent, which was but a
+few hundred yards away. Gustavus had just returned after visiting the
+advanced lines round the city. On being told that Colonel Munro wished
+to speak to him on important business, he at once came to the entrance
+of his tent.
+
+“Allow me to present to you, sire, Malcolm Graheme, a very gallant young
+officer of my regiment. He was at New Brandenburg, and I deemed that
+he had fallen there; how he escaped I have not yet had time to learn,
+seeing that he has but now ridden into the camp; but as he is bearer
+of news of the whereabouts of Tilly and his army, I thought it best to
+bring him immediately to you.”
+
+“Well, sir,” Gustavus said anxiously to Malcolm, “what is your news?”
+
+“Tilly is besieging Magdeburg, sire, with his whole strength.”
+
+“Magdeburg!” Gustavus exclaimed incredulously. “Are you sure of your
+news? I deemed him advancing upon Frankfort.”
+
+“Quite sure, sire, for I accompanied his column to within two marches of
+the city, and there was no secret of his intentions. He started for that
+town on the very day after he had captured New Brandenburg.”
+
+“This is important, indeed,” Gustavus said; “follow me,” and he turned
+and entered the tent. Spread out on the table was a large map, which the
+king at once consulted.
+
+“You see, Colonel Munro, that to relieve Magdeburg I must march
+through Kustrin, Berlin, and Spandau, and the first and last are strong
+fortresses. I can do nothing until the Elector of Brandenburg declares
+for us, and gives us leave to pass those places, for I dare not march
+round and leave them in my rear until sure that this weak prince will
+not take sides with the Imperialists. I will despatch a messenger
+tonight to him at Berlin demanding leave to march through his territory
+to relieve Magdeburg. In the meantime we will finish off with this
+place, and so be in readiness to march west when his answer arrives.
+And now, sir,” he went on, turning to Malcolm, “please to give me the
+account of how you escaped first from New Brandenburg, and then from
+Tilly.”
+
+Malcolm related briefly the manner of his escape from the massacre at
+New Brandenburg, and how, after accompanying Tilly's army as a teamster
+for two days, he had made his escape. He then still more briefly related
+how he had been taken prisoner by a band of freebooters, but had managed
+to get away from them, and had drawn them into an ambush by peasants,
+where they had been slain, by which means he had obtained a horse and
+ridden straight to the army.
+
+Gustavus asked many questions, and elicited many more details than
+Malcolm had deemed it necessary to give in his first recital.
+
+“You have shown great prudence and forethought,” the king said when he
+had finished, “such as would not be looked for in so young a soldier.”
+
+“And he behaved, sire, with distinguished gallantry and coolness at
+Schiefelbrune, and in the destructive fight outside Colberg,” Colonel
+Munro put in. “By the slaughter on the latter day he would naturally
+have obtained his promotion, but he begged to be passed over, asserting
+that it was best that at his age he should remain for a time an ensign.”
+
+“Such modesty is unusual,” the king said, “and pleases me; see the next
+time a step is vacant, colonel, that he has it. Whatever his age, he has
+shown himself fit to do man's work, and years are of no great value in a
+soldier; why, among all my Scottish regiments I have scarcely a colonel
+who is yet thirty years old.”
+
+Malcolm now returned with Colonel Munro to the regiment, and there had
+to give a full and minute account of his adventures, and was warmly
+congratulated by his fellow officers on his good fortune in escaping
+from the dangers which had beset him. The suit of armour was a handsome
+one, and had been doubtless stripped off from the body of some knight
+or noble murdered by the freebooters. The leg pieces Malcolm laid aside,
+retaining only a cuirass, back piece, and helmet, as the full armour was
+too heavy for service on foot.
+
+Two days later the king gave orders that the assault upon Landsberg was
+to be made that night. The place was extremely strong, and Gustavus had
+in his previous campaign twice failed in attempts to capture it.
+Since that time the Imperialists had been busy in strengthening the
+fortification, and all the peasantry for ten miles round had been
+employed in throwing up earthworks; but its principal defence was in
+the marsh which surrounded it, and which rendered the construction of
+approaches by besiegers almost impossible. Its importance consisted in
+the fact that from its great strength its garrison dominated the whole
+district known as the Marc of Brandenburg. It was the key to Silesia,
+and guarded the approaches to Pomerania, and its possession was
+therefore of supreme importance to Gustavus. The garrison consisted of
+five thousand Imperialist infantry and twelve troops of horse, the whole
+commanded by Count Gratz. The principal approach to the town was guarded
+by a strong redoubt armed with numerous artillery.
+
+Colonel Munro had advanced his trenches to within a short distance of
+this redoubt, and had mounted the twelve pieces of cannon to play upon
+it, but so solid was the masonry of the fort that their fire produced
+but little visible effect. Gustavus had brought from Frankfort as guide
+on the march a blacksmith who was a native of Landsberg, and this man
+had informed him of a postern gate into the town which would not be
+likely to be defended, as to reach it it would be necessary to cross a
+swamp flanked by the advanced redoubt and covered with water.
+
+For two days previous to the assault the troops had been at work
+cutting bushes and trees, and preparing the materials for constructing
+a floating causeway across the mud and water. As soon as night fell
+the men were set to work laying down the causeway, and when this was
+finished the column advanced to the attack. It consisted of 250 pikemen
+under Colonel Munro, and the same number of the dragoons under Colonel
+Deubattel. Hepburn with 1000 musketeers followed a short distance behind
+them.
+
+The pikemen led the way, and passed along the floating causeway without
+difficulty, but the causeway swayed and often sank under the feet of the
+cavalry behind them. These, however, also managed to get across. Their
+approach was entirely unobserved, and they effected an entrance into the
+town.
+
+Scarcely had they done so when they came upon a body of three hundred
+Imperialists who were about to make a sally under Colonel Gratz, son of
+the governor. The pikemen at once fell upon them. Taken by surprise the
+Imperialists fought nevertheless stoutly, and eighty of the Scots fell
+under the fire of their musketry. But the pikemen charged home; Colonel
+Gratz was killed, with many of his men, and the rest taken prisoners.
+Hepburn marching on behind heard the din of musketry and pressed
+forward; before reaching the town he found a place in the swamp
+sufficiently firm to enable his men to march across it, and, turning
+off, he led his troops between the town and the redoubt, and then
+attacked the latter in the rear where its defences were weak, and after
+three minutes' fighting with its surprised and disheartened garrison the
+latter surrendered.
+
+The redoubt having fallen, and Munro's men having effected a lodgment
+in the town, while the retreat on one side was cut off by the force of
+Gustavus, and on the other by a strong body of cavalry under Marshal
+Horn, the governor sent a drummer to Colonel Munro to say that he
+was ready to surrender, and to ask for terms. The drummer was sent to
+Gustavus, who agreed that the garrison should be allowed to march away
+with the honours of war, taking their baggage and effects with them.
+Accordingly at eight o'clock the Count of Gratz at the head of his
+soldiers marched out with colours flying and drums beating, and retired
+into Silesia. A garrison was placed in Landsberg, and the blacksmith
+appointed burgomaster of the town. Landsberg fell on the 15th of April,
+and on the 18th the force marched back to Frankfort.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII A QUIET TIME
+
+
+In spite of the urgent entreaties of Gustavus and the pressing peril of
+Magdeburg, the wavering Duke of Brandenburg could not bring himself
+to join the Swedes. He delivered Spandau over to them, but would do no
+more. The Swedish army accordingly marched to Berlin and invested his
+capital. The duke sent his wife to Gustavus to beseech him to draw off
+his army and allow him to remain neutral; but Gustavus would not listen
+to his entreaties, and insisted, as the only condition upon which he
+would raise the siege, that the duke should ally himself with him, and
+that the troops of Brandenburg should join his army.
+
+These conditions the duke was obliged to accept, but in the meantime his
+long hesitation and delay had caused the loss of Magdeburg, which after
+a gallant defence was stormed by the troops of Pappenheim and Tilly on
+the 10th of May. The ferocious Tilly had determined upon a deed which
+would, he believed, frighten Germany into submission; he ordered that no
+quarter should be given, and for five days the city was handed over to
+the troops.
+
+History has no record since the days of Attila of so frightful a
+massacre. Neither age nor sex was spared, and 30,000 men, women, and
+children were ruthlessly massacred. The result for a time justified the
+anticipations of the ferocious leader. The terrible deed sent a shudder
+of horror and terror through Protestant Germany. It seemed, too, as if
+the catastrophe might have been averted had the Swedes shown diligence
+and marched to the relief of the city; for in such a time men were not
+inclined to discuss how much of the blame rested upon the shoulders of
+the Duke of Brandenburg, who was, in fact, alone responsible for the
+delay of the Swedes.
+
+Many of the princes and free towns which had hitherto been staunch to
+the cause of Protestantism at once hastened to make their peace with
+the emperor. For a time the sack of Magdeburg greatly strengthened the
+Imperialist cause. No sooner did the news reach the ears of the Duke
+of Brandenburg than his fears overcame him, and he wrote to Gustavus
+withdrawing from the treaty he had made, and saying that as Spandau had
+only been delivered to him in order that he might march to the relief of
+Magdeburg he was now bound in honour to restore it.
+
+Gustavus at once ordered Spandau to be evacuated by his troops, and
+again marched with the army against Berlin, which he had but a few days
+before left. Here he again dictated terms, which the duke was forced to
+agree to.
+
+The Swedish army now marched to Old Brandenburg, thirty-four miles west
+of Berlin, and there remained for some time waiting until some expected
+reinforcements should reach it.
+
+The place was extremely unhealthy, and great numbers died from malaria
+and fever, thirty of Munro's musketeers dying in a single week. During
+this time the king was negotiating with the Elector of Saxony and the
+Landgrave of Hesse. These were the two most powerful of the Protestant
+princes in that part of Germany, and Tilly resolved to reduce them to
+obedience before the army of Gustavus was in a position to move forward,
+for at present his force was too small to enable him to take the field
+against the united armies of Tilly and Pappenheim.
+
+He first fell upon the Landgrave of Hesse, and laid Thuringen waste with
+fire and sword. Frankenhausen was plundered and burned to the ground.
+Erfurt saved itself from a similar fate by the payment of a large sum of
+money, and by engaging to supply great stores of provisions for the use
+of the Imperial army. The Landgrave of Hesse-Cassel was next summoned
+by Tilly, who threatened to carry fire and sword through his dominions
+unless he would immediately disband his troops, pay a heavy contribution
+and receive the Imperial troops into his cities and fortresses; but the
+landgrave refused to accept the terms.
+
+Owing to the unhealthiness of the district round Old Brandenburg,
+Gustavus raised his camp there, and marched forward to Werben near the
+junction of the Elbe with the Havel. He was joined there by his young
+queen, Maria Eleonora, with a reinforcement of 8000 men, and by the
+Marquis of Hamilton with 6200, for the most part Scotch, who had been
+raised by him with the consent of Charles I, to whom the marquis was
+master of the horse.
+
+Werben was distant but a few miles from Magdeburg, and Pappenheim, who
+commanded the troops in that neighbourhood, seeing that Gustavus was now
+in a position to take the field against him, sent an urgent message to
+Tilly for assistance; and the Imperial general, who was on the point of
+attacking the Landgrave of Hesse-Cassel, at once marched with his army
+and effected a junction with Pappenheim, their combined force being
+greatly superior to that of Gustavus even after the latter had received
+his reinforcements.
+
+Malcolm had not accompanied the army in its march from Old Brandenburg.
+He had been prostrated by fever, and although he shook off the attack it
+left him so weak and feeble that he was altogether unfit for duty.
+The army was still lying in its swampy quarters, and the leech who had
+attended him declared that he could never recover his strength in such
+an unhealthy air. Nigel Graheme, who had now rejoined the regiment cured
+of his wound, reported the surgeon's opinion to Munro.
+
+“I am not surprised,” the colonel said, “and there are many others in
+the same state; but whither can I send them? The Elector of Brandenburg
+is so fickle and treacherous that he may at any moment turn against us.”
+
+“I was speaking to Malcolm,” Nigel replied, “and he said that he would
+he could go for a time to recruit his health in that village among the
+hills where he had the fight with the freebooters who made him captive.
+He said he was sure of a cordial welcome there, and it is but three
+days' march from here.”
+
+“'Tis an out-of-the-way place,” Munro said, “and if we move west
+we shall be still further removed from it. There are Imperial bands
+everywhere harrying the country unguarded by us, and one of these might
+at any moment swoop down into that neighbourhood.”
+
+“That is true; but, after all, it would be better that he should run
+that risk than sink from weakness as so many have done here after
+getting through the first attack of fever.”
+
+“That is so, Nigel, and if you and Malcolm prefer that risk to the other
+I will not say you nay; but what is good for him is good for others, and
+I will ask the surgeon to make me a list of twenty men who are strong
+enough to journey by easy stages, and who yet absolutely require to get
+out of this poisonous air to enable them to effect their recovery. We
+will furnish them with one of the baggage wagons of the regiment, so
+that they can ride when they choose. Tell the paymaster to give each
+man in advance a month's pay, that they may have money to pay what they
+need. Horses are scarce, so we can give them but two with the wagon, but
+that will be sufficient as they will journey slowly. See that a steady
+and experienced driver is told off with them. They had best start at
+daybreak tomorrow morning.”
+
+At the appointed time the wagon was in readiness, and those who had to
+accompany Malcolm gathered round, together with many of their comrades
+who had assembled to wish them Godspeed. The pikes and muskets, helmets
+and breast pieces were placed in the wagon, and then the fever stricken
+band formed up before it.
+
+Munro, Nigel, and most of the officers came down to bid farewell to
+Malcolm, and to wish him a speedy return in good health. Then he placed
+himself at the head of the band and marched off, the wagon following in
+the rear. Before they had been gone a mile several of the men had been
+compelled to take their places in the wagon, and by the time three miles
+had been passed the rest had one by one been forced to give in.
+
+Malcolm was one of the last. He took his seat by the driver, and the
+now heavily freighted wagon moved slowly across the country. A store of
+provisions sufficient for several days had been placed in the wagon, and
+after proceeding fifteen miles a halt was made at a deserted village,
+and two of the houses in the best condition were taken possession of,
+Malcolm and the sergeant of the party, a young fellow named Sinclair,
+occupying the one, and the men taking up their quarters in another.
+
+The next morning the benefit of the change and the removal from the
+fever tainted air made itself already apparent. The distance performed
+on foot was somewhat longer than on the preceding day; the men were in
+better spirits, and marched with a brisker step than that with which
+they had left the camp. At the end of the fourth day they approached the
+wood in which the village was situated.
+
+“I will go on ahead,” Malcolm said. “Our approach will probably have
+been seen, and unless they know who we are we may meet with but a rough
+welcome. Halt the wagon here until one returns with news that you may
+proceed, for there may be pitfalls in the road.”
+
+Malcolm had kept the horse on which he had ridden to Landsberg, and it
+had been tied behind the wagon. During the last day's march he had been
+strong enough to ride it. He now dismounted, and taking the bridle over
+his arm he entered the wood. He examined the road cautiously as he went
+along. He had gone about half way when the farmer with four of his men
+armed with pikes suddenly appeared in the road before him.
+
+“Who are you,” the farmer asked, “and what would you here?”
+
+“Do you not remember me?” Malcolm said. “It is but three months since I
+was here.”
+
+“Bless me, it is our Scottish friend! Why, lad, I knew you not again, so
+changed are you. Why, what has happened to you?”
+
+“I have had the fever,” Malcolm said, “and have been like to die; but I
+thought that a change to the pure air of your hills and woods here would
+set me up. So I have travelled here to ask your hospitality.”
+
+By this time the farmer had come up and had grasped Malcolm's hand.
+
+“All that I have is yours,” he said warmly. “The lookout saw a wagon
+coming across the plain with three or four men walking beside it, and he
+thought that many more were seated in it; so thinking that this might be
+a ruse of some freebooting band, I had the alarm bell rung, and prepared
+to give them a hot reception.”
+
+“I have brought some sick comrades with me,” Malcolm said. “I have no
+thought of quartering them on you. That would be nigh as bad as the
+arrival of a party of marauders, for they are getting strength, and
+will, I warrant you, have keen appetites ere long; but we have brought
+tents, and will pay for all we have.”
+
+“Do not talk of payment,” the farmer said heartily. “As long as there is
+flour in the storehouse and bacon on the beams, any Scottish soldier of
+Gustavus is welcome to it, still more if they be comrades of thine.”
+
+“Thanks, indeed,” Malcolm replied. “I left them at the edge of the wood,
+for I knew not what welcome you might have prepared here; and seeing so
+many men you might have shot at them before waiting to ask a question.”
+
+“That is possible enough,” the farmer said, “for indeed we could hardly
+look for friends. The men are all posted a hundred yards further on.”
+
+The farmer ordered one of his men to go on and bring up the wagon, and
+then with Malcolm walked on to the village. A call that all was right
+brought out the defenders of the ambush. It had been arranged similarly
+to that which had been so successful before, except that instead of the
+pit, several strong ropes had been laid across the road, to be tightened
+breast high as soon as an enemy came close to them.
+
+“These are not as good as the pit,” the farmer said as they passed them;
+“but as we have to use the road sometimes we could not keep a pit
+here, which, moreover, might have given way and injured any one from a
+neighbouring village who might be riding hither. We have made a strong
+stockade of beams among the underwood on either side, so that none could
+break through into the wood from the path.”
+
+“That is good,” Malcolm said; “but were I you I would dig a pit across
+the road some twelve feet wide, and would cover it with a stout door
+with a catch, so that it would bear wagons crossing, but when the catch
+is drawn it should rest only on some light supports below, and would
+give way at once if a weight came on it. It would, of course, be covered
+over with turf. It will take some time to make, but it will add greatly
+to your safety.”
+
+“It shall be done,” the farmer said. “Wood is in plenty, and some of my
+men are good carpenters. I will set about it at once.”
+
+On arriving at the village Malcolm was cordially welcomed by the
+farmer's wife and daughters. The guest chamber was instantly prepared
+for him and refreshments laid on the table, while the maids, under the
+direction of the farmer's wife, at once began to cook a bounteous meal
+in readiness for the arrival of the soldiers. A spot was chosen on some
+smooth turf under the shade of trees for the erection of the tents, and
+trusses of clean straw carried there for bedding.
+
+Malcolm as he sat in the cool chamber in the farm house felt the change
+delightful after the hot dusty journey across the plain. There was quite
+an excitement in the little village when the wagon drove up. The men
+lifted the arms and baggage from the wagon. The women offered fruit and
+flagons of wine, and fresh cool water, to the soldiers. There was not
+only general pleasure throughout the village caused by the novelty of
+the arrival of the party from the outer world, but a real satisfaction
+in receiving these men who had fought so bravely against the oppressors
+of the Protestants of Germany. There was also the feeling that so long
+as this body of soldiers might remain in the village they would be able
+to sleep in peace and security, safe from the attacks of any marauding
+band. The tents were soon pitched by the peasants under the direction of
+Sergeant Sinclair, straw was laid down in them, and the canvas raised to
+allow the air to sweep through them.
+
+Very grateful were the weary men for the kindness with which they were
+received, and even the weakest felt that they should soon recover their
+strength.
+
+In an hour two men came up from the farm house carrying a huge pot
+filled with strong soup. Another brought a great dish of stew. Women
+carried wooden platters, bowls of stewed fruit, and loaves of bread; and
+the soldiers, seated upon the grass, fell to with an appetite such as
+they had not experienced for weeks. With the meal was an abundant supply
+of the rough but wholesome wine of the country.
+
+To the Scottish soldiers after the hardships they had passed through,
+this secluded valley seemed a perfect paradise. They had nought to do
+save to eat their meals, to sleep on the turf in the shade, or to wander
+in the woods and gardens free to pick what fruit they fancied. Under
+these circumstances they rapidly picked up strength, and in a week after
+their arrival would hardly have been recognized as the feeble band who
+had left the Swedish camp at Old Brandenburg.
+
+On Sunday the pastor arrived. He did not live permanently at the
+village, but ministered to the inhabitants of several villages scattered
+among the hills, holding services in them by turns, and remaining a few
+days in each. As the congregation was too large for the room in the farm
+house the service was held in the open air. The Scotch soldiers were all
+present, and joined heartily in the singing, although many of them were
+ignorant of the language, and sang the words of Scotch hymns to the
+German tunes.
+
+Even the roughest of them, and those who had been longest away from
+their native country, were much moved by the service. The hush and
+stillness, the air of quiet and peace which prevailed, the fervour with
+which all joined in the simple service, took them back in thought to the
+days of their youth in quiet Scottish glens, and many a hand was passed
+hastily across eyes which had not been moistened for many a year.
+
+The armour and arms were now cleaned and polished, and for a short time
+each day Malcolm exercised them. The martial appearance and perfect
+discipline of the Scots struck the villagers with admiration the first
+time they saw them under arms, and they earnestly begged Malcolm that
+they might receive from him and Sergeant Sinclair some instruction in
+drill.
+
+Accordingly every evening when work was done the men of the village were
+formed up and drilled. Several of the soldiers took their places with
+them in the ranks in order to aid them by their example. After the drill
+there was sword and pike exercise, and as most of the men had already
+some knowledge of the use of arms they made rapid progress, and felt an
+increased confidence in their power to defend the village against the
+attacks of any small bands of plunderers. To Malcolm the time passed
+delightfully. His kind hosts vied with each other in their efforts to
+make him comfortable, and it was in vain that he assured them that he
+no longer needed attention and care. A seat was always placed for him
+in the coolest nook in the room, fresh grapes and other fruit stood in
+readiness on a table hard by. The farmer's daughters, busy as they were
+in their household avocations, were always ready to sit and talk with
+him when he was indoors, and of an evening to sing him the country
+melodies.
+
+At the end of a fortnight the men were all fit for duty again, but the
+hospitable farmer would not hear of their leaving, and as news from
+time to time reached them from the outer world, and Malcolm learned that
+there was no chance of any engagement for a time between the hostile
+armies, he was only too glad to remain.
+
+Another fortnight passed, and Malcolm reluctantly gave the word that on
+the morrow the march must be recommenced. A general feeling of sorrow
+reigned in the village when it was known that their guests were about to
+depart, for the Scottish soldiers had made themselves extremely popular.
+They were ever ready to assist in the labours of the village. They
+helped to pick the apples from the heavily laden trees, they assisted to
+thrash out the corn, and in every way strove to repay their entertainers
+for the kindness they had shown them.
+
+Of an evening their camp had been the rendezvous of the whole village.
+There alternately the soldiers and the peasants sang their national
+songs, and joined in hearty choruses. Sometimes there were dances, for
+many of the villagers played on various instruments; and altogether
+Glogau had never known such a time of festivity and cheerfulness before.
+
+Late in the evening of the day before they had fixed for their departure
+the pastor rode into the village.
+
+“I have bad news,” he said. “A party of Pappenheim's dragoons, three
+hundred strong, are raiding in the district on the other side of the
+hills. A man came in just as I mounted my horse, saying that it was
+expected they would attack Mansfeld, whose count is a sturdy Protestant.
+The people were determined to resist to the last, in spite of the fate
+of Magdeburg and Frankenhausen, but I fear that their chance of success
+is a small one; but they say they may as well die fighting as be
+slaughtered in cold blood.”
+
+“Is Mansfeld fortified?” Malcolm asked.
+
+“It has a wall,” the pastor replied, “but of no great strength. The
+count's castle, which stands on a rock adjoining it, might defend itself
+for some time, but I question whether it can withstand Pappenheim's
+veterans.
+
+“Mansfeld itself is little more than a village. I should not say it
+had more than a thousand inhabitants, and can muster at best about two
+hundred and fifty men capable of bearing arms.”
+
+“How far is it from here?” Malcolm asked after a pause.
+
+“Twenty-four miles by the bridle path across the hills.”
+
+“When were the Imperialists expected to arrive?”
+
+“They were ten miles away this morning,” the pastor replied; “but as
+they were plundering and burning as they went they will not probably
+arrive before Mansfeld before the morning. Some of the more timid
+citizens were leaving, and many were sending away their wives and
+families.”
+
+“Then,” Malcolm said, “I will march thither at once. Twenty good
+soldiers may make all the difference, and although I have, of course, no
+orders for such an emergency, the king can hardly blame me even if the
+worst happens for striking a blow against the Imperialists here. Will
+you give me a man,” he asked the farmer, “to guide us across the hills?”
+
+“That will I right willingly,” the farmer said; “but it seems to me a
+desperate service to embark in. These townspeople are of little good for
+fighting, and probably intend only to make a show of resistance in order
+to procure better terms. The count himself is a brave nobleman, but I
+fear that the enterprise is a hopeless one.”
+
+“Hopeless or not,” Malcolm said, “I will undertake it, and will at once
+put the men under arms. The wagon and horses with the baggage I will
+leave here till I return, that is if we should ever come back again.”
+
+A tap of the drum and the soldiers came running in hastily from various
+cottages where they were spending their last evening with their village
+friends, wondering at the sudden summons to arms. As soon as they had
+fallen in, Malcolm joined them.
+
+“Men,” he said, “I am sorry to disturb you on your last evening here,
+but there is business on hand. A party of Pappenheim's dragoons are
+about to attack the town of Mansfeld, where the people are of the
+Reformed Religion. The siege will begin in the morning, and ere that
+time we must be there. We have all got fat and lazy, and a little
+fighting will do us good.”
+
+The thought of a coming fray reconciled the men to their departure
+from their quiet and happy resting place. Armour was donned, buckles
+fastened, and arms inspected, and in half an hour, after a cordial adieu
+from their kind hosts, the detachment marched off, their guide with a
+lighted torch leading the way. The men were in light marching order,
+having left everything superfluous behind them in the wagon; and they
+marched briskly along over hill and through forest without a halt, till
+at three o'clock in the morning the little town of Mansfeld, with its
+castle rising above it, was visible before them in the first light of
+morning.
+
+As they approached the walls a musketoon was fired, and the alarm bell
+of the church instantly rang out. Soon armed men made their appearance
+on the walls. Fearing that the burghers might fire before waiting to
+ascertain who were the newcomers, Malcolm halted his band, and advanced
+alone towards the walls.
+
+“Who are you who come in arms to the peaceful town of Mansfeld?” an
+officer asked from the wall.
+
+“I am an officer of his Swedish Majesty, Gustavus, and hearing that
+the town was threatened with attack by the Imperialists, I have marched
+hither with my detachment to aid in the defence.”
+
+A loud cheer broke from the walls. Not only was the reinforcement a most
+welcome one, small as it was, for the valour of the Scottish soldiers
+of the King of Sweden was at that time the talk of all Germany, but the
+fact that a detachment of these redoubted troops had arrived seemed a
+proof that the main army of the Swedish king could not be far away.
+The gates were at once opened, and Malcolm with his band marched into
+Mansfield.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII THE SIEGE OF MANSFELD
+
+
+“Will it please your worship at once to repair to the castle?” the
+leader of the townspeople said. “The count has just sent down to inquire
+into the reason of the alarm.”
+
+“Yes,” Malcolm replied, “I will go at once. In the meantime, sir, I
+pray you to see to the wants of my soldiers, who have taken a long night
+march and will be none the worse for some refreshment. Hast seen aught
+of the Imperialists?”
+
+“They are at a village but a mile distant on the other side of the
+town,” the citizen said. “Yesterday we counted eighteen villages in
+flames, and the peasants who have come in say that numbers have been
+slain by them.”
+
+“There is little mercy to be expected from the butchers of Magdeburg,”
+ Malcolm replied; “the only arguments they will listen to are steel and
+lead, and we will not be sparing of these.”
+
+A murmur of assent rang through the townsfolk who had gathered round,
+and then the burgomaster himself led Malcolm up the ascent to the
+castle. The news that the newcomers were a party of Scots had already
+been sent up to the castle, and as Malcolm entered the gateway the count
+came forward to welcome him.
+
+“You are welcome indeed, fair sir,” he said. “It seems almost as if you
+had arrived from the clouds to our assistance, for we had heard that the
+Swedish king and his army were encamped around Old Brandenburg.
+
+“His majesty has moved west, I hear,” Malcolm said; “but we have been a
+month away from the camp. My detachment consisted of a body of invalids
+who came up among the hills to get rid of the fever which was playing
+such havoc among our ranks. I am glad to say that all are restored, and
+fit as ever for a meeting with the Imperialists. I heard but yestereven
+that you were expecting an attack, and have marched all night to be here
+in time. My party is a small one, but each man can be relied upon; and
+when it comes to hard fighting twenty in good soldiers may turn the
+day.”
+
+“You are heartily welcome, sir, and I thank you much for coming to our
+aid. The townspeople are determined to do their best, but most of them
+have little skill in arms. I have a score or two of old soldiers here in
+the castle, and had hoped to be able to hold this to the end; but truly
+I despaired of a successful defence of the town. But enter, I pray you;
+the countess will be glad to welcome you.”
+
+Malcolm accompanied the count to the banquet hall of the castle. The
+countess, a gentle and graceful woman, was already there; for indeed but
+few in Mansfeld had closed an eye that night, for it was possible that
+the Imperialists might attack without delay. By her side stood her
+daughter, a girl of about fourteen years old. Malcolm had already stated
+his name to the count, and the latter now presented him to his wife.
+
+“We have heard so much of the Scottish soldiers,” she said as she held
+out her hand, over which Malcolm bent deeply, “that we have all been
+curious to see them, little dreaming that a band of them would appear
+here like good angels in our hour of danger.”
+
+“It was a fortunate accident which found me within reach when I heard of
+the approach of the Imperialists. The names of the Count and Countess
+of Mansfeld are so well known and so highly esteemed through Protestant
+Germany that I was sure that the king would approve of my hastening to
+lend what aid I might to you without orders from him.”
+
+“I see you have learned to flatter,” the countess said smiling. “This is
+my daughter Thekla.”
+
+“I am glad to see you,” the girl said; “but I am a little disappointed.
+I had thought that the Scots were such big fierce soldiers, and you
+are not very big--not so tall as papa; and you do not look fierce at
+all--not half so fierce as my cousin Caspar, who is but a boy.”
+
+“That is very rude, Thekla,” her mother said reprovingly, while Malcolm
+laughed gaily.
+
+“You are quite right, Fraulein Thekla. I know I do not look very fierce,
+but I hope when my moustache grows I shall come up more nearly to your
+expectations. As to my height, I have some years to grow yet, seeing
+that I am scarce eighteen, and perhaps no older than your cousin.”
+
+“Have you recently joined, sir?” the countess asked.
+
+“I have served through the campaign,” Malcolm replied, “and have seen
+some hard knocks given, as you may imagine when I tell you that I was at
+the siege of New Brandenburg.”
+
+“When your soldiers fought like heroes, and, as I heard, all died sword
+in hand save two or three officers who managed to escape.”
+
+“I was one of the three, countess; but the tale is a long one, and can
+be told after we have done with the Imperialists. Now, sir,” he went on,
+turning to the count, “I am at your orders, and will take post with my
+men at any point that you may think fit.”
+
+“Before doing that,” the count said, “you must join us at breakfast. You
+must be hungry after your long march, and as I have been all night in
+my armour I shall do justice to it myself. You will, of course, take
+up your abode here. As to other matters I have done my best, and the
+townspeople were yesterday all told off to their places on the walls.
+I should think it were best that your band were stationed in the
+marketplace as a reserve, they could then move to any point which might
+be seriously threatened. Should the Imperialists enter the town the
+citizens have orders to fall back here fighting. All their most valuable
+goods were sent up here yesterday, together with such of their wives
+and families as have not taken flight, so that there will be nothing to
+distract them from their duty.”
+
+“That is good,” Malcolm said. “The thought that one is fighting for
+home and family must nerve a man in the defence, but when the enemy
+once breaks in he would naturally think of home first and hasten away to
+defend it to the last, instead of obeying orders and falling back with
+his comrades in good order and discipline.”
+
+The meal was a cheerful one. Malcolm related more in detail how he and
+his detachment happened to be so far removed from the army.
+
+Just as the meal came to an end a drum beat in the town and the alarm
+bells began to ring. The count and Malcolm sallied out at once to the
+outer wall, and saw a small party of officers riding from the village
+occupied by the Imperialists towards the town.
+
+“Let us descend,” the count said. “I presume they are going to demand
+our surrender.”
+
+They reached the wall of the town just as the Imperialist officers
+approached the gate.
+
+“In the name of his majesty the emperor,” one of them cried out, “I
+command you to open the gate and to surrender to his good will and
+pleasure.”
+
+“The smoking villages which I see around me,” Count Mansfeld replied,
+“are no hopeful sign of any good will or pleasure on the part of his
+majesty towards us. As to surrendering, we will rather die. But I am
+willing to pay a fair ransom for the town if you will draw off your
+troops and march away.”
+
+“Beware, sir!” the officer said. “I have a force here sufficient to
+compel obedience, and I warn you of the fate which will befall all
+within these walls if you persist in refusing to admit us.”
+
+“I doubt not as to their fate,” the count replied; “there are plenty of
+examples before us of the tender mercy which your master's troops show
+towards the towns you capture.
+
+“Once again I offer you a ransom for the town. Name the sum, and if it
+be in reason such as I and the townspeople can pay, it shall be yours;
+but open the gates to you we will not.”
+
+“Very well,” the officer said; “then your blood be on your own heads.”
+ And turning his horse he rode with his companions back towards the
+village.
+
+On their arrival there a bustle was seen to prevail. A hundred horsemen
+rode off and took post on an eminence near the town, ready to cut off
+the retreat of any who might try to escape, and to enter the town when
+the gates were forced open. The other two hundred men advanced on foot
+in a close body towards the principal gate.
+
+“They will try and blow it open with petards,” Malcolm said. “Half of
+my men are musketeers and good shots, and I will, with your permission,
+place them on the wall to aid the townsfolk there, for if the gate is
+blown open and the enemy force their way in it will go hard with us.”
+
+The count assented, and Malcolm posted his musketeers on the wall,
+ordering Sergeant Sinclair with the remainder to set to work to erect
+barricades across the street leading from the gate, so that, in case
+this were blown in, such a stand might be made against the Imperialists
+as would give the townspeople time to rally from the walls and to gather
+there.
+
+The Imperialists heralded their advance by opening fire with pistols and
+musketoons against the wall, and the defenders at once replied. So heavy
+was the fire that the head of the column wavered, many of the leading
+files being at once shot down, but, encouraged by their officers, they
+rallied, and pushed forward at a run. The fire of the townspeople at
+once became hurried and irregular, but the Scots picked off their men
+with steady aim. The leader of the Imperialists, who carried a petard,
+advanced boldly to the edge of the ditch. The fosse was shallow and
+contained but little water, and he at once dashed into it and waded
+across, for the drawbridge had, of course, been raised. He climbed up
+the bank, and was close to the gate, when Malcolm, leaning far over
+the wall, discharged his pistol at him. The ball glanced from the steel
+armour.
+
+Malcolm drew his other pistol and again fired, this time more
+effectually, for the ball struck between the shoulder and the neck at
+the junction of the breast and back pieces, and passed down into the
+body of the Austrian, who, dropping the petard, fell dead; but a number
+of his men were close behind him.
+
+“Quick, lads!” Malcolm cried. “Put your strength to this parapet. It is
+old and rotten. Now, all together! Shove!”
+
+The soldiers bent their strength against the parapet, while some of the
+townspeople, thrusting their pikes into the rotten mortar between the
+stones, prised them up with all their strength. The parapet tottered,
+and then with a tremendous crash fell, burying five or six of the
+Imperialists and the petard beneath the ruins.
+
+A shout of exultation rose from the defenders, and the Imperialists
+at once withdrew at full speed. They halted out of gunshot, and then
+a number of men were sent back to the village, whence they returned
+carrying ladders, some of which had been collected the day before from
+the neighbouring villages and others manufactured during the night.
+The enemy now divided into three parties, which advanced simultaneously
+against different points of the wall.
+
+Notwithstanding the storm of shot poured upon them as they advanced,
+they pressed forward until they reached the wall and planted their
+ladders, and then essayed to climb; but at each point the stormers were
+stoutly met with pike and sword, while the musketeers from the flanking
+towers poured their bullets into them.
+
+The troops proved themselves worthy of their reputation, for it was not
+until more than fifty had fallen that they desisted from the attempt and
+drew off.
+
+“Now we shall have a respite,” Malcolm said. “If there are no more of
+them in the neighbourhood methinks they will retire altogether, but
+if they have any friends with cannon anywhere within reach they will
+probably send for them and renew the attack.”
+
+The day passed quietly. Parties of horsemen were seen leaving the
+village to forage and plunder the surrounding country, but the main body
+remained quietly there. The next day there was still no renewal of the
+attack, but as the enemy remained in occupation of the village Malcolm
+guessed that they must be waiting for the arrival of reinforcements.
+The following afternoon a cloud of dust was seen upon the plain, and
+presently a column of infantry some four hundred strong, with three
+cannon, could be made out. The townspeople now wavered in their
+determination. A few were still for resistance, but the majority held
+that they could not attempt to withstand an assault by so strong a
+force, and that it was better to make the best terms they could with the
+enemy.
+
+A parlementaire was accordingly despatched to the Imperialists asking
+what terms would be granted should the place surrender.
+
+“We will grant no terms whatever,” the colonel in command of the
+Imperialists said. “The town is at our mercy, and we will do as we
+will with it and all within it; but tell Count Mansfeld that if he will
+surrender the castle as well as the town at once, and without striking
+another blow, his case shall receive favourable consideration.”
+
+“That will not do,” the count said. “They either guarantee our lives
+or they do not. I give not up my castle on terms like these, but I
+will exercise no pressure on the townspeople. If they choose to defend
+themselves till the last I will fight here with them; if they choose to
+surrender they can do so; and those who differ from their fellows and
+put no faith in Tilly's wolves can enter the castle with me.”
+
+The principal inhabitants of the town debated the question hotly.
+Malcolm lost patience with them, and said: “Are you mad as well as
+stupid? Do you not see the smoking villages round you? Do you not
+remember the fate of Magdeburg, New Brandenburg, and the other towns
+which have made a resistance? You have chosen to resist. It was open to
+you to have fled when you heard the Imperialists were coming. You could
+have opened the gates then with some hope at least of your lives; but
+you decided to resist. You have killed some fifty or sixty of their
+soldiers. You have repulsed them from a place which they thought to
+take with scarce an effort. You have compelled them to send for
+reinforcements and guns. And now you are talking of opening the gates
+without even obtaining a promise that your lives shall be spared. This
+is the extremity of folly, and all I can say is, if you take such a step
+you will well deserve your fate.”
+
+Malcolm's indignant address had its effect, and after a short discussion
+the townspeople again placed themselves at the count's disposal, and
+said that they would obey his orders.
+
+“I will give no orders,” the count said. “My Scottish friend here agrees
+with me that it is useless to try to defend the town. We might repulse
+several attacks, but in the end they would surely break in, for the
+walls are old and weak, and will crumble before their cannon. Were there
+any hope of relief one would defend them to the last, but as it is
+it would be but a waste of blood, for many would be slain both in
+the defence and before they could retreat to the castle; therefore we
+propose at once to withdraw. We doubt not that we can hold the castle.
+Any who like to remain in their houses and trust to the tender mercy of
+Tilly's wolves can do so.”
+
+There was no more hesitation, and a cannonball, the first which the
+Imperialists had fired, at that moment crashed into a house hard by, and
+sharpened their decision wonderfully.
+
+“I have no great store of provisions in the castle,” the count said,
+“and although I deem it not likely that we shall have to stand a long
+siege we must be prepared for it. There are already more than 700
+of your wives and children there, therefore while half of the force
+continue to show themselves upon the walls, and so deter the enemy from
+attempting an assault until they have opened some breaches, let the rest
+carry up provisions to the castle. Any houses from which the women have
+fled are at once to be broken open. All that we leave behind the enemy
+will take, and the less we leave for them the better; therefore all
+stores and magazines of food and wine must be considered as public
+property. Let the men at once be divided into two bodies--the one to
+guard the walls, the other to search for and carry up provisions. They
+can be changed every three or four hours.”
+
+The resolution was taken and carried into effect without delay. Most of
+the horses and carts in the town had left with the fugitives, those
+that remained were at once set to work. The carts were laden with large
+barrels of wine and sacks of flour, while the men carried sides of
+bacon, kegs of butter, and other portable articles on their heads. The
+Imperialists, seeing the movement up the steep road to the castle gate,
+opened fire with their arquebuses, but the defenders of the wall replied
+so hotly that they were forced to retire out of range. The cannon played
+steadily all day, and by nightfall two breaches had been effected in the
+wall and the gate had been battered down.
+
+But by this time an ample store of provisions had been collected in the
+castle and as the Imperialists were seen to form up for the assault the
+trumpet was sounded, and at the signal the whole of the defenders of the
+walls left their posts and fell back to the castle, leaving the deserted
+town at the mercy of the enemy. The Imperialists raised a shout of
+triumph as they entered the breaches and found them undefended, and
+when once assured that the town was deserted they broke their ranks and
+scattered to plunder.
+
+It was now quite dark, and many of them dragging articles of furniture
+into the streets made great bonfires to light them at their work
+of plunder. But they had soon reason to repent having done so, for
+immediately the flames sprang up and lighted the streets, flashes ran
+round the battlements of the castle, and a heavy fire was opened into
+the streets, killing many of the soldiers. Seeing the danger of thus
+exposing the men to the fire from the castle, the Imperialist commander
+issued orders at once that all fires should be extinguished, that anyone
+setting fire to a house should be instantly hung, and that no lights
+were to be lit in the houses whose windows faced the castle.
+
+Foreseeing the possibility of an attack from the castle, the Austrians
+placed a hundred men at the foot of the road leading up to it, and laid
+their three cannon loaded to the muzzle to command it.
+
+“Have you not,” Malcolm asked the count, “some means of exit from the
+castle besides the way into the town?”
+
+“Yes,” the count said, “there is a footpath down the rock on the other
+side.”
+
+“Then,” Malcolm said, “as soon as they are fairly drunk, which will be
+before midnight, let us fall upon them from the other side. Leave fifty
+of your oldest men with half a dozen veteran soldiers to defend the
+gateway against a sudden attack; with the rest we can issue out, and
+marching round, enter by the gate and breaches, sweeping the streets as
+we go, and then uniting, burst through any guard they may have placed to
+prevent a sortie, and so regain the castle.”
+
+The count at once assented. In a short time shouts, songs, the sound
+of rioting and quarrels, arose from the town, showing that revelry was
+general. At eleven o'clock the men in the castle were mustered, fifty
+were told off to the defence with five experienced soldiers, an officer
+of the count being left in command. The rest sallied through a little
+door at the back of the castle and noiselessly descended the steep path.
+On arriving at the bottom they were divided into three bodies. Malcolm
+with his Scots and fifty of the townspeople formed one. Count Mansfeld
+took the command of another, composed of his own soldiers and fifty more
+of the townspeople. The third consisted of eighty of the best fighting
+men of the town under their own leaders. These were to enter by the
+gate, while the other two parties came in by the breaches. The moment
+the attack began the defenders of the castle were to open as rapid
+a fire as they could upon the foot of the road so as to occupy the
+attention of the enemy's force there, and to lead them to anticipate a
+sortie.
+
+The breach by which Malcolm was to enter was the farthest from the
+castle, and his command would, therefore, be the last in arriving at its
+station. When he reached it he ordered the trumpeters who accompanied
+him to sound, and at the signal the three columns rushed into the town
+uttering shouts of “Gustavus! Gustavus!”
+
+The Imperialists in the houses near were slaughtered with scarcely
+any resistance. They were for the most part intoxicated, and such as
+retained their senses were paralysed at the sudden attack, and panic
+stricken at the shouts, which portended the arrival of a relieving
+force from the army of the King of Sweden. As the bands pressed forward,
+slaying all whom they came upon, the resistance became stronger; but
+the three columns were all headed by parties of pikemen who advanced
+steadily and in good order, bearing down all opposition, and leaving to
+those behind them the task of slaying all found in the houses.
+
+Lights flashed from the windows and partly lit up the streets, and the
+Imperialist officers attempted to rally their men; but the Scottish
+shouts, “A Hepburn! A Hepburn!” and the sight of their green scarves
+added to the terror of the soldiers, who were convinced that the
+terrible Green Brigade of the King of Sweden was upon them.
+
+Hundreds were cut down after striking scarce a blow in their defence,
+numbers fled to the walls and leapt over. The panic communicated itself
+to the party drawn up to repel a sortie. Hearing the yells, screams,
+and shouts, accompanied by the musketry approaching from three different
+quarters of the town, while a steady fire from the castle indicated
+that the defenders there might, at any moment, sally out upon them,
+they stood for a time irresolute; but as the heads of the three columns
+approached they lost heart, quitted their station, and withdrew in
+a body by a street by which they avoided the approaching columns. On
+arriving at the spot Malcolm found the guns deserted.
+
+“The town is won now,” he said. “I will take my post here with my men in
+case the Austrians should rally; do you with the rest scatter over the
+town and complete the work, but bid them keep together in parties of
+twenty.”
+
+The force broke up and scattered through the town in their work of
+vengeance. House after house was entered and searched, and all who were
+found there put to the sword; but by this time most of those who were
+not too drunk to fly had already made for the gates.
+
+In half an hour not an Imperialist was left alive in the town. Then
+guards were placed at the gate and breaches, and they waited till
+morning. Not a sign of an Imperialist was to be seen on the plain, and
+parties sallying out found that they had fled in the utmost disorder.
+Arms, accoutrements, and portions of plunder lay scattered thickly
+about, and it was clear that in the belief that the Swedish army was on
+them, the Imperialists had fled panic stricken, and were now far away.
+Upwards of two hundred bodies were found in the streets and houses.
+
+A huge grave was dug outside the walls, and here the fallen foes were
+buried. Only three or four of the defenders of the town were killed and
+a score or so wounded in the whole affair. Although there was little
+fear of a return, as the Imperialists would probably continue their
+headlong flight for a long distance, and would then march with all haste
+to rejoin their main army with the news that a strong Swedish force
+was at Mansfeld, the count set the townspeople at once to repair the
+breaches.
+
+The people were overjoyed with their success, and delighted at
+having preserved their homes from destruction, for they knew that the
+Imperialists would, if unsuccessful against the castle, have given the
+town to the flames before retiring. The women and children flocked down
+to their homes again, and although much furniture had been destroyed and
+damage done, this was little heeded when so much was saved.
+
+All vied in the expression of gratitude towards Malcolm and his Scots,
+but Malcolm modestly disclaimed all merit, saying that he and his men
+had scarcely struck a blow.
+
+“It is not so much the fighting,” the count said, “as the example which
+you set the townsmen, and the spirit which the presence of you and your
+men diffused among them. Besides, your counsel and support to me have
+been invaluable; had it not been for you the place would probably have
+been carried at the first attack, and if not the townspeople would have
+surrendered when the enemy's reinforcements arrived; and in that case,
+with so small a force at my command I could not have hoped to defend the
+castle successfully. Moreover, the idea of the sortie which has freed us
+of them and saved the town from destruction was entirely yours. No,
+my friend, say what you will I feel that I am indebted to you for the
+safety of my wife and child, and so long as I live I shall be deeply
+your debtor.”
+
+The following day Malcolm with his party marched away. The count had
+presented him with a suit of magnificent armour, and the countess with a
+gold chain of great value. Handsome presents were also made to Sergeant
+Sinclair, who was a cadet of good family, and a purse of gold was given
+to each of the soldiers, so in high spirits the band marched away over
+the mountains on their return to the village.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX THE BATTLE OF BREITENFELD
+
+
+Great joy was manifested as Malcolm's band marched into the village and
+it was found that they had accomplished the mission on which they went,
+had saved Mansfeld, and utterly defeated the Imperialists, and had
+returned in undiminished numbers, although two or three had received
+wounds more or less serious, principally in the first day's fighting.
+They only remained one night in the village.
+
+On the following morning the baggage was placed in the wagons with a
+store of fruit and provisions for their march, and after another hearty
+adieu the detachment set out in high spirits. After marching for two
+days they learned that the Swedish army had marched to Werben, and that
+Tilly's army had followed it there.
+
+After the receipt of this news there was no more loitering; the
+marches were long and severe, and after making a detour to avoid the
+Imperialists the detachment entered the royal camp without having met
+with any adventure on the way. His fellow officers flocked round Malcolm
+to congratulate him on his safe return and on his restored health.
+
+“The change has done wonders for you, Malcolm,” Nigel Graheme said.
+“Why, when you marched out you were a band of tottering scarecrows,
+and now your detachment looks as healthy and fresh as if they had but
+yesterday left Scotland; but come in, the bugle has just sounded to
+supper, and we are only waiting for the colonel to arrive. He is at
+present in council with the king with Hepburn and some more. Ah! here he
+comes.”
+
+Munro rode up and leapt from his horse, and after heartily greeting
+Malcolm led the way into the tent where supper was laid out. Malcolm
+was glad to see by the faces of his comrades that all had shaken off the
+disease which had played such havoc among them at Old Brandenburg.
+
+“Is there any chance of a general engagement?” he asked Nigel.
+
+“Not at present,” Nigel said. “We are expecting the reinforcements up in
+a few days. As you see we have fortified the camp too strongly for Tilly
+to venture to attack us here. Only yesterday he drew up his army and
+offered us battle; but the odds were too great, and the king will not
+fight till his reinforcements arrive. Some of the hotter spirits were
+sorry that he would not accept Tilly's invitation, and I own that I
+rather gnashed my teeth myself; but I knew that the king was right in
+not risking the whole cause rashly when a few days will put us in a
+position to meet the Imperialists on something like equal terms. Is
+there any news, colonel?” he asked, turning to Munro.
+
+“No news of importance,” the colonel replied; “but the king is rather
+puzzled. A prisoner was taken today--one of Pappenheim's horsemen--and
+he declares that a force of horse and foot have been defeated at
+Mansfeld by a Swedish army with heavy loss. He avers that he was present
+at the affair, and arrived in camp with the rest of the beaten force
+only yesterday. We cannot make it out, as we know that there are no
+Swedish troops anywhere in that direction.”
+
+Malcolm burst into a hearty laugh, to the surprise of his fellow
+officers.
+
+“I can explain the matter, colonel,” he said. “It was my detachment that
+had the honour of representing the Swedish army at Mansfeld.”
+
+“What on earth do you mean, Malcolm?” the colonel asked.
+
+“Well, sir, as you know I went with a detachment to the village where I
+had before been well treated, and had earned the gratitude of the people
+by teaching them how to destroy a party of marauders. After having been
+there for a month I was on the point of marching, for the men were all
+perfectly restored to health; and indeed I know I ought to have returned
+sooner, seeing that the men were fit for service; but as I thought
+you were still at Old Brandenburg, and could well dispense with our
+services, I lingered on to the last. But just as I was about to march
+the news came that a party of Imperialist horse, three hundred strong,
+was about to attack Mansfeld, a place of whose existence I had never
+heard; but hearing that its count was a staunch Protestant, and that the
+inhabitants intended to make a stout defence, I thought that I could not
+be doing wrong in the service of the king by marching to aid them, the
+place being but twenty-four miles away across the hills. We got there in
+time, and aided the townspeople to repulse the first assault. After two
+days they brought up a reinforcement of four hundred infantry and some
+cannon. As the place is a small one, with but about two hundred and
+fifty fighting men of all ages, we deemed it impossible to defend the
+town, and while they were breaching the walls fell back to the castle.
+The Imperialists occupied it at sunset, and at night, leaving a party to
+hold the castle, we sallied out from the other side, and marching round,
+entered by the breaches, and, raising the Swedish war cry fell upon
+the enemy, who were for the most part too drunk to offer any serious
+resistance. We killed two hundred and fifty of them, and the rest fled
+in terror, thinking they had the whole Swedish army upon them. The
+next day I started on my march back here, and though we have not spared
+speed, it seems that the Imperialists have arrived before us.”
+
+A burst of laughter and applause greeted the solution of the mystery.
+
+“You have done well, sir,” Munro said cordially, “and have rendered a
+great service not only in the defeat of the Imperialists, but in its
+consequences here, for the prisoner said that last night five thousand
+men were marched away from Tilly's army to observe and make head against
+this supposed Swedish force advancing from the east. When I have done
+my meal I will go over to the king with the news, for his majesty is
+greatly puzzled, especially as the prisoner declared that he himself had
+seen the Scots of the Green Brigade in the van of the column, and had
+heard the war cry, 'A Hepburn! A Hepburn!'
+
+“Hepburn himself could make neither head nor tail of it, and was half
+inclined to believe that this avenging force was led by the ghosts of
+those who had been slain at New Brandenburg. Whenever we can't account
+for a thing, we Scots are inclined to believe it's supernatural.
+
+“Now tell me more about the affair, Malcolm. By the way do you know that
+you are a lieutenant now? Poor Foulis died of the fever a few days after
+you left us, and as the king had himself ordered that you were to have
+the next vacancy, I of course appointed you at once. We must drink
+tonight to your promotion.”
+
+Malcolm now related fully the incidents of the siege.
+
+“By my faith, Malcolm Graheme,” Munro said when he had finished, “you
+are as lucky as you are brave. Mansfeld is a powerful nobleman, and has
+large possessions in various parts of Germany and much influence, and
+the king will be grateful that you have thus rendered him such effective
+assistance and so bound him to our cause. I believe he has no children.”
+
+“He has a daughter,” Malcolm said, “a pretty little maid some fourteen
+years old.”
+
+“In faith, Malcolm, 'tis a pity that you and she are not some four
+or five years older. What a match it would be for you, the heiress of
+Mansfeld; she would be a catch indeed! Well, there's time enough yet, my
+lad, for there is no saying how long this war will last.”
+
+There was a general laugh, and the colonel continued:
+
+“Malcolm has the grace to colour, which I am afraid the rest of us have
+lost long ago. Never mind, Malcolm, there are plenty of Scotch cadets
+have mended their fortune by means of a rich heiress before now, and I
+hope there will be many more. I am on the lookout for a wealthy young
+countess myself, and I don't think there is one here who would not lay
+aside his armour and sword on such inducement. And now, gentlemen, as we
+have all finished, I will leave you to your wine while I go across with
+our young lieutenant to the king. I must tell him tonight, or he will
+not sleep with wondering over the mystery. We will be back anon and will
+broach a cask of that famous wine we picked up the other day, in honour
+of Malcolm Graheme's promotion.”
+
+Sir John Hepburn was dining with Gustavus, and the meal was just
+concluded when Colonel Munro was announced.
+
+“Well, my brave Munro, what is it?” the king said heartily, “and whom
+have you here? The young officer who escaped from New Brandenburg and
+Tilly, unless I am mistaken.”
+
+“It is, sir, but I have to introduce him in a new character tonight, as
+the leader of your majesty's army who have defeated the Imperialists at
+Mansfeld.”
+
+“Say you so?” exclaimed the king. “Then, though I understand you not,
+we shall hear a solution of the mystery which has been puzzling us. Sit
+down, young sir; fill yourself a flagon of wine, and expound this riddle
+to us.”
+
+Malcolm repeated the narrative as he had told it to his colonel, and the
+king expressed his warm satisfaction.
+
+“You will make a great leader some day if you do not get killed in one
+of these adventures, young sir. Bravery seems to be a common gift of the
+men of your nation; but you seem to unite with it a surprising prudence
+and sagacity, and, moreover, this march of yours to Mansfeld shows that
+you do not fear taking responsibility, which is a high and rare quality.
+You have done good service to the cause, and I thank you, and shall keep
+my eye upon you in the future.”
+
+The next day Malcolm went round the camp, and was surprised at the
+extensive works which had been erected. Strong ramparts and redoubts had
+been thrown up round it, faced with stone, and mounted with 150 pieces
+of cannon. In the centre stood an inner entrenchment with earthworks
+and a deep fosse. In this stood the tents of the king and those of his
+principal officers. The Marquis of Hamilton had, Malcolm heard, arrived
+and gone. He had lost on the march many of the soldiers he had enlisted
+in England, who had died from eating German bread, which was heavier,
+darker coloured, and more sour than that of their own country. This,
+however, did not disagree with the Scotch, who were accustomed to black
+bread.
+
+“I wonder,” Malcolm said to Nigel Graheme, “that when the king has in
+face of him a force so superior to his own he should have sent away on
+detached service the four splendid regiments which they say the marquis
+brought.”
+
+“Well, the fact was,” Nigel said laughing, “Hamilton was altogether too
+grand for us here. We all felt small and mean so long as he remained.
+Gustavus himself, who is as simple in his tastes as any officer in the
+army, and who keeps up no ostentatious show, was thrown into the shade
+by his visitor. Why, had he been the Emperor of Germany or the King of
+France he could not have made a braver show. His table was equipped
+and furnished with magnificence; his carriages would have created a
+sensation in Paris; the liveries of his attendants were more splendid
+than the uniforms of generals; he had forty gentlemen as esquires and
+pages, and 200 yeomen, splendidly mounted and armed, rode with him as
+his bodyguard.
+
+“Altogether he was oppressive; but the Hamiltons have ever been fond of
+show and finery. So Gustavus has sent him and his troops away to guard
+the passages of the Oder and to cover our retreat should we be forced to
+fall back.”
+
+Tilly, finding that the position of Gustavus was too strong to be
+forced, retired to Wolmirstadt, whence he summoned the Elector of Saxony
+to admit his army into his country, and either to disband the Saxon
+army or to unite it to his own. Hitherto the elector had held aloof from
+Gustavus, whom he regarded with jealousy and dislike, and had stood by
+inactive although the slightest movement of his army would have
+saved Magdeburg. To disband his troops, however, and to hand over his
+fortresses to Tilly, would be equivalent to giving up his dominions
+to the enemy; rather than do this he determined to join Gustavus, and
+having despatched Arnheim to treat with the King of Sweden for alliance,
+he sent a point blank refusal to Tilly.
+
+The Imperialist general at once marched towards Leipzig, devastating the
+country as he advanced. Terms were soon arranged between the elector and
+Gustavus, and on the 3d of September, 1631, the Swedish army crossed
+the Elbe, and the next day joined the Saxon army at Torgau. By this time
+Tilly was in front of Leipzig, and immediately on his arrival burned to
+the ground Halle, a suburb lying beyond the wall, and then summoned the
+city to surrender.
+
+Alarmed at the sight of the conflagration of Halle, and with the fate of
+Magdeburg in their minds, the citizens of Leipzig opened their gates at
+once on promise of fair treatment. The news of this speedy surrender
+was a heavy blow to the allies, who, however, after a council of war,
+determined at once to march forward against the city, and to give battle
+to the Imperialists on the plain around it.
+
+Leipzig stands on a wide plain which is called the plain of Breitenfeld,
+and the battle which was about to commence there has been called by
+the Germans the battle of Breitenfeld, to distinguish it from the
+even greater struggles which have since taken place under the walls of
+Leipzig.
+
+The baggage had all been left behind, and the Swedish army lay down as
+they stood. The king occupied his travelling coach, and passed the night
+chatting with Sir John Hepburn, Marshal Horn, Sir John Banner, Baron
+Teuffel, who commanded the guards, and other leaders. The lines of red
+fires which marked Tilly's position on the slope of a gentle eminence to
+the southwest were plainly to be seen. The day broke dull and misty on
+the 7th of September, and as the light fog gradually rose the troops
+formed up for battle. Prayers were said in front of every regiment, and
+the army then moved forward. Two Scottish brigades had the places of
+honour in the van, where the regiments of Sir James Ramsay, the Laird of
+Foulis, and Sir John Hamilton were posted, while Hepburn's Green Brigade
+formed part of the reserve--a force composed of the best troops of the
+army, as on them the fate of the battle frequently depends. The Swedish
+cavalry were commanded by Field Marshal Horn, General Banner, and
+Lieutenant General Bauditzen.
+
+The king and Baron Teuffel led the main body of infantry; the King of
+Saxony commanded the Saxons, who were on the Swedish left. The armies
+were not very unequal in numbers, the allies numbering 35,000, of whom
+the Swedes and Scots counted 20,000, the Saxons 15,000. The Imperialists
+numbered about 40,000. Tilly was fighting unwillingly, for he had
+wished to await the arrival from Italy of 12,000 veterans under General
+Altringer, and who were within a few days' march; but he had been
+induced, against his own better judgment, by the urgency of Pappenheim,
+Furstenberg, and the younger generals, to quit the unassailable post
+he had taken up in front of Leipzig, and to move out on to the plain of
+Breitenfeld to accept the battle which the Swedes offered.
+
+A short distance in his front was the village of Podelwitz. Behind his
+position were two elevations, on which he placed his guns, forty
+in number. In rear of these elevations was a very thick wood. The
+Imperialist right was commanded by Furstenberg, the left by Pappenheim,
+the centre by Tilly himself. Although he had yielded to his generals
+so far as to take up a position on the plain, Tilly was resolved, if
+possible, not to fight until the arrival of the reinforcements; but the
+rashness of Pappenheim brought on a battle. To approach the Austrian
+position the Swedes had to cross the little river Loder, and Pappenheim
+asked permission of Tilly to charge them as they did so. Tilly consented
+on condition that he only charged with two thousand horse and did not
+bring on a general engagement. Accordingly, as the Scottish brigade
+under Sir James Ramsay crossed the Loder, Pappenheim swept down upon
+them.
+
+The Scots stood firm, and with pike and musket repelled the attack; and
+after hard fighting Pappenheim was obliged to fall back, setting fire as
+he retired to the village of Podelwitz. The smoke of the burning village
+drifted across the plain, and was useful to the Swedes, as under its
+cover the entire army passed the Loder, and formed up ready for battle
+facing the Imperialists position, the movement being executed under a
+heavy fire from the Austrian batteries on the hills.
+
+The Swedish order of battle was different from that of the Imperialists.
+The latter had their cavalry massed together in one heavy, compact body,
+while the Swedish regiments of horse were placed alternately with
+the various regiments or brigades of infantry. The Swedish centre was
+composed of four brigades of pikemen. Guns were behind the first line,
+as were the cavalry supporting the pikemen. The regiments of musketeers
+were placed at intervals among the brigades of pikemen.
+
+Pappenheim on his return to the camp ordered up the whole of his
+cavalry, and charged down with fury upon the Swedes, while at the same
+moment Furstenberg dashed with seven regiments of cavalry on the Saxons.
+Between these and the Swedes there was a slight interval, for Gustavus
+had doubts of the steadiness of his allies, and was anxious that in case
+of their defeat his own troops should not be thrown into confusion. The
+result justified his anticipations.
+
+Attacked with fury on their flank by Furstenberg's horse, while his
+infantry and artillery poured a direct fire into their front, the Saxons
+at once gave way. Their elector was the first to set the example of
+flight, and, turning his horse, galloped without drawing rein to Torgau,
+and in twenty minutes after the commencement of the fight the whole of
+the Saxons were in utter rout, hotly pursued by Furstenberg's cavalry.
+
+Tilly now deemed the victory certain, for nearly half of his opponents
+were disposed of, and he outnumbered the remainder by two to one; but
+while Furstenberg had gained so complete a victory over the Saxons,
+Pappenheim, who had charged the Swedish centre, had met with a very
+different reception.
+
+In vain he tried to break through the Swedish spears. The wind was
+blowing full in the faces of the pikemen, and the clouds of smoke and
+dust which rolled down upon them rendered it impossible for them to see
+the heavy columns of horse until they fell upon them like an avalanche,
+yet with perfect steadiness they withstood the attacks.
+
+Seven times Pappenheim renewed his charge; seven times he fell back
+broken and disordered.
+
+As he drew off for the last time Gustavus, seeing the rout of the
+Saxons, and knowing that he would have the whole of Tilly's force
+upon him in a few minutes, determined to rid himself altogether of
+Pappenheim, and launched the whole of his cavalry upon the retreating
+squadrons with overwhelming effect. Thus at the end of half an hour's
+fighting Tilly had disposed of the Saxons, and Gustavus had driven
+Pappenheim's horse from the field.
+
+Three of the Scottish regiments were sent from the centre to strengthen
+Horn on the left flank, which was now exposed by the flight of the
+Saxons. Scarcely had the Scottish musketeers taken their position
+when Furstenberg's horse returned triumphant from their pursuit of the
+Saxons, and at once fell upon Horn's pikemen. These, however, stood
+as firmly as their comrades in the centre had done; and the Scottish
+musketeers, six deep, the three front ranks kneeling, the three in rear
+standing, poured such heavy volleys into the horsemen that these fell
+back in disorder; the more confused perhaps, since volley firing was at
+that time peculiar to the Swedish army, and the crashes of musketry were
+new to the Imperialists.
+
+As the cavalry fell back in disorder, Gustavus led his horse, who had
+just returned from the pursuit of Pappenheim, against them. The shock
+was irresistible, and Furstenberg's horse were driven headlong from
+the field. But the Imperialist infantry, led by Tilly himself, were
+now close at hand, and the roar of musketry along the whole line was
+tremendous, while the artillery on both sides played unceasingly.
+
+Just as the battle was at the hottest the Swedish reserve came up to the
+assistance of the first line, and Sir John Hepburn led the Green Brigade
+through the intervals of the Swedish regiments into action. Lord Reay's
+regiment was in front, and Munro, leading it on, advanced against the
+solid Imperialist columns, pouring heavy volleys into them. When close
+at hand the pikemen passed through the intervals of the musketeers and
+charged furiously with levelled pikes, the musketeers following them
+with clubbed weapons.
+
+The gaps formed by the losses of the regiment at New Brandenburg and the
+other engagements had been filled up, and two thousand strong they
+fell upon the Imperialists. For a few minutes there was a tremendous
+hand-to-hand conflict, but the valour and strength of the Scotch
+prevailed, and the regiment was the first to burst its way through the
+ranks of the Imperialists, and then pressed on to attack the trenches
+behind, held by the Walloon infantry. While the battle was raging in the
+plain the Swedish cavalry, after driving away Furstenberg's horse, swept
+round and charged the eminence in the rear of the Imperialists, cutting
+down the artillerymen and capturing the cannon there.
+
+These were at once turned upon the masses of Imperialist infantry, who
+thus, taken between two fires--pressed hotly by the pikemen in
+front, mown down by the cannon in their rear--lost heart and fled
+precipitately, four regiments alone, the veterans of Furstenberg's
+infantry, holding together and cutting their way through to the woods in
+the rear of their position.
+
+The slaughter would have been even greater than it was, had not the
+cloud of dust and smoke been so thick that the Swedes were unable to see
+ten yards in front of them. The pursuit was taken up by their cavalry,
+who pressed the flying Imperialists until nightfall. So complete was the
+defeat that Tilly, who was badly wounded, could only muster 600 men to
+accompany him in his retreat, and Pappenheim could get together but 1400
+of his horsemen. Seven thousand of the Imperialists were killed, 5000
+were wounded or taken prisoners. The Swedes lost but 700 men, the Saxons
+about 2000.
+
+The Swedes that night occupied the Imperial tents, making great bonfires
+of the broken wagons, pikes, and stockades. A hundred standards were
+taken. Tilly had fought throughout the battle with desperate valour.
+He was ever in the van of his infantry, and three times was wounded
+by bullets and once taken prisoner, and only rescued after a desperate
+conflict.
+
+At the conclusion of the day Cronenberg with 600 Walloon cavalry threw
+themselves around him and bore him from the field. The fierce old
+soldier is said to have burst into a passion of tears on beholding the
+slaughter and defeat of his infantry. Hitherto he had been invincible,
+this being the first defeat he had suffered in the course of his long
+military career. Great stores of provision and wine had been captured,
+and the night was spent in feasting in the Swedish camp.
+
+The next morning the Elector of Saxony rode on to the field to
+congratulate Gustavus on his victory. The latter was politic enough to
+receive him with great courtesy and to thank him for the services the
+Saxons had rendered. He intrusted to the elector the task of recapturing
+Leipzig, while he marched against Merseburg, which he captured with its
+garrison of five hundred men.
+
+After two or three assaults had been made on Leipzig the garrison
+capitulated to the Saxons, and on the 11th of September the army was
+drawn up and reviewed by Gustavus. When the king arrived opposite the
+Green Brigade he dismounted and made the soldiers an address, thanking
+them for their great share in winning the battle of Leipzig.
+
+Many of the Scottish officers were promoted, Munro being made a full
+colonel, and many others advanced a step in rank. The Scottish brigade
+responded to the address of the gallant king with hearty cheers.
+Gustavus was indeed beloved as well as admired by his soldiers. Fearless
+himself of danger, he ever recognized bravery in others, and was ready
+to take his full share of every hardship as well as every peril.
+
+He had ever a word of commendation and encouragement for his troops, and
+was regarded by them as a comrade as well as a leader. In person he was
+tall and rather stout, his face was handsome, his complexion fair, his
+forehead lofty, his hair auburn, his eyes large and penetrating, his
+cheeks ruddy and healthy. He had an air of majesty which enabled him
+to address his soldiers in terms of cheerful familiarity without in
+the slightest degree diminishing their respect and reverence for him as
+their monarch.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X THE PASSAGE OF THE RHINE
+
+
+“I suppose,” Nigel Graheme said, as the officers of the regiment
+assembled in one of the Imperialist tents on the night after the battle
+of Leipzig, “we shall at once press forward to Vienna;” and such was
+the general opinion throughout the Swedish army; but such was not the
+intention of Gustavus. Undoubtedly the temptation to press forward
+and dictate peace in Vienna was strong, but the difficulties and
+disadvantages of such a step were many. He had but 20,000 men, for the
+Saxons could not be reckoned upon; and indeed it was probable that their
+elector, whose jealousy and dislike of Gustavus would undoubtedly be
+heightened by the events of the battle of Breitenfeld, would prove
+himself to be a more than a doubtful ally were the Swedish army to
+remove to a distance.
+
+Tilly would soon rally his fugitives, and, reinforced by the numerous
+Imperialist garrisons from the towns, would be able to overrun North
+Germany in his absence, and to force the Saxons to join him even if the
+elector were unwilling to do so. Thus the little Swedish force would be
+isolated in the heart of Germany; and should Ferdinand abandon Vienna
+at his approach and altogether refuse to treat with him--which his
+obstinacy upon a former occasion when in the very hands of his enemy
+rendered probable--the Swedes would find themselves in a desperate
+position, isolated and alone in the midst of enemies.
+
+There was another consideration. An Imperialist diet was at that moment
+sitting at Frankfort, and Ferdinand was using all his influence to
+compel the various princes and representatives of the free cities to
+submit to him. It was of the utmost importance that Gustavus should
+strengthen his friends and overawe the waverers by the approach of his
+army. Hitherto Franconia and the Rhine provinces had been entirely
+in the hands of the Imperialists, and it was needful that a
+counterbalancing influence should be exerted. These considerations
+induced Gustavus to abandon the tempting idea of a march upon Vienna.
+The Elector of Saxony was charged with carrying the war into Silesia and
+Bohemia, the Electors of Hesse and Hesse-Cassel were to maintain Lower
+Saxony and Westphalia, and the Swedish army turned its face towards the
+Rhine.
+
+On the 20th of September it arrived before Erfurt, an important
+fortified town on the Gera, which surrendered at discretion. Gustavus
+granted the inhabitants, who were for the most part Catholics, the free
+exercise of their religion, and nominated the Duke of Saxe-Weimar to be
+governor of the district and of the province of Thuringen, and the
+Count of Lowenstein to be commander of the garrison, which consisted of
+Colonel Foulis's Scottish regiment, 1500 strong.
+
+Travelling by different routes in two columns the army marched to
+Wurtzburg, the capital of Franconia, a rich and populous city,
+the Imperialist garrison having withdrawn to the strong castle of
+Marienburg, on a lofty eminence overlooking the town, and only separated
+from it by the river Maine. The cathedral at Wurtzburg is dedicated to
+a Scottish saint, St. Kilian, a bishop who with two priests came from
+Scotland in the year 688 to convert the heathen of Franconia. They
+baptized many at Wurtzburg, among them Gospert, the duke of that
+country. This leader was married to Geilana, the widow of his brother;
+and Kilian urging upon him that such a marriage was contrary to the laws
+of the Christian church, the duke promised to separate from her. Geilana
+had not, like her lord, accepted Christianity, and, furious at this
+interference of Kilian, she seized the opportunity when the latter had
+gone with his followers on an expedition against the pagan Saxons to
+have Kilian and his two companions murdered.
+
+The cathedral was naturally an object of interest to the Scotch soldiers
+in the time of Gustavus, and there was an animated argument in the
+quarters of the officers of Munro's regiment on the night of their
+arrival as to whether St. Kilian had done well or otherwise in insisting
+upon his new convert repudiating his wife. The general opinion, however,
+was against the saint, the colonel summing up the question.
+
+“In my opinion,” he said, “Kilian was a fool. Here was no less a matter
+at stake than the conversion of a whole nation, or at least of a great
+tribe of heathens, and Kilian imperilled it all on a question of minor
+importance; for in the first place, the Church of Rome has always held
+that the pope could grant permission for marriage within interdicted
+degrees; in the second place, the marriage had taken place before
+the conversion of the duke to Christianity, and they were therefore
+innocently and without thought of harm bona fide man and wife. Lastly,
+the Church of Rome is opposed to divorce; and Kilian might in any case
+have put up with this small sin, if sin it were, for the sake of saving
+the souls of thousands of pagans. My opinion is that St. Kilian richly
+deserved the fate which befell him. And now to a subject much more
+interesting to us--viz, the capture of Marienburg.
+
+“I tell you, my friends, it is going to be a warm business; the castle
+is considered impregnable, and is strong by nature as well as art, and
+Captain Keller is said to be a stout and brave soldier. He has 1000 men
+in the garrison, and all the monks who were in the town have gone up and
+turned soldiers. But if the task is a hard one the reward will be rich;
+for as the Imperialists believe the place cannot be taken, the treasures
+of all the country round are stored up there. And I can tell you more,
+in the cellars are sixty gigantic tuns of stone, the smallest of which
+holds twenty-five wagon loads of wine, and they say some of it is a
+hundred years old. With glory and treasure and good wine to be won we
+will outdo ourselves tomorrow; and you may be sure that the brunt of the
+affair will fall upon the Scots.”
+
+“Well, there is one satisfaction,” said Nigel Graheme--who after Leipzig
+had been promoted to the rank of major--“if we get the lion's share of
+the fighting, we shall have the lion's share of the plunder and wine.”
+
+“For shame, Graheme! You say nothing of the glory.”
+
+“Ah! well,” Graheme laughed, “we have already had so large share of
+that, that I for one could do without winning any more just at present.
+It's a dear commodity to purchase, and neither fills our belly nor our
+pockets.”
+
+“For shame, Graheme! for shame!” Munro said laughing. “It is a scandal
+that such sentiments should be whispered in the Scottish brigade;
+and now to bed, gentlemen, for we shall have, methinks, a busy day
+tomorrow.”
+
+Sir James Ramsay was appointed to command the assault. The river Maine
+had to be crossed, and he sent off Lieutenant Robert Ramsay of his own
+regiment to obtain boats from the peasantry. The disguise in which he
+went was seen through, and he was taken prisoner and carried to the
+castle. A few boats were, however, obtained by the Swedes.
+
+The river is here 300 yards wide, and the central arch of the bridge had
+been blown up by the Imperialists, a single plank remaining across the
+chasm over the river 48 feet below. The bridge was swept by the heaviest
+cannon in the fortress, and a passage appeared well nigh hopeless. On
+the afternoon of the 5th of October the party prepared to pass, some
+in boats, others by the bridge. A tremendous fire was opened by the
+Imperialists from cannon and musketry, sweeping the bridge with a storm
+of missiles and lashing the river to foam around the boats. The soldiers
+in these returned the fire with their muskets, and the smoke served as a
+cover to conceal them from the enemy.
+
+In the meantime Major Bothwell of Ramsay's regiment led a company across
+the bridge. These, in spite of the fire, crossed the plank over the
+broken arch and reached the head of the bridge, from whence they kept
+up so heavy a fire upon the gunners and musketeers in the lower works by
+the river that they forced them to quit their posts, and so enabled Sir
+James Ramsay and Sir John Hamilton to effect a landing.
+
+Major Bothwell, his brother, and the greater part of his followers were,
+however, slain by the Imperialists' fire from above. The commandant of
+the castle now sallied out and endeavoured to recapture the works by
+the water, but the Scotch repelled the attack and drove the enemy up
+the hill to the castle again. The Scottish troops having thus effected
+a lodgment across the river, and being protected by the rocks from the
+enemy's fire, lay down for the night in the position they had won.
+
+Gustavus during the night caused planks to be thrown across the
+broken bridge and prepared to assault at daybreak. Just as morning
+was breaking, a Swedish officer with seven men climbed up the hill to
+reconnoitre the castle, and found to his surprise that the drawbridge
+was down, but a guard of 200 men were stationed at the gate. He was at
+once challenged, and, shouting “Sweden!” sprang with his men on to
+the end of the drawbridge. The Imperialists tried in vain to raise it;
+before they could succeed some companions of the Swedes ran up, and,
+driving in the guard, took possession of the outer court.
+
+Almost at the same moment Ramsay's and Hamilton's regiments commenced
+their assault on a strong outwork of the castle, which, after two hours'
+desperate fighting, they succeeded in gaining. They then turned its guns
+upon the gate of the keep, which they battered down, and were about to
+charge in when they received orders from the king to halt and retire,
+while the Swedish regiment of Axel-Lilly and the Blue Brigade advanced
+to the storm.
+
+The Scottish regiments retired in the deepest discontent, deeming
+themselves affronted by others being ordered to the post of honour after
+they had by their bravery cleared the way. The Swedish troops forced
+their way in after hard fighting; and the Castle of Marienburg, so
+long deemed impregnable, was captured after a few hours' fighting. The
+quantity of treasure found in it was enormous, and there were sufficient
+provisions to have lasted its garrison for twenty years.
+
+Immediately the place was taken, Colonel Sir John Hamilton advanced to
+Gustavus and resigned his commission on the spot; nor did the assurances
+of the king that he intended no insult to the Scotch soldiers mollify
+his wrath, and quitting the Swedish service he returned at once
+to Scotland. Munro's regiment had taken no part in the storming
+of Marienburg, but was formed up on the north side of the river in
+readiness to advance should the first attack be repelled, and many were
+wounded by the shot of the enemy while thus inactive.
+
+Malcolm while binding up the arm of his sergeant who stood next to him
+felt a sharp pain shoot through his leg, and at once fell to the ground.
+He was lifted up and carried to the rear, where his wound was examined
+by the doctor to the regiment.
+
+“Your luck has not deserted you,” he said after probing the wound. “The
+bullet has missed the bone by half an inch, and a short rest will soon
+put you right again.”
+
+Fortunately for a short time the army remained around Wurtzburg.
+Columns scoured the surrounding country, capturing the various towns and
+fortresses held by the Imperialists, and collecting large quantities of
+provisions and stores. Tilly's army lay within a few days' march; but
+although superior in numbers to that of Gustavus, Tilly had received
+strict orders not to risk a general engagement as his army was now
+almost the only one that remained to the Imperialists, and should it
+suffer another defeat the country would lie at the mercy of the Swedes.
+
+One evening when Malcolm had so far recovered as to be able to walk for
+a short distance, he was at supper with Colonel Munro and some other
+officers, when the door opened and Gustavus himself entered. All leapt
+to their feet.
+
+“Munro,” he said, “get the musketeers of your brigade under arms with
+all haste, form them up in the square before the town hall, and desire
+Sir John Hepburn to meet me there.”
+
+
+The drum was at once beaten, and the troops came pouring from their
+lodgings, and in three or four minutes the musketeers, 800 strong, were
+formed up with Hepburn and Munro at their head. Malcolm had prepared to
+take his arms on the summons, but Munro said at once:
+
+“No, Malcolm, so sudden a summons augurs desperate duty, maybe a long
+night march; you would break down before you got half a mile; besides,
+as only the musketeers have to go, half the officers must remain here.”
+
+Without a word the king placed himself at the head of the men, and
+through the dark and stormy night the troops started on their unknown
+mission. Hepburn and Munro were, like their men, on foot, for they had
+not had time to have their horses saddled.
+
+After marching two hours along the right bank of the Maine the tramp
+of horses was heard behind them, and they were reinforced by eighty
+troopers whom Gustavus before starting had ordered to mount and follow.
+Hitherto the king had remained lost in abstraction, but he now roused
+himself.
+
+“I have just received the most serious news, Hepburn. Tilly has been
+reinforced by 17,000 men under the Duke of Lorraine, and is marching
+with all speed against me. Were my whole army collected here he would
+outnumber us by two to one, but many columns are away, and the position
+is well nigh desperate.
+
+“I have resolved to hold Ochsenfurt. The place is not strong, but it
+lies in a sharp bend of the river and may be defended for a time. If any
+can do so it is surely you and your Scots. Tilly is already close to the
+town; indeed the man who brought me the news said that when he left it
+his advanced pickets were just entering, hence the need for this haste.
+
+“You must hold it to the last, Hepburn, and then, if you can, fall back
+to Wurtzburg; even a day's delay will enable me to call in some of the
+detachments and to prepare to receive Tilly.”
+
+Without halting, the little column marched sixteen miles, and then,
+crossing the bridge over the Maine, entered Ochsenfurt.
+
+It was occupied by a party of fifty Imperialist arquebusiers, but these
+were driven headlong from it. The night was extremely dark, all
+were ignorant of the locality, and the troops were formed up in the
+marketplace to await either morning or the attack of Tilly. Fifty
+troopers were sent half a mile in advance to give warning of the
+approach of the enemy. They had scarcely taken their place when they
+were attacked by the Imperialists, who had been roused by the firing in
+the town. The incessant flash of fire and the heavy rattle of musketry
+told Gustavus that they were in force, and a lieutenant of Lumsden's
+regiment with fifty musketeers was sent off to reinforce the cavalry.
+The Imperialists were, however, too strong to be checked, and horse and
+foot were being driven in when Colonel Munro sallied out with a hundred
+of his own regiment, and the Imperialists after a brisk skirmish, not
+knowing what force they had to deal with, fell back.
+
+As soon as day broke the king and Hepburn made a tour of the walls,
+which were found to be in a very bad condition and ill calculated to
+resist an assault. The Imperialists were not to be seen, and the king,
+fearing they might have marched by some other route against Wurtzburg,
+determined to return at once, telling Hepburn to mine the bridge, and to
+blow it up if forced to abandon the town.
+
+Hepburn at once set to work to strengthen the position, to demolish
+all the houses and walls outside the defences, cut down and destroy all
+trees and hedges which might shelter an enemy, and to strengthen the
+walls with banks of earth and platforms of wood. For three days the
+troops laboured incessantly; on the third night the enemy were heard
+approaching. The advanced troopers and a half company of infantry were
+driven in, contesting every foot of the way. When they reached the walls
+heavy volleys were poured in by the musketeers who lined them upon the
+approaching enemy, and Tilly, supposing that Gustavus must have moved
+forward a considerable portion of his army, called off his troops and
+marched away to Nuremberg. Two days later Hepburn was ordered to return
+with his force to Wurtzburg.
+
+The king now broke up his camp near Wurtzburg, and leaving a garrison in
+the castle of Marienburg and appointing Marshal Horn to hold Franconia
+with 8000 men, he marched against Frankfort-on-the-Maine, his troops
+capturing all the towns and castles on the way, levying contributions,
+and collecting great booty. Frankfort opened its gates without
+resistance, and for a short time the army had rest in pleasant quarters.
+
+The regiments were reorganized, in some cases two of those which
+had suffered most being joined into one. Gustavus had lately been
+strengthened by two more Scottish regiments under Sir Frederick Hamilton
+and Alexander Master of Forbes, and an English regiment under Captain
+Austin. He had now thirteen regiments of Scottish infantry, and the
+other corps of the army were almost entirely officered by Scotchmen. He
+had five regiments of English and Irish, and had thus eighteen regiments
+of British infantry.
+
+At Frankfort he was joined by the Marquis of Hamilton, who had done
+splendid service with the troops under his command. He had driven the
+Imperialists out of Silesia, and marching south, struck such fear into
+them that Tilly was obliged to weaken his army to send reinforcements
+to that quarter. By the order of Gustavus he left Silesia and marched
+to Magdeburg. He had now but 3500 men with him, 2700 having died
+from pestilence, famine, and disease. He assisted General Banner in
+blockading the Imperialist garrison of Magdeburg, and his losses by
+fever and pestilence thinned his troops down to two small regiments;
+these were incorporated with the force of the Duke of Saxe-Weimar,
+and the Marquis of Hamilton joined the staff of Gustavus as a simple
+volunteer.
+
+The king now determined to conquer the Palatinate, which was held by a
+Spanish army. He drove them before him until he reached the Rhine, where
+they endeavoured to defend the passage by burning every vessel and boat
+they could find, and for a time the advance of the Swedes was checked.
+It was now the end of November, the snow lay thick over the whole
+country, and the troops, without tents or covering, were bivouacked
+along the side of the river, two miles below Oppenheim. The opposite
+bank was covered with bushes to the water's edge, and on an eminence a
+short distance back could be seen the tents of the Spaniards.
+
+“If it were summer we might swim across,” Nigel Graheme said to Malcolm;
+“the river is broad, but a good swimmer could cross it easily enough.”
+
+“Yes,” Malcolm agreed, “there would be no difficulty in swimming if
+unencumbered with arms and armour, but there would be no advantage in
+getting across without these; if we could but get hold of a boat or two,
+we would soon wake yonder Spaniards up.”
+
+The next morning Malcolm wandered along the bank closely examining the
+bushes as he went, to see if any boats might be concealed among them,
+for the fishermen and boatmen would naturally try to save their craft
+when they heard that the Imperialists were destroying them. He walked
+three miles up the river without success. As he returned he kept his
+eyes fixed on the bushes on the opposite bank. When within half a mile
+of the camp he suddenly stopped, for his eye caught something dark among
+them. He went to the water's edge and stooped, the better to see under
+the bushes, and saw what he doubted not to be the stern of a boat
+hauled up and sheltered beneath them. He leapt to his feet with a joyful
+exclamation. Here was the means of crossing the river; but the boat had
+to be brought over. Once afloat this would be easy enough, but he was
+sure that his own strength would be insufficient to launch her, and
+that he should need the aid of at least one man. On returning to camp he
+called aside the sergeant of his company, James Grant, who was from his
+own estate in Nithsdale, and whom he knew to be a good swimmer.
+
+
+“Sergeant,” he said, “I want you to join me in an enterprise tonight. I
+have found a boat hauled up under the bushes on the opposite shore, and
+we must bring her across. I cannot make out her size; but from the look
+of her stern I should say she was a large boat. You had better therefore
+borrow from the artillerymen one of their wooden levers, and get a stout
+pole two or three inches across, and cut half a dozen two foot lengths
+from it to put under her as rollers. Get also a plank of four inches
+wide from one of the deserted houses in the village behind us, and cut
+out two paddles; we may find oars on board, but it is as well to be
+prepared in case the owner should have removed them.”
+
+“Shall I take my weapons, sir?”
+
+“We can take our dirks in our belts, sergeant, and lash our swords to
+the wooden lever, but I do not think we shall have any fighting. The
+night will be dark, and the Spaniards, believing that we have no boats,
+will not keep a very strict watch. The worst part of the business is the
+swim across the river, the water will be bitterly cold; but as you and I
+have often swum Scotch burns when they were swollen by the melting snow
+I think that we may well manage to get across this sluggish stream.”
+
+“At what time will we be starting, sir?”
+
+“Be here at the edge of the river at six o'clock, sergeant. I can get
+away at that time without exciting comment, and we will say nothing
+about it unless we succeed.”
+
+Thinking it over, however, it occurred to Malcolm that by this means
+a day would be lost--and he knew how anxious the king was to press
+forward. He therefore abandoned his idea of keeping his discovery
+secret, and going to his colonel reported that he had found a boat, and
+could bring it across from the other side by seven o'clock.
+
+The news was so important that Munro at once went to the king. Gustavus
+ordered three hundred Swedes and a hundred Scots of each of the
+regiments of Ramsay, Munro, and the Laird of Wormiston, the whole under
+the command of Count Brahe, to form up after dark on the river bank and
+prepare to cross, and he himself came down to superintend the passage.
+By six it was perfectly dark. During the day Malcolm had placed two
+stones on the edge of the water, one exactly opposite the boat, the
+other twenty feet behind it in an exact line. When Gustavus arrived at
+the spot where the troops were drawn up, Malcolm was taken up to him by
+his colonel.
+
+“Well, my brave young Graheme,” the king said, “so you are going to do
+us another service; but how will you find the boat in this darkness?
+Even were there no stream you would find it very difficult to strike the
+exact spot on a dark night like this.”
+
+“I have provided against that, sir, by placing two marks on the bank.
+When we start lanterns will be placed on these. We shall cross higher up
+so as to strike the bank a little above where I believe the boat to be,
+then we shall float along under the bushes until the lanterns are in
+a line one with another, and we shall know then that we are exactly
+opposite the boat.”
+
+“Well thought of!” the king exclaimed. “Munro, this lieutenant of yours
+is a treasure. And now God speed you, my friend, in your cold swim
+across the stream!”
+
+Malcolm and the sergeant now walked half a mile up the river, a distance
+which, judging from the strength of the current and the speed at which
+they could swim, would, they thought, take them to the opposite bank
+at about the point where the boat was lying. Shaking hands with Colonel
+Munro, who had accompanied them, Malcolm entered the icy cold water
+without delay. Knowing that it was possible that their strength might
+give out before they reached the opposite side, Malcolm had had
+two pairs of small casks lashed two feet apart. These they fastened
+securely, so that as they began to swim the casks floated a short
+distance behind each shoulder, giving them perfect support. The lever
+and paddles were towed behind them. The lights in the two camps afforded
+them a means of directing their way. The water was intensely cold,
+and before they were halfway across Malcolm congratulated himself upon
+having thought of the casks. Had it not been for them he would have
+begun to doubt his ability to reach the further shore, for although he
+would have thought nothing of the swim at other times his limbs were
+fast becoming numbed with the extreme cold. The sergeant kept close to
+him, and a word or two was occasionally exchanged.
+
+“I think it is colder than our mountain streams, Grant?”
+
+“It's no colder, your honour, but the water is smooth and still, and
+we do not have to wrestle with it as with a brook in spate. It's the
+stillness which makes it feel so cold. The harder we swim the less we
+will feel it.”
+
+It was with a deep feeling of relief that Malcolm saw something loom
+just in front of him from the darkness, and knew that he was close to
+the land. A few more strokes and he touched the bushes. Looking back he
+saw that the two lights were nearly in a line. Stopping swimming he let
+the stream drift him down. Two or three minutes more and one of the tiny
+lights seemed exactly above the other.
+
+“This is the spot, Grant,” he said in a low voice; “land here as quietly
+as you can.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI THE CAPTURE OF OPPENHEIM
+
+
+The two swimmers dragged themselves on shore, but for a minute or two
+could scarce stand, so numbed were their limbs by the cold. Malcolm took
+from his belt a flask of brandy, took a long draught, and handed it to
+his companion, who followed his example.
+
+The spirit sent a glow of warmth through their veins, and they began to
+search among the bushes for the boat, one proceeding each way along the
+bank. They had not removed their leathern doublets before entering
+the water, as these, buoyed up as they were, would not affect their
+swimming, and would be a necessary protection when they landed not only
+against the cold of the night air but against the bushes.
+
+Malcolm's beacon proved an accurate guide, for he had not proceeded
+twenty yards before he came against a solid object which he at once felt
+to be the boat. A low whistle called the sergeant to his side, bringing
+with him the rollers and paddles from the spot where they had landed.
+They soon felt that the boat was a large one, and that their strength
+would have been wholly insufficient to get her into the water without
+the aid of the lever and rollers. Taking the former they placed its end
+under the stern post, and placing a roller under its heel to serve as a
+pivot they threw their weight on the other end of the lever and at once
+raised the boat some inches in the air.
+
+Grant held the lever down and Malcolm slid a roller as far up under
+the keel as it would go; the lever was then shifted and the boat again
+raised, and the process was continued until her weight rested upon three
+rollers. She was now ready to be launched, and as the bank was steep
+they had no doubt of their ability to run her down. An examination had
+already shown that their paddles would be needless, as the oars were
+inside her. They took their places one on each side of the bow, and
+applying their strength the boat glided rapidly down.
+
+“Gently, Grant,” Malcolm said, “don't let her go in with a splash. There
+may be some sentries within hearing.”
+
+They continued their work cautiously, and the boat noiselessly entered
+the water. Getting out the oars they gave her a push, and she was soon
+floating down the stream. The rowlocks were in their places, and rowing
+with extreme care so as to avoid making the slightest sound they made
+their way across the river. They were below the camp when they landed,
+but there were many men on the lookout, for the news of the attempt had
+spread rapidly.
+
+Leaping ashore amidst a low cheer from a group of soldiers, Malcolm
+directed them to tow the boat up at once to the place where the troops
+were formed ready for crossing, while he and the sergeant, who were
+both chilled to the bone, for their clothes had frozen stiff upon them,
+hurried to the spot where the regiment was bivouacked. Here by the side
+of a blazing fire they stripped, and were rubbed with cloths by their
+comrades till a glow of warmth again began to be felt, the external heat
+and friction being aided by the administration of two steaming flagons
+of spiced wine. Dry clothes were taken from their knapsacks and warmed
+before the fire, and when these were put on they again felt warm and
+comfortable.
+
+Hurrying off now to the spot where the troops were drawn up, they found
+that the boat had already made two passages. She rowed four oars, and
+would, laden down to the water's edge, carry twenty-five men. The oars
+had been muffled with cloths so as to make no sound in the rowlocks.
+A party of Munro's Scots had first crossed, then a party of Swedes.
+Malcolm and the sergeant joined their company unnoticed in the darkness.
+Each detachment sent over a boat load in turns, and when six loads
+had crossed it was again the turn of the men of Munro's regiment, and
+Malcolm entered the boat with the men. The lights still burned as a
+signal, enabling the boat to land each party almost at the same spot.
+Malcolm wondered what was going on. A perfect stillness reigned on the
+other side, and it was certain that the alarm had not yet been given.
+
+On ascending the bank he saw in front of him some dark figures actively
+engaged, and heard dull sounds. On reaching the spot he found the
+parties who had preceded him hard at work with shovels throwing up an
+intrenchment. In the darkness he had not perceived that each of the
+soldiers carried a spade in addition to his arms. The soil was deep and
+soft, and the operations were carried on with scarce a sound. As each
+party landed they fell to work under the direction of their officers.
+All night the labour continued, and when the dull light of the winter
+morning began to dispel the darkness a solid rampart of earth breast
+high rose in a semicircle, with its two extremities resting on the
+riverbank.
+
+The last boat load had but just arrived across, and the 600 men were now
+gathered in the work, which was about 150 feet across, the base formed
+by the river. The earth forming the ramparts had been taken from the
+outside, and a ditch 3 feet deep and 6 feet wide had been thus formed.
+
+The men, who, in spite of the cold were hot and perspiring from their
+night's work, now entered the intrenched space, and sat down to take
+a meal, each man having brought two days' rations in his havresack. It
+grew rapidly lighter, and suddenly the sound of a trumpet, followed by
+the rapid beating of drums, showed that the Spaniards had, from their
+camp on the eminence half a mile away, discovered the work which had
+sprung up during the night as if by magic on their side of the river.
+
+In a few minutes a great body of cavalry was seen issuing from the
+Spanish camp, and fourteen squadrons of cuirassiers trotted down towards
+the intrenchments. Soon the word was given to charge, and, like a
+torrent, the mass of cavalry swept down upon it.
+
+Two-thirds of those who had crossed were musketeers, the remainder
+pikemen. The latter formed the front line behind the rampart, their
+spears forming a close hedge around it, while the musketeers prepared to
+fire between them. By the order of Count Brahe not a trigger was pulled
+until the cavalry were within fifty yards, then a flash of flame swept
+round the rampart, and horses and men in the front line of the cavalry
+tumbled to the ground. But half the musketeers had fired, and a few
+seconds later another volley was poured into the horsemen. The latter,
+however, although many had fallen, did not check their speed, but rode
+up close to the rampart, and flung themselves upon the hedge of spears.
+
+Nothing could exceed the gallantry with which the Spaniards fought. Some
+dismounted, and, leaping into the ditch, tried to climb the rampart;
+others leapt the horses into it, and standing up in their saddles, cut
+at the spearmen with their swords, and fired their pistols among them.
+Many, again, tried to leap their horses over ditch and rampart, but the
+pikemen stood firm, while at short intervals withering volleys tore into
+the struggling mass.
+
+For half an hour the desperate fight continued, and then, finding that
+the position could not be carried by horsemen, the Spanish commander
+drew off his men, leaving no less than 600 lying dead around the rampart
+of earth. There were no Spanish infantry within some miles of the spot,
+and the cavalry rode away, some to Maintz, but the greater part to
+Oppenheim, where there was a strong garrison of 1000 men.
+
+A careful search among the bushes brought three more boats to light, and
+a force was soon taken across the river sufficient to maintain itself
+against any attack. Gustavus himself was in one of the first boats that
+crossed.
+
+“Well done, my brave hearts!” he said as he landed, just as the Spanish
+horsemen had ridden away. “You have fought stoutly and well, and our
+way is now open to us. Where are Lieutenant Graheme and the sergeant who
+swam across with him?”
+
+Malcolm and his companion soon presented themselves.
+
+“I sent for you to your camp,” the king said, “but found that you but
+waited to change your clothes, and had then joined the force crossing.
+You had no orders to do so.”
+
+“We had no orders not to do so, sire, but having begun the affair it was
+only natural that we should see the end of it.”
+
+“You had done your share and more,” the king said, “and I thank you
+both heartily for it, and promote you, Graheme, at once to the rank of
+captain, and will request Colonel Munro to give you the first company
+which may fall vacant in his regiment. If a vacancy should not occur
+shortly I will place you in another regiment until one may happen in
+your own corps. To you, sergeant, I give a commission as officer.
+You will take that rank at once, and will be a supernumerary in your
+regiment till a vacancy occurs. Such promotion has been well and
+worthily won by you both.”
+
+Without delay an advance was ordered against Oppenheim. It lay on the
+Imperialist side of the Rhine. Behind the town stood a strong and well
+fortified castle upon a lofty eminence. Its guns swept not only the
+country around it, but the ground upon the opposite side of the river.
+There, facing it, stood a strong fort surrounded by double ditches,
+which were deep and broad and full of water. They were crossed only by
+a drawbridge on the side facing the river, and the garrison could
+therefore obtain by boats supplies or reinforcements as needed from the
+town.
+
+The Green and Blue Brigades at once commenced opening trenches against
+this fort, and would have assaulted the place without delay had not a
+number of boats been brought over by a Protestant well wisher of the
+Swedes from the other side of the river. The assault was therefore
+delayed in order that the attack might be delivered simultaneously
+against the positions on both sides of the river. The brigade of guards
+and the White Brigade crossed in the boats at Gernsheim, five miles from
+the town, and marched against it during the night.
+
+The Spaniards from their lofty position in the castle of Oppenheim saw
+the campfires of the Scots around their fort on the other side of the
+river, and opened a heavy cannonade upon them. The fire was destructive,
+and many of the Scots were killed, Hepburn and Munro having a narrow
+escape, a cannonball passing just over their heads as they were sitting
+together by a fire.
+
+The defenders of the fort determined to take advantage of the fire
+poured upon their assailants, and two hundred musketeers made a gallant
+sortie upon them; but Hepburn led on his pikemen who were nearest at
+hand, and, without firing a shot, drove them back again into the
+fort. At daybreak the roar of cannon on the opposite side of the river
+commenced, and showed that the king with the divisions which had crossed
+had arrived at their posts. The governor of the fort, seeing that if,
+as was certain, the lower town were captured by the Swedes, he should be
+cut off from all communication with the castle and completely isolated,
+surrendered to Sir John Hepburn.
+
+The town had, indeed, at once opened its gates, and two hundred men of
+Sir James Ramsay's regiment were placed there. Hepburn prepared to cross
+the river with the Blue and Green Brigades to aid the king in reducing
+the castle--a place of vast size and strength--whose garrison composed
+of Spaniards and Italians were replying to the fire of Gustavus. A boat
+was lying at the gate of the fort.
+
+“Captain Graheme,” Hepburn said to Malcolm, “take with you two
+lieutenants and twenty men in the boat and cross the river; then send
+word by an officer to the king that the fort here has surrendered, and
+that I am about to cross, and let the men bring over that flotilla of
+boats which is lying under the town wall.”
+
+Malcolm crossed at once. After despatching the message to the king and
+sending the officer back with the boats he had for the moment nothing
+to do, and made his way into the town to inquire from the officers of
+Ramsay's detachment how things were going. He found the men drawn up.
+
+“Ah! Malcolm Graheme,” the major in command said, “you have arrived in
+the very nick of time to take part in a gallant enterprise.”
+
+“I am ready,” Malcolm said; “what is to be done?”
+
+“We are going to take the castle, that is all,” the major said.
+
+“You are joking,” Malcolm laughed, looking at the great castle and the
+little band of two hundred men.
+
+“That am I not,” the major answered; “my men have just discovered a
+private passage from the governor's quarters here up to the very gate
+of the outer wall. As you see we have collected some ladders, and as we
+shall take them by surprise, while they are occupied with the king, we
+shall give a good account of them.”
+
+“I will go with you right willingly,” Malcolm said; but he could not but
+feel that the enterprise was a desperate one, and wished that the major
+had waited until a few hundred more men had crossed. Placing himself
+behind the Scottish officer, he advanced up the passage which had been
+discovered. Ascending flight after flight of stone stairs, the column
+issued from the passage at the very foot of the outer wall before the
+garrison stationed there were aware of their approach. The ladders were
+just placed when the Italians caught sight of them and rushed to the
+defence, but it was too late. The Scotch swarmed up and gained a footing
+on the wall.
+
+Driving the enemy before them they cleared the outer works, and pressed
+so hotly upon the retiring Imperialists that they entered with them into
+the inner works of the castle, crossing the drawbridge over the moat
+which separated it from its outer works before the garrison had time to
+raise it.
+
+Now in the very heart of the castle a terrible encounter took place. The
+garrison, twelve hundred strong, ran down from their places on the wall,
+and seeing how small was the force that had entered fell upon them
+with fury. It was a hand to hand fight. Loud rose the war cries of the
+Italian and Spanish soldiers, and the answering cheers of the Scots
+mingled with the clash of sword on steel armour and the cries of the
+wounded, while without the walls the cannon of Gustavus thundered
+incessantly.
+
+Not since the dreadful struggle in the streets of New Brandenburg had
+Malcolm been engaged in so desperate a strife. All order and regularity
+was lost, and man to man they fought with pike, sword, and clubbed
+musket. There was no giving of orders, for no word could be heard in
+such a din, and the officers with their swords and half pikes fought
+desperately in the melee with the rest.
+
+Gradually, however, the strength and endurance of Ramsay's veterans
+prevailed over numbers. Most of the officers of the Imperialists had
+been slain, as well as their bravest men, and the rest began to draw off
+and to scatter through the castle, some to look for hiding places, many
+to jump over the walls rather than fall into the hands of the terrible
+Scots.
+
+The astonishment of Gustavus and of Hepburn, who was now marching with
+his men towards the castle, at hearing the rattle of musketry and the
+din of battle within the very heart of the fortress was great indeed,
+and this was heightened when, a few minutes later, the soldiers were
+seen leaping desperately from the walls, and a great shout arose from
+the troops as the Imperial banner was seen to descend from its flagstaff
+on the keep. Gustavus with his staff rode at once to the gate, which was
+opened for him; and on entering he found Ramsay's little force drawn up
+to salute him as he entered. It was reduced nearly half in strength, and
+not a man but was bleeding from several wounds, while cleft helms and
+dinted armour showed how severe had been the fray.
+
+“My brave Scots,” he exclaimed, “why were you too quick for me?”
+
+The courtyard of the castle was piled with slain, who were also
+scattered in every room throughout it, five hundred having been slain
+there before the rest threw down their arms and were given quarter.
+This exploit was one of the most valiant which was performed during the
+course of the whole war. Four colours were taken, one of which was that
+of the Spanish regiment, this being the first of that nationality which
+had ever been captured by Gustavus.
+
+After going over the castle, whose capture would have tasked his
+resources and the valour of his troops to the utmost had he been
+compelled to attack it in the usual way, Gustavus sent for the officers
+of Ramsay's companies and thanked them individually for their capture.
+
+“What! you here, Malcolm Graheme!” Gustavus said as he came in at the
+rear of Ramsay's officers. “Why, what had you to do with this business?”
+
+“I was only a volunteer, sire,” Malcolm said. “I crossed with the
+parties who fetched the boats; but as my instructions ended there I had
+nought to do, and finding that Ramsay's men were about to march up to
+the attack of the castle, I thought it best to join them, being somewhat
+afraid to stop in the town alone.”
+
+“And he did valiant service, sire,” the major said. “I marked him in the
+thick of the fight, and saw more than one Imperialist go down before his
+sword.”
+
+“You know the story of the pitcher and the well, Captain Graheme,” the
+king said, smiling. “Some day you will go once too often, and I shall
+have to mourn the loss of one of the bravest young officers in my army.”
+
+There was no rest for the soldiers of Gustavus, and no sooner had
+Oppenheim fallen than the army marched against Maintz. This was defended
+by two thousand Spanish troops under Don Philip de Sylvia, and was
+a place of immense strength. It was at once invested, and trenches
+commenced on all sides, the Green Brigade as usual having the post
+of danger and honour facing the citadel. The investment began in the
+evening, but so vigorously did the Scotch work all night in spite of
+the heavy musketry and artillery fire with which the garrison swept
+the ground that by morning the first parallel was completed, and the
+soldiers were under shelter behind a thick bank of earth.
+
+All day the Imperialists kept up their fire, the Scots gradually pushing
+forward their trenches. In the evening Colonel Axel Lily, one of the
+bravest of the Swedish officers, came into the trenches to pay a visit
+to Hepburn. He found him just sitting down to dinner with Munro by the
+side of a fire in the trench. They invited him to join them, and the
+party were chatting gaily when a heavy cannonball crashed through the
+earthen rampart behind them, and, passing between Hepburn and Munro,
+carried off the leg of the Swedish officer.
+
+Upon the following day the governor, seeing that the Swedes had erected
+several strong batteries, and that the Green Brigade, whose name was a
+terror to the Imperialists, was preparing to storm, capitulated, and
+his soldiers were allowed to march out with all their baggage, flying
+colours, and two pieces of cannon. Eighty pieces of cannon fell into the
+hands of the Swedes. The citizens paid 220,000 dollars as the ransom
+of their city from pillage, and the Jews 180,000 for the protection
+of their quarters and of their gorgeous synagogue, whose wealth and
+magnificence were celebrated; and on the 14th of December, 1631, on
+which day Gustavus completed his thirty-seventh year, he entered the
+city as conqueror.
+
+Here he kept Christmas with great festivity, and his court was attended
+by princes and nobles from all parts of Germany. Among them were six
+of the chief princes of the empire and twelve ambassadors from foreign
+powers. Among the nobles was the Count of Mansfeld, who brought with him
+his wife and daughter. Three days before Christmas Hepburn's brigade
+had been moved in from their bivouac in the snow covered trenches,
+and assigned quarters in the town, and the count, who arrived on the
+following day, at once repaired to the mansion inhabited by the colonel
+and officers of Munro's regiment, and inquired for Malcolm Graheme.
+
+“You will find Captain Graheme within,” the Scottish soldier on sentry
+said.
+
+“It is not Captain Graheme I wish to see,” the count said, “but Malcolm
+Graheme, a very young officer.”
+
+“I reckon that it is the captain,” the soldier said; “he is but a boy;
+but in all the regiment there is not a braver soldier; not even the
+colonel himself. Donald,” he said, turning to a comrade, “tell Captain
+Graheme that he is wanted here.”
+
+In a short time Malcolm appeared at the door.
+
+“Ah! it is you, my young friend!” the count exclaimed; “and you have won
+the rank of captain already by your brave deeds! Right glad am I to see
+you again. I have come with my wife, to attend the court of this noble
+king of yours. Can you come with me at once? The countess is longing to
+see you, and will be delighted to hear that you have passed unscathed
+through all the terrible contests in which you have been engaged. My
+daughter is here too; she is never tired of talking about her young
+Scottish soldier; but now that you are a captain she will have to be
+grave and respectful.”
+
+Malcolm at once accompanied the count to his house, and was most kindly
+received by the countess.
+
+“It is difficult to believe,” she said, “that 'tis but four months since
+we met, so many have been the events which have been crowded into that
+time. Scarce a day has passed but we have received news of some success
+gained, of some town or castle captured, and your Green Brigade has
+always been in the van. We have been constantly in fear for you, and
+after that terrible battle before Leipzig Thekla scarcely slept a wink
+until we obtained a copy of the Gazette with the names of the officers
+killed.”
+
+“You are kind indeed to bear me so in remembrance,” Malcolm said, “and
+I am indeed grateful for it. I have often wondered whether any fresh
+danger threatened you; but I hoped that the advance of the Marquis of
+Hamilton's force would have given the Imperialists too much to do for
+them to disturb you.”
+
+“Yes, we have had no more trouble,” the countess replied. “The villages
+which the Imperialists destroyed are rising again; and as after the
+flight of the enemy the cattle and booty they had captured were all left
+behind, the people are recovering from their visit. What terrible havoc
+has the war caused! Our way here led through ruined towns and villages,
+the country is infested by marauders, and all law and order is at an end
+save where there are strong bodies of troops. We rode with an escort of
+twenty men; but even then we did not feel very safe until we were fairly
+through Franconia. And so you have passed unwounded through the strife?”
+
+“Yes, countess,” Malcolm replied. “I had indeed a ball through my leg
+at Wurtzburg; but as it missed the bone, a trifle like that is scarcely
+worth counting. I have been most fortunate indeed.”
+
+“He is a captain now,” the count said, “and to obtain such promotion he
+must have greatly distinguished himself. I do not suppose that he will
+himself tell us his exploits; but I shall soon learn all about them from
+others. I am to meet his colonel this evening at a dinner at the palace,
+and shall be able to give you the whole history tomorrow.”
+
+“But I want the history now,” Thekla said. “It is much nicer to hear a
+thing straight from some one who has done it, than from any one else.”
+
+“There is no story to tell,” Malcolm said. “I had been promised my
+lieutenancy at the first vacancy before I was at Mansfeld, and on my
+return found that the vacancy had already occurred, and I was appointed.
+I got my company the other day for a very simple matter, namely, for
+swimming across the Rhine with a barrel fixed on each side of me to
+prevent my sinking. Nothing very heroic about that, you see, young
+lady.”
+
+“For swimming across the Rhine!” the count said. “Then you must have
+been the Scottish officer who with a sergeant swam and fetched the boat
+across which enabled the Swedes to pass a body of troops over, and so
+open the way into the Palatinate. I heard it spoken of as a most gallant
+action.”
+
+“I can assure you,” Malcolm said earnestly, “that there was no gallantry
+about it. It was exceedingly cold, I grant, but that was all.”
+
+“Then why should the king have made you a captain for it? You can't get
+over that.”
+
+“That was a reward for my luck,” Malcolm laughed. “'Tis better to be
+lucky than to be rich, it is said, and I had the good luck to discover
+a boat concealed among the bushes just at the time when a boat was worth
+its weight in gold.”
+
+For an hour Malcolm sat chatting, and then took his leave, as he was
+going on duty, promising to return the next day, and to spend as much of
+his time as possible with them while they remained in the city.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII THE PASSAGE OF THE LECH
+
+
+For the next two months the Green Brigade remained quietly at Maintz,
+a welcome rest after their arduous labours. The town was very gay, and
+every house was occupied either by troops or by the nobles and visitors
+from all parts of Northern Europe. Banquets and balls were of nightly
+occurrence; and a stranger who arrived in the gay city would not have
+dreamt that a terrible campaign had just been concluded, and that
+another to the full as arduous was about to commence.
+
+During this interval of rest the damages which the campaign had effected
+in the armour and accoutrements of men and officers were repaired, the
+deep dents effected by sword, pike, and bullet were hammered out, the
+rust removed, and the stains of blood and bivouac obliterated; fresh
+doublets and jerkins were served out from the ample stores captured from
+the enemy, and the army looked as gay and brilliant as when it first
+landed in North Germany.
+
+Malcolm spent much of his spare time with the Count and Countess of
+Mansfeld, who, irrespective of their gratitude for the assistance he had
+rendered them in time of need, had taken a strong liking to the young
+Scotchman.
+
+“You are becoming quite a court gallant, Graheme,” one of his comrades
+said at a court ball where Malcolm had been enjoying himself greatly,
+having, thanks to the Countess of Mansfeld, no lack of partners, while
+many of the officers were forced to look on without taking part in the
+dancing, the number of ladies being altogether insufficient to furnish
+partners to the throng of officers, Swedish, German, and Scottish.
+Beyond the scarf and feathers which showed the brigade to which officers
+belonged, there was, even when in arms, but slight attempt at uniformity
+in their attire, still less so when off duty. The scene at these balls
+was therefore gay in the extreme, the gallants being all attired in
+silk, satin, or velvet of brilliant colours slashed with white or some
+contrasting hue. The tailors at Maintz had had a busy time of it, for in
+so rapid a campaign much baggage had been necessarily lost, and many of
+the officers required an entirely new outfit before they could take part
+in the court festivities.
+
+There was, however, no lack of money, for the booty and treasure
+captured had been immense, and each officer having received a fixed
+share, they were well able to renew their wardrobes. Some fresh
+reinforcements arrived during their stay here, and the vacancies which
+battle and disease had made in the ranks were filled up.
+
+But although the Green Brigade did not march from Maintz till the 5th
+of March, 1632, the whole army did not enjoy so long a rest. In February
+Gustavus despatched three hundred of Ramsay's regiment under Lieutenant
+Colonel George Douglas against the town of Creutzenach, together with a
+small party of English volunteers under Lord Craven. Forty-seven of
+the men were killed while opening the trenches, but the next day they
+stormed one of the gates and drove the garrison, which was composed of
+six hundred Walloons and Burgundians, out of the town into the castle of
+Kausemberg, which commanded it. Its position was extremely strong, its
+walls and bastions rising one behind another, and their aspect was so
+formidable that they were popularly known as the “Devil's Works.” From
+these the garrison opened a very heavy fire into the town, killing
+many of the Scots. Douglas, however, gave them but short respite, for
+gathering his men he attacked the castle and carried bastion after
+bastion by storm until the whole were taken.
+
+About the same time the important town of Ulm on the Danube opened its
+gates to the Swedes, and Sir Patrick Ruthven was appointed commandant
+with 1200 Swedes as garrison, Colonel Munro with two companies of
+musketeers marched to Coblentz and aided Otto Louis the Rhinegrave, who
+with a brigade of twenty troops of horse was expecting to be attacked
+by 10,000 Spaniards and Walloons from Spires. Four regiments of Spanish
+horse attacked the Rhinegrave's quarters, but were charged so furiously
+by four troops of Swedish dragoons under Captain Hume that 300 of them
+were killed and the Elector of Nassau taken prisoner; after this the
+Spaniards retired beyond the Moselle.
+
+In other parts of Germany the generals of Gustavus were equally
+successful. General Horn defeated the Imperialists at Heidelberg and
+Heilbronn. General Lowenhausen scoured all the shores of the Baltic, and
+compelled Colonel Graham, a Scotch soldier in the Imperial service,
+to surrender the Hanse town of Wismar. Graham marched out with his
+garrison, 3000 strong, with the honours of war en route for Silesia, but
+having, contrary to terms, spiked the cannon, plundered the shipping,
+and slain a Swedish lieutenant, Lowenhausen pursued him, and in the
+battle which ensued 500 of Graham's men were slain and the colonel
+himself with 2000 taken prisoner.
+
+General Ottentodt was moving up the Elbe carrying all before him with a
+force of 14,000 men, among whom were five battalions of Scots and one
+of English. This force cleared the whole duchy of Mecklenburg, capturing
+all the towns and fortresses in rapid succession. Sir Patrick Ruthven
+advanced along the shores of Lake Constance, driving the Imperialists
+before him into the Tyrol. Magdeburg was captured by General Banner, the
+Landgrave of Hesse-Cassel reduced all Fulda-Paderborn and the adjacent
+districts, the Elector of Saxony overran Bohemia, and Sir Alexander
+Leslie threatened the Imperialists in Lower Saxony.
+
+Thus the campaign of 1632 opened under the most favourable auspices. The
+Green Brigade marched on the 5th of March to Aschaffenburg, a distance
+of more than thirty miles, a fact which speaks volumes for the physique
+and endurance of the troops, for this would in the present day be
+considered an extremely long march for troops, and the weight of the
+helmet and armour, musket and accoutrements, of the troops of those days
+was fully double that now carried by European soldiers. Here they were
+reviewed by the king.
+
+By the 10th the whole army, 23,000 strong, were collected at Weinsheim
+and advanced towards Bavaria, driving before them the Imperialists under
+the Count de Bucquio. The Chancellor Oxenstiern had been left by the
+king with a strong force to guard his conquests on the Rhine.
+
+No sooner had the king marched than the Spaniards again crossed the
+Moselle. The chancellor and the Duke of Weimar advanced against them.
+The Dutch troops, who formed the first line of the chancellor's army,
+were unable to stand the charge of the Spanish and fled in utter
+confusion; but the Scottish regiment of Sir Roderick Leslie, who had
+succeeded Sir John Hamilton on his resignation, and the battalion of
+Sir John Ruthven, charged the Spaniards with levelled pikes so furiously
+that these in turn were broken and driven off the field.
+
+On the 26th of March Gustavus arrived before the important town and
+fortress of Donauworth, being joined on the same day by the Laird of
+Foulis with his two regiments of horse and foot. Donauworth is the key
+to Swabia; it stands on the Danube, and was a strongly fortified place,
+its defences being further covered by fortifications upon a lofty
+eminence close by, named the Schellemberg. It was held by the Duke of
+Saxe-Lauenburg with two thousand five hundred men. The country round
+Donauworth is fertile and hilly, and Gustavus at once seized a height
+which commanded the place. The Bavarians were at work upon entrenchments
+here as the Swedes advanced, but were forced to fall back into the town.
+From the foot of the hill a suburb extended to the gates of the city.
+This was at once occupied by five hundred musketeers, who took up their
+post in the houses along the main road in readiness to repel a sortie
+should the garrison attempt one; while the force on the hillside worked
+all night, and by daybreak on the 27th had completed and armed a twenty
+gun battery.
+
+In this was placed a strong body of infantry under Captain Semple, a
+Scotchman. As this battery commanded the walls of the town, and flanked
+the bridge across the Danube, the position of the defenders was now
+seriously menaced, but the Duke of Saxe-Lauenburg refused the demand of
+Gustavus to surrender. The battery now opened fire, first demolishing a
+large stone building by the river occupied by a force of Imperialists,
+and then directing its fire upon the city gates.
+
+The cannonade continued after nightfall, but in the darkness a body of
+Imperialist horsemen under Colonel Cronenberg dashed out at full speed
+through the gate, cut a passage through the musketeers in the suburb,
+galloped up the hill, and fell upon the infantry and artillery in
+the battery. So furious was their charge that the greater part of the
+defenders of the battery were cut down. The guns were spiked, and the
+cavalry, having accomplished their purpose, charged down the hill, cut
+their way through the suburb, and regained the town.
+
+This gallant exploit deranged the plans of the Swedes. Gustavus
+reconnoitred the town accompanied by Sir John Hepburn, and by the advice
+of that officer decided upon a fresh plan of operations. Hepburn
+pointed out to him that by taking possession of the angle formed by the
+confluence of the Wermitz and Danube to the west of the town the bridge
+crossing from Donauworth into Bavaria would be completely commanded, and
+the garrison would be cut off from all hope of escape and of receiving
+relief from Bavaria.
+
+The plan being approved, Hepburn drew off his brigade with its
+artillery, and marching five miles up the Danube crossed the river at
+the bridge of Hassfurt, and descended the opposite bank until he faced
+Donauworth. He reached his position at midnight, and placed his cannon
+so as to command the whole length of the bridge, and then posted his
+musketeers in the gardens and houses of a suburb on the river, so that
+their crossfire also swept it.
+
+The pikemen were drawn up close to the artillery at the head of the
+bridge. Quietly as these movements were performed the garrison took the
+alarm, and towards morning the duke, finding his retreat intercepted,
+sallied out at the head of eight hundred musketeers to cut his way
+through; but as the column advanced upon the bridge the Green Brigade
+opened fire, the leaden hail of their musketeers smote the column on
+both sides, while the cannon ploughed lanes through it from end to end.
+So great was the destruction that the Bavarians retreated in confusion
+back into the town again, leaving the bridge strewn with their dead.
+
+Alone the gallant Duke of Saxe-Lauenburg charged through the hail of
+fire across the bridge, fell upon the pikemen sword in hand, and cutting
+his way through them rode away, leaving his garrison to their fate.
+The roar of artillery informed Gustavus what was going on, and he
+immediately opened fire against the other side of the town and led his
+men to the assault of the gate.
+
+The instant the Scotch had recovered from their surprise at the
+desperate feat performed by the duke, Hepburn, calling them together,
+placed himself at their head and led them across the bridge. The panic
+stricken fugitives had omitted to close the gate, and the Scotch at once
+entered the town. Here the garrison resisted desperately; their pikemen
+barred the streets, and from every window and roof their musketeers
+poured their fire upon the advancing column.
+
+The day was breaking now, and the roar of battle in the city mingled
+with that at the gates, where the Swedes were in vain striving to effect
+an entrance. Gradually the Scotch won their way forward; 500 of the
+Bavarians were killed, in addition to 400 who had fallen on the bridge.
+The rest now attempted to fly. Great numbers were drowned in the Danube,
+and the remainder were taken prisoners. The streets were encumbered by
+the heavily laden baggage wagons, and a vast amount of booty fell into
+the hands of the Scotch, who thus became masters of the town before
+Gustavus and his Swedes had succeeded in carrying the gate.
+
+The king now entered the town, and as soon as order was restored
+Hepburn's brigade recrossed the Danube and threw up a strong work on
+the other side of the bridge; for Tilly was on the Lech, but seven miles
+distant, and might at any moment return. He had just struck a severe
+blow at Marshal Horn, who had recently taken Bamberg. His force, 9000
+strong, had been scattered to put down a rising of the country people,
+when Tilly with 16,000 fell upon them.
+
+A column under Bauditzen was attacked and defeated, and Tilly's horsemen
+pursued them hotly to the bridge leading to the town. Marshal Horn threw
+a barricade across this and defended it until nightfall. Tilly had then
+fallen back before the advance of Gustavus to a very strong position
+on the Lech. This was an extremely rapid river, difficult to cross and
+easily defensible. Tilly had broken down the bridges, and was prepared
+to dispute till the last the further advance of the Swedes. He placed
+his army between Rain, where the Lech falls into the Danube, and
+Augsburg, a distance of sixteen miles--all the assailable points being
+strongly occupied, with small bodies of cavalry in the intervals to give
+warning of the approach of the enemy. He had been joined by Maximilian
+of Bavaria, and his force amounted to 40,000 men.
+
+Gustavus gave his army four days' rest at Donauworth, and then advanced
+with 32,000 men against the Lech. His dragoons, who had been pushed
+forward, had found the bridges destroyed. He first attempted to repair
+that at Rain, but the fire of the artillery and musketry was so
+heavy that he was forced to abandon the idea. He then made a careful
+reconnaissance of the river, whose course was winding and erratic.
+
+Finding that at every point at which a crossing could be easily effected
+Tilly's batteries and troops commanded the position, he determined to
+make his attack at a point where the river made a sharp bend in the form
+of a semicircle, of which he occupied the outer edge. He encamped the
+bulk of his army at the village of Nordheim, a short distance in the
+rear, and erected three powerful batteries mounting seventy-two guns.
+One of these faced the centre of the loop, the others were placed
+opposite the sides.
+
+The ground on the Swedish bank of the river was higher than that facing
+it; and when the Swedish batteries opened they so completely swept the
+ground inclosed by the curve of the river that the Imperialists could
+not advance across it, and were compelled to remain behind a rivulet
+called the Ach, a short distance in the rear of the Lech. They brought
+up their artillery, however, and replied to the cannonade of the Swedes.
+
+For four days the artillery duel continued, and while it was going on a
+considerable number of troops were at work in the village of Oberndorf,
+which lay in a declivity near the river, hidden from the sight of the
+Imperialists, constructing a bridge. For that purpose a number of strong
+wooden trestles of various heights and with feet of unequal length for
+standing in the bed of the river were prepared, together with a quantity
+of piles to be driven in among and beside them to enable them to resist
+the force of the current.
+
+On the night of the fourth day the king caused a number of fires to be
+lighted near the river, fed with green wood and damp straw. A favourable
+wind blew the smoke towards the enemy, and thus concealed the ground
+from them. At daybreak on the 5th of April, a thousand picked men
+crossed the river in two boats, and having reached the other side
+at once proceeded to throw up intrenchments to cover the head of the
+bridge, while at the same time the workmen began to place the trestles
+in position.
+
+As soon as day broke Tilly became aware of what was being done, and
+two batteries opened fire upon the work at the head of the bridge and
+against the bridge itself; but the low and swampy nature of the ground
+on the Imperialist side of the river prevented his placing the batteries
+in a position from which they could command the works, and their fire
+proved ineffective in preventing the construction of the bridge. Seeing
+this, Tilly at once commenced preparations for arresting the further
+advance of the Swedes.
+
+To reach his position they would be obliged to cross the swampy ground
+exposed to the fire of his troops, and to render their progress still
+more difficult he proceeded to cut down large trees, lopping and
+sharpening their branches to form a chevaux-de-frise before his troops.
+All the morning a heavy cannonade was kept up on both sides, but by noon
+the bridge was completed and the advance guard of the Swedes, led by
+Colonels Wrandel and Gassion, advanced across it. As the other brigades
+were following, Tilly directed General Altringer to lead his cavalry
+against them.
+
+Altringer led his troops round the end of the marsh and charged with
+great bravery down upon the Swedes. These, however, had time to form up,
+and a tremendous fire of musketry was poured into the Imperialist horse,
+while the round shot from the three Swedish batteries ploughed their
+ranks in front and on both flanks. Under such circumstances, although
+fighting with reckless bravery, the Imperialist cavalry were repulsed.
+Altringer, however, rallied them and led them back again to the charge,
+but a cannonball grazed his temple and he was carried senseless from
+the field. His men, shaken by the tremendous fire and deprived of their
+leader, fell back in confusion.
+
+Tilly at once placed himself at the head of a chosen body of troops
+and advanced to the attack, fighting with the ardour and bravery which
+always distinguished him. He was short in stature and remarkable for his
+ugliness as well as his bravery. Lean and spare in figure, he had hollow
+cheeks, a long nose, a broad wrinkled forehead, heavy moustaches, and
+a sharp pointed chin. He had from his boyhood been fighting against the
+Protestants. He had learned the art of war under the cruel and pitiless
+Spanish general Alva in the Netherlands, of which country he was a
+native, and had afterwards fought against them in Bavaria, in Bohemia,
+and the Palatinate, and had served in Hungary against the Turks.
+
+Until he met Gustavus at Breitenfeld he had never known a reverse. A
+bigoted Catholic, he had never hesitated at any act of cruelty which
+might benefit the cause for which he fought, or strike terror into the
+Protestants; and the singularity of his costume and the ugliness of his
+appearance heightened the terror which his deeds inspired among them.
+When not in armour his costume was modelled upon that of the Duke of
+Alva, consisting of a slashed doublet of green silk, with an enormously
+wide-brimmed and high conical hat adorned with a large red ostrich
+feather. In his girdle he carried a long dagger and a Toledo sword of
+immense length. His personal bravery was famous, and never did he
+fight more gallantly than when he led his veterans to the attack of the
+Swedes.
+
+For twenty minutes a furious hand to hand conflict raged, and the result
+was still uncertain when a shot from a falconet struck Tilly on the
+knee and shattered the bone, and the old general fell insensible to
+the ground. He was carried off the field, and his troops, now without a
+leader, gave way, the movement being hastened by two bodies of Swedish
+horse, who, eager for action, swam their horses across the river and
+threatened to cut off the retreat. By this time evening was at hand. The
+Swedes had secured the passage of the river, but the Imperialist army
+still held its intrenched position in the wood behind the Lech. Gustavus
+brought the rest of his army across and halted for the night.
+
+The Imperialist position was tremendously strong, being unassailable on
+the right and covered in the front by the marshy ground. It could
+still have been defended with every prospect of success by a determined
+general, but the two best Imperialist commanders were hors de combat,
+and Maximilian of Bavaria, the nominal generalissimo, had no military
+experience. The army, too, was disheartened by the first success of the
+Swedes and by the loss of the general whom they regarded as well nigh
+invincible.
+
+Tilly had now recovered his senses, but was suffering intense agony from
+his wound, and on being consulted by Maximilian he advised him to fall
+back, as the destruction of his army would leave the whole country open
+to the Swedes.
+
+The Imperialists accordingly evacuated their position and fell back in
+good order during the night on Neuberg, and then to Ingolstadt. Rain and
+Neuberg were occupied the next day by the Swedes. Gustavus despatched
+Marshal Horn to follow the retreating enemy to Ingolstadt, and he
+himself with the rest of his army marched up the Lech to Augsburg, which
+was held by Colonel Breda with four thousand five hundred men.
+
+The Imperialists had broken down the bridge, but Gustavus immediately
+built two others, one above and the other below the city, and summoned
+it to surrender. Breda, hearing that Tilly was dying, Altringer severely
+wounded, and that no help was to be expected from Maximilian, considered
+it hopeless to resist, and surrendered the town, which Gustavus,
+attended by the titular King of Bohemia and many other princes, entered
+in triumph on the following day, April 14th. The capture of Augsburg
+was hailed with peculiar satisfaction, as the city was regarded as the
+birthplace of the Reformation in Germany. Leaving a garrison there the
+king retraced his steps along the Lech to Neuberg, and marched thence to
+join Marshal Horn in front of Ingolstadt.
+
+This town was one of the strongest places in Germany and had never been
+captured. It was now held by a formidable garrison, and the Imperialist
+army covered it on the north. Tilly had implored Maximilian to defend
+it and Ratisbon at all hazards, as their possession was a bar to the
+further advance of Gustavus.
+
+The king arrived before it on the 19th, and on the following day
+advanced to reconnoitre it closely. The gunners of the town, seeing a
+number of officers approaching, fired, and with so good an aim that
+a cannonball carried off the hindquarters of the horse the king was
+riding. A cry of alarm and consternation burst from the officers, but
+their delight was great when the king rose to his feet, covered with
+dust and blood indeed, but otherwise unhurt.
+
+On the following day a cannonball carried off the head of the Margrave
+of Baden-Durlach, and on the same day Tilly expired. With his last
+breath he urged Maximilian never to break his alliance with the emperor,
+and to appoint Colonel Cratz, an officer of great courage and ability,
+to the command of his army.
+
+Gustavus remained eight days before Ingolstadt, and then, finding that
+the reduction of the place could not be effected without the loss of
+much valuable time, he raised the siege. On his march he took possession
+of Landshut and forced it to pay a ransom of 100,000 thalers and to
+receive a garrison, and then continued his way to Munich.
+
+The Bavarian capital surrendered without a blow on the 17th of May.
+Gustavus made a triumphal entry into the town, where he obtained
+possession of a vast quantity of treasure and stores. Here he remained
+some little time reducing the country round and capturing many cities
+and fortresses. The Green Brigade had suffered severely at Ingolstadt.
+On the evening of the 19th of April the king, expecting a sally, had
+ordered Hepburn to post the brigade on some high ground near the gate
+and the soldiers remained under arms the whole night.
+
+The glow of their matches enabled the enemy to fire with precision, and
+a heavy cannonade was poured upon them throughout the whole night. Three
+hundred men were killed as they stood, Munro losing twelve men by one
+shot; but the brigade stood their ground unflinchingly, and remained
+until morning in steady line in readiness to repel any sortie of the
+enemy.
+
+The army suffered greatly on the march from the Lech to Ingolstadt,
+and thence to Munich, from the attacks of the country people, who were
+excited against them by the priests. Every straggler who fell into their
+hands was murdered with horrible cruelty, the hands and feet being cut
+off, and other savage mutilations being performed upon them, in revenge
+for which the Swedes and Scots shot all the Bavarians who fell into
+their hands, and burned two hundred towns and villages.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII CAPTURED BY THE PEASANTS
+
+
+Malcolm Graheme was not present at the siege of Ingolstadt. The orders
+after crossing the Lech had been very strict against straggling, so soon
+as the disposition of the country people was seen; but it is not easy
+to keep a large column of troops in a solid body. The regiments in the
+march indeed, under the eye of the officers, can be kept in column, but
+a considerable number of troops are scattered along the great convoy
+of wagons containing the tents, stores, and ammunition of the army, and
+which often extends some miles in length. Even if the desire for plunder
+does not draw men away, many are forced to fall behind either from
+sickness, sore feet, or other causes.
+
+The number of these was comparatively small in the army of Gustavus,
+for discipline was strict and the spirit of the troops good. As soon,
+however, as it was found that every straggler who fell into the hands of
+the peasantry was murdered under circumstances of horrible atrocity
+it became very difficult for the officers to keep the men together,
+so intense was their fury and desire for vengeance against the savage
+peasantry, and on every possible occasion when a village was seen near
+the line of march men would slip away and slay, plunder, and burn.
+
+Gustavus endeavoured to repress these proceedings. He shared the
+indignation of his troops at the barbarous conduct of the peasantry,
+but throughout the war he always tried to carry on hostilities so as
+to inflict as little loss and suffering as possible upon noncombatants.
+This state of warfare too between his troops and the country people
+added to his difficulties, for the peasantry drove off their cattle and
+burned their stacks, and rendered it necessary for provisions and forage
+to be carried with the army. Parties were therefore sent out on the
+flanks of the column for the double purpose of preventing soldiers
+stealing off to plunder and burn, and of picking up stragglers and
+saving them from the fury of the peasants.
+
+A strong rear guard followed a short distance behind the army. It was
+accompanied by some empty wagons, in which those who fell out and were
+unable to keep up with the march were placed. Two days after the advance
+from the Lech, Malcolm was in charge of a small party on the right flank
+of the column. There was no fear of an attack from the enemy, for the
+Swedish horsemen were out scouring the country, and the Imperialists
+were known to have fallen back to Ingolstadt. The villages were found
+deserted by the male inhabitants, the younger women too had all left,
+but a few old crones generally remained in charge. These scowled at the
+invaders, and crossing themselves muttered curses beneath their breath
+upon those whom their priests had taught them to regard as devils. There
+was nothing to tempt the cupidity of the soldiers in these villages.
+Malcolm's duty was confined to a casual inspection, to see that no
+stragglers had entered for the purpose of procuring wine.
+
+The day's march was nearly over when he saw some flames rise from a
+village a short distance away. Hurrying forward with his men he found
+a party of ten of the Swedish soldiers who had stolen away from the
+baggage guard engaged in plundering. Two peasants lay dead in the
+street, and a house was in flames.
+
+Malcolm at once ordered his detachment, who were twenty strong, to
+arrest the Swedes and to march them back to the columns. While they were
+doing this he went from house to house to see that none of the party
+were lurking there. At the door of the last house of the village three
+women were standing.
+
+“Are any of the soldiers here?” he asked.
+
+The women gave him an unintelligible answer in the country patois, and
+passing between them he entered the cottage. On the table stood a large
+jug of water, and lifting it he took a long draught. There was a sudden
+crash, and he fell heavily, struck down from behind with a heavy mallet
+by one of the women. He was stunned by the blow, and when he recovered
+his senses he found that he was bound hand and foot, a cloth had been
+stuffed tightly into his mouth, and he was covered thickly with a heap
+of straw and rubbish. He struggled desperately to free himself, but so
+tightly were the cords bound that they did not give in the slightest.
+
+A cold perspiration broke out on his forehead as he reflected that he
+was helpless in the power of these savage peasants, and that he should
+probably be put to death by torture. Presently he could hear the shouts
+of his men, who, on finding that he did not return, had scattered
+through the village in search of him. He heard the voice of his
+sergeant.
+
+“These old hags say they saw an officer walk across to the left. The
+captain may have meant us to march the prisoners at once to the column,
+and be waiting just outside the village for us, but it is not likely. At
+any rate, lads, we will search every house from top to bottom before we
+leave. So set to work at once; search every room, cupboard, and shed.
+There may be foul play; though we see no men about, some may be in
+hiding.”
+
+Malcolm heard the sound of footsteps, and the crashing of planks as
+the men searched the cottages, wrenched off the doors of cupboards, and
+ransacked the whole place. Gradually the sound ceased, and everything
+became quiet. Presently he heard the sound of drums, and knew that the
+regiment which formed the rear guard was passing.
+
+It was bitterness indeed to know that his friends were within sound of a
+call for aid, and that he was bound and helpless. The halting place for
+the night was, he knew, but a mile or two in advance, and his only hope
+was that some band of plunderers might in the night visit the village;
+but even then his chances of being discovered were small indeed, for
+even should they sack and burn it he would pass unnoticed lying hidden
+in the straw yard. His captors were no doubt aware of the possibility of
+such a visit, for it was not until broad daylight, when the army would
+again be on its forward march, that they uncovered him.
+
+Brave as Malcolm was he could scarce repress a shudder as he looked at
+the band of women who surrounded him. All were past middle age, some
+were old and toothless, but all were animated by a spirit of ferocious
+triumph. Raising him into a sitting position, they clustered round him,
+some shook their skinny hands in his face, others heaped curses upon
+him, some of the most furious assailed him with heavy sticks, and had he
+not still been clothed in his armour, would then and there have killed
+him.
+
+This, however, was not their intention, for they intended to put him to
+death by slow torture. He was lifted and carried into the cottage.
+There the lacings of his armour were cut, the cords loosened one by one,
+sufficient to enable them to remove the various pieces of which it was
+composed, then he was left to himself, as the hags intended to postpone
+the final tragedy until the men returned from the hills.
+
+This might be some hours yet, as the Swedish cavalry would still be
+scouring the country, and other bodies of troops might be marching up.
+From the conversation of the women, which he understood but imperfectly,
+Malcolm gathered that they thought the men would return that night. Some
+of the women were in favour of executing the vengeance themselves, but
+the majority were of opinion that the men should have their share of the
+pleasure.
+
+All sorts of fiendish propositions were made as to the manner in which
+his execution should be carried out, but even the mildest caused Malcolm
+to shudder in anticipation. His arms were bound tightly to his side at
+the elbows, and the wrists were fastened in front of him, his legs were
+tied at the knees and ankles. Sometimes he was left alone as the women
+went about their various avocations in the village, but he was so
+securely bound that to him as to them his escape appeared altogether
+impossible. The day passed heavily and slowly. The cloth had been
+removed from his mouth, but he was parched with thirst, while the
+tightly bound cords cut deeply into his flesh.
+
+He had once asked for water, but his request had been answered with such
+jeers and mockery that he resolved to suffer silently until the last. At
+length the darkness of the winter evening began to fall when a thought
+suddenly struck him. On the hearth a fire was burning; he waited until
+the women had again left the hut. He could hear their voices without
+as they talked with those in the next cottage. They might at any moment
+return, and it was improbable that they would again go out, for the cold
+was bitter, and they would most likely wait indoors for the return of
+the men.
+
+This then was his last opportunity. He rolled himself to the fire, and
+with his teeth seized the end of one of the burning sticks. He raised
+himself into a sitting position, and with the greatest difficulty laid
+the burning end of the stick across the cords which bound his wrists. It
+seemed to him that they would never catch fire. The flesh scorched and
+frizzled, and the smoke rose up with that of the burning rope. The agony
+was intense, but it was for life, and Malcolm unflinchingly held the
+burning brand in its place until the cords flew asunder and his hands
+were free. Although almost mad with the pain, Malcolm set to work
+instantly to undo the other ropes. As soon as one of his arms was free
+he seized a hatchet, which lay near him, and rapidly cut the rest. He
+was not a moment too soon, for as he cut the last knot he heard the
+sound of steps, and two women appeared at the door.
+
+On seeing their prisoner standing erect with an axe in his hand they
+turned and fled shrieking loudly. It was well for Malcolm that they did
+so, for so stiff and numbed were his limbs that he could scarcely hold
+the axe, and the slightest push would have thrown him to the ground.
+
+Some minutes passed before, by stamping his feet and rubbing his legs
+he restored circulation sufficiently to totter across the room. Then he
+seized a brand and thrust it into the thatch of the house, having first
+put on his helmet and placed his sword and pistols in his belt. His
+hands were too crippled and powerless to enable him to fasten on the
+rest of his armour. He knew that he had no time to lose. Fortunately the
+women would not know how weak and helpless he was, for had they returned
+in a body they could easily have overpowered him; but at any moment the
+men might arrive, and if he was found there by them his fate was sealed.
+
+Accordingly as soon as he had fired the hut he made his way from the
+village as quickly as he could crawl along. He saw behind him the flames
+rising higher and higher. The wind was blowing keenly, and the fire
+spread rapidly from house to house, and by the time he reached the road
+along which the army had travelled the whole village was in flames. He
+felt that he could not travel far, for the intense sufferings which he
+had endured for twenty-four hours without food or water had exhausted
+his strength.
+
+His limbs were swollen and bruised from the tightness of the cords, the
+agony of his burned wrists was terrible, and after proceeding slowly for
+about a mile he drew off from the broad trampled track which the army
+had made in passing, and dragging himself to a clump of trees a short
+distance from the road, made his way through some thick undergrowth and
+flung himself down. The night was intensely cold, but this was a relief
+to him rather than otherwise, for it alleviated the burning pain of his
+limbs while he kept handfuls of snow applied to his wrists.
+
+Two hours after he had taken refuge he heard a number of men come along
+the road at a run. Looking through the bushes he could see by their
+figures against the snow that they were peasants, and had no doubt that
+they were the men of the village who had returned and at once started in
+pursuit of him.
+
+An hour later, feeling somewhat relieved, he left his hiding place and
+moved a mile away from the road, as he feared that the peasants, failing
+to overtake him, might, as they returned, search every possible hiding
+place near it. He had no fear of the track being noticed, for the
+surface of the snow was everywhere marked by parties going and returning
+to the main body. He kept on until he saw a small shed. The door was
+unfastened; opening it he found that the place was empty, though there
+were signs that it was usually used as a shelter for cattle.
+
+A rough ladder led to a loft. This was nearly full of hay. Malcolm threw
+himself down on this, and covering himself up thickly, felt the blood
+again begin to circulate in his limbs. It brought, however, such
+a renewal of his pain, that it was not until morning that fatigue
+overpowered his sufferings and he fell asleep.
+
+It was late in the afternoon when he woke at the sound of shouts and
+holloaing. Springing to his feet he looked out between the cracks in the
+boards and saw a party of forty or fifty peasants passing close by the
+shed. They were armed with hatchets, scythes, and pikes. On the heads of
+four of the pikes were stuck gory heads, and in the centre of the party
+were three prisoners, two Swedes and a Scot. These were covered with
+blood, and were scarcely able to walk, but were being urged forward with
+blows and pike thrusts amid the brutal laughter of their captors.
+
+Malcolm retired to his bed full of rage and sorrow. It would have been
+madness to have followed his first impulse to sally out sword in hand
+and fall upon the ruffians, as such a step would only have ensured his
+own death without assisting the captives.
+
+“Hitherto,” he said to himself, “I have ever restrained my men, and have
+endeavoured to protect the peasants from violence; henceforward, so long
+as we remain in Bavaria, no word of mine shall be uttered to save one
+of these murderous peasants. However, I am not with my company yet.
+The army is two marches ahead, and must by this time be in front of
+Ingolstadt. I have been two days without food, and see but little chance
+of getting any until I rejoin them, and the whole country between us is
+swarming with an infuriated peasantry. The prospect is certainly not
+a bright one. I would give a year's pay to hear the sound of a Swedish
+trumpet.”
+
+When darkness had fairly set in Malcolm started on his way again.
+Although his limbs still smarted from the weals and sores left by the
+cords they had now recovered their lissomeness; but he was weak from
+want of food, and no longer walked with the free elastic stride which
+distinguished the Scottish infantry. His wrists gave him great pain,
+being both terribly burned, and every movement of the hand sent a thrill
+of agony up the arm. He persisted, however, in frequently opening and
+clenching his hands, regardless of the pain, for he feared that did he
+not do so they would stiffen and he would be unable to grasp a sword.
+Fortunately the wounds were principally on the upper side of the thumbs,
+where the flesh was burned away to the bone, but the sinews and muscles
+of the wrists had to a great extent escaped.
+
+He had not journeyed very far when he saw a light ahead and presently
+perceived the houses of a village. A fire was lit in the centre, and a
+number of figures were gathered round it.
+
+“Something is going on,” Malcolm said to himself; “as likely as not they
+have got some unfortunate prisoner. Whatever it be, I will steal in and
+try to get some food. I cannot go much further without it; and as their
+attention is occupied, I may find a cottage empty.”
+
+Making his way round to the back of the houses, he approached one of the
+cottages in the rear. He lifted the latch of the door and opened it a
+little. All was still. With his drawn sword he entered. The room was
+empty; a fire burned on the hearth, and on the table were some loaves
+which had evidently been just baked. Malcolm fell upon one of them and
+speedily devoured it, and, taking a long draught of rough country wine
+from a skin hanging against the wall, he felt another man.
+
+He broke another loaf in two and thrust the pieces into his doublet, and
+then sallied out from the cottage again. Still keeping behind the houses
+he made his way until he got within view of the fire. Here he saw a
+sight which thrilled him with horror. Some eight or ten peasants and
+forty or fifty women were yelling and shouting. Fastened against a
+post in front of the fire were the remains of a prisoner. He had been
+stripped, his ears, nose, hands, and feet cut off, and he was slowly
+bleeding to death.
+
+Four other men, bound hand and foot, lay close to the fire. By its
+flames Malcolm saw the green scarves that told they were Scotchmen of
+his own brigade, and he determined at once to rescue them or die in the
+attempt. He crept forward until he reached the edge of the road; then he
+raised a pistol and with a steady aim fired at one of the natives, who
+fell dead across the fire.
+
+Another shot laid another beside him before the peasants recovered from
+their first surprise. Then with a loud shout in German, “Kill--kill! and
+spare none!” Malcolm dashed forward. The peasants, believing that they
+were attacked by a strong body, fled precipitately in all directions.
+Malcolm, on reaching the prisoners, instantly severed their bonds.
+
+“Quick, my lads!” he exclaimed; “we shall have them upon us again in a
+minute.”
+
+The men in vain tried to struggle to their feet--their limbs were too
+numbed to bear them.
+
+“Crawl to the nearest cottage!” Malcolm exclaimed; “we can hold it until
+your limbs are recovered.”
+
+He caught up from the ground some pikes and scythes which the peasants
+had dropped in their flight, and aided the men to make their way to the
+nearest cottage. They were but just in time; for the peasants, finding
+they were not pursued, had looked round, and seeing but one opponent had
+gained courage and were beginning to approach again. Malcolm barred the
+door, and then taking down a skin of wine bade his companions take a
+drink. There were loaves on the shelves, and these he cut up and handed
+to them.
+
+“Quick, lads!” he said; “stamp your legs and swing your arms, and get
+the blood in motion. I will keep these fellows at bay a few minutes
+longer.”
+
+He reloaded his pistols and fired through the door, at which the
+peasants were now hewing with axes. A cry and a heavy fall told him that
+one of the shots had taken effect. Suddenly there was a smell of smoke.
+
+“They have fired the roof,” Malcolm said. “Now, lads, each of you put a
+loaf of bread under his jerkin. There is no saying when we may get more.
+Now get ready and sally out with me. There are but six or eight men in
+the village, and they are no match for us. They only dared to attack us
+because they saw that you couldn't walk.”
+
+The door was opened, and headed by Malcolm the four Scotchmen dashed
+out. They were assailed by a shower of missiles by the crowd as they
+appeared, but as soon as it was seen that the men were on foot again the
+peasants gave way. Malcolm shot one and cut down another, and the rest
+scattered in all directions.
+
+“Now, lads, follow me while we may,” and Malcolm again took to the
+fields. The peasants followed for some distance, but when the soldiers
+had quite recovered the use of their limbs Malcolm suddenly turned on
+his pursuers, overtaking and killing two of them. Then he and his men
+again continued their journey, the peasants no longer following. When at
+some distance from the village he said:
+
+“We must turn and make for the Lech again. It is no farther than it is
+to Ingolstadt, and we shall find friends there. These peasants will go
+on ahead and raise all the villagers against us, and we should never get
+through. What regiment do you belong to, lads?” for in the darkness he
+had been unable to see their faces.
+
+“Your own, Captain Graheme. We were in charge of one of the wagons with
+sick. The wheel came off, and we were left behind the convoy while we
+were mending it. As we were at work, our weapons laid on the ground,
+some twenty men sprang out from some bushes hard by and fell upon us. We
+killed five or six of them, but were beaten down and ten of our number
+were slain. They murdered all the sick in the wagons and marched us
+away, bound, to this village where you found us. Sandy McAlister they
+had murdered just as you came up, and we should have had a like horrible
+fate had you been a few minutes later. Eh, sir! but it's an awful death
+to be cut in pieces by these devils incarnate!”
+
+“Well, lads,” Malcolm said, “we will determine that they shall not take
+us alive again. If we are overtaken or met by any of these gangs of
+peasants we will fight till we die. None of us, I hope, are afraid of
+death in fair strife, but the bravest might well shrink from such a
+death as that of your poor comrade. Now let us see what arms we have
+between us.”
+
+Malcolm had his sword and pistols, two of the men had pikes, the other
+two scythes fastened to long handles.
+
+“These are clumsy weapons,” Malcolm said. “You had best fit short
+handles to them, so as to make them into double handed swords.”
+
+They were unable to travel far, for all were exhausted with the
+sufferings they had gone through, but they kept on until they came upon
+a village which had been fired when the troops marched through. The
+walls of a little church were alone standing. It had, like the rest of
+the village, been burned, but the shell still remained.
+
+“So far as I can see,” Malcolm said, “the tower has escaped. Had it been
+burned we should see through the windows. We may find shelter in the
+belfry.”
+
+On reaching the church they found that the entrance to the belfry tower
+was outside the church, and to this, no doubt, it owed its escape from
+the fire which had destroyed the main edifice. The door was strong and
+defied their efforts to break it in.
+
+“I must fire my pistol through the lock,” Malcolm said. “I do not
+like doing so, for the sound may reach the ears of any peasants in the
+neighbourhood; but we must risk it, for the cold is extreme, and to lie
+down in the snow would be well nigh certain death.”
+
+He placed his pistol to the keyhole and fired. The lock at once yielded
+and the party entered the door.
+
+“Before we mount,” Malcolm said, “let each pick up one of these blocks
+of stone which have fallen from the wall. We will wedge the door from
+behind, and can then sleep secure against a surprise.”
+
+When the door was closed one of the men, who was a musketeer, struck
+some sparks from a flint and steel on to a slow match which he carried
+in his jerkin, and by its glow they were enabled to look around them.
+The stone steps began to ascend close to the door, and by laying the
+stones between the bottom step and the door they wedged the latter
+firmly in its place. They then ascended the stairs, and found themselves
+in a room some ten feet square, in which hung the bell which had called
+the village to prayers. It hung from some beams which were covered with
+a boarded floor, and a rough ladder led to a trapdoor, showing that
+there was another room above. The floor of the room in which they stood
+was of stone.
+
+“Now, lads,” Malcolm said, “two of you make your way up that ladder and
+rip up some of the planks of the flooring. See if there are any windows
+or loopholes in the chamber above, and if so stuff your jerkins into
+them; we will close up those here. In a few minutes we will have a
+roaring fire; but we must beware lest a gleam of light be visible
+without, for this belfry can be seen for miles round.”
+
+Some of the boards were soon split up into fragments; but before the
+light was applied to them Malcolm carefully examined each window and
+loophole to be sure that they were perfectly stopped. Then the slow
+match was placed in the centre of a number of pieces of dry and rotten
+wood. One of the men kneeling down blew lustily, and in a few seconds a
+flame sprang up. The wood was now heaped on, and a bright fire was soon
+blazing high.
+
+A trapdoor leading out on to the flat top of the tower was opened for
+the escape of the smoke, and the party then seated themselves round the
+fire, under whose genial warmth their spirits speedily rose. They now
+took from their wallets the bread which they had brought away with them.
+
+“If we had,” one of the soldiers said, “but a few flasks of Rhine wine
+with us we need not envy a king.”
+
+“No,” Malcolm replied, “we are better off at present than our comrades
+who are sleeping in the snow round the watchfires; but for all that I
+would that we were with them, for we have a long and dangerous march
+before us. And now, lads, you can sleep soundly. There will be no
+occasion to place a watch, for the door is securely fastened; but at the
+first dawn of light we must be on our feet; for although I do not mean
+to march until nightfall, we must remove the stoppings from the windows,
+for should the eye of any passing peasant fall upon them, he will guess
+at once that some one is sheltering here, and may proceed to find out
+whether it be friend or foe.”
+
+Having finished half their bread, for Malcolm had warned them to save
+the other half for the next day, the men lay down round the fire, and
+soon all were sound asleep.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV IN THE CHURCHTOWER
+
+
+Malcolm was the first to awake, and was vexed to find by a stream of
+light pouring down through the half open trapdoor above that it was
+broad day. He roused the men, and the stoppings were at once removed
+from the loopholes. The sun was already high, for the party, overpowered
+with fatigue, had slept long and soundly.
+
+Malcolm looked cautiously from the window; no one was in sight, and the
+ruins of the village below lay black and deserted. The men resumed the
+clothes which had been used for blocking the loopholes, and sat down
+to pass the long hours which would elapse before the time for action
+arrived. It was exceedingly cold, for there were loopholes on each side
+of the chamber, and the wind blew keenly through.
+
+“Sergeant,” Malcolm said, “we will risk a bit of fire again, for the
+cold pierces to the bone; only be sure that you use perfectly dry wood.
+Examine each piece to see that no drip from the roof has penetrated it.
+If it is dry it will give but little smoke, and a slight vapour is not
+likely to be observed rising from the top of the tower.”
+
+The fire was again lighted, and the smoke was so slight that Malcolm had
+little fear of its being observed.
+
+An hour later, as the men were talking, Malcolm suddenly held up his
+hand for silence, and the murmur of voices was heard without. Malcolm
+rose to his feet to reconnoitre, standing far back from the loophole as
+he did so. A group of some eight or ten peasants were standing looking
+at the tower, while a woman was pointing to it and talking eagerly.
+
+It was towards the windows that she was pointing, and Malcolm guessed at
+once that, having returned in the early morning to see what remained
+of her home, she had happened to notice the garments stuffed in the
+windows, and had carried the news to some of her companions. Malcolm
+regretted bitterly now that he had not set a watch, so that at the first
+gleam of daylight the windows might have been unblocked; but it was now
+too late.
+
+“We shall have to fight for it, lads,” he said, turning round. “Our
+clothes must have been seen early this morning, and there is a party
+of peasants watching the tower. Of course they cannot know at present
+whether we are friends or foes; but no doubt the news of last evening's
+doings has travelled through the country, and the peasants are on the
+lookout for us, so they may well guess that we are here. However, we
+shall soon see. Sergeant, place one of your men on sentry at the foot of
+the stairs, but do not let him speak or give any signs of his presence
+if the door is tried.”
+
+One of the soldiers was placed on guard. Scarcely had he taken his
+station when there was a knocking at the door, and shouts were heard
+outside from the peasants calling on those within, if they were friends,
+to come out. No answer was returned.
+
+“It's fortunate for you,” Malcolm muttered, “that we don't come out, or
+we should make short work of you; but I know you would fly like hares
+if you saw us, and would bring the whole country down on us. No; we
+must hold out here. Our only hope is to escape at night, or to hold this
+place till some of our troops come along. At any moment some regiments
+from the Lech may be marching forward to join the king.
+
+“We must make our bread last, lads,” he said cheerfully to the men,
+“for we may have to stand a long siege. Methinks we can hold this stone
+staircase against all the peasants of this part of Bavaria; and we must
+do so until we hear the sound of the Swedish drums; they may come along
+at any time. If the worst comes to the worst one of us must start at
+night and carry news of our peril to the Lech. We made a good supper
+last night, and can fast for a bit. If we cut our bread up into small
+portions we can hold out for days. There should be snow enough on the
+tower top to furnish us with drink.”
+
+After hammering at the door for some time, the peasants retired
+convinced that there were none of their own people within the tower, and
+that those who had slept there were the fugitives of whom they had been
+in search during the night. These might, indeed, have departed in the
+interval between the time when the woman first saw the traces of their
+presence and her return with them; but they did not think that this was
+so, for in that case they could not have fastened the door behind them.
+The peasants accordingly withdrew a short distance from the church, and
+three of their number were sent off in different directions to bring
+up reinforcements. As soon as Malcolm saw this movement he knew that
+concealment was useless, and began to make preparations for the defence.
+First, he with the sergeant ascended to the roof of the tower. To his
+disappointment he saw that the heat of the flames had melted the snow,
+and that most of the water had run away. Some, however, stood in the
+hollows and inequalities of the stone platform, where it had again
+frozen into ice.
+
+As the supply would be very precious, Malcolm directed that before any
+moved about on the platform every piece of ice should be carefully taken
+up and carried below. Here it was melted over the fire in one of
+the iron caps, and was found to furnish three quarts of water. The
+appearance of Malcolm and his companion on the tower had been hailed by
+a shout of hatred and exultation by the peasants; but the defenders had
+paid no attention to the demonstration, and had continued their work as
+if regardless of the presence of their enemies.
+
+On his return to the platform Malcolm found, looking over the low
+parapet, that on the side farthest from the church great icicles hung
+down from the mouth of the gutter, the water having frozen again as it
+trickled from the platform. These icicles were three or four inches in
+diameter and many feet in length. They were carefully broken off, and
+were laid down on the platform where they would remain frozen until
+wanted. Malcolm now felt secure against the attacks of thirst for
+some days to come. The stones of the parapet were next tried, and were
+without much trouble moved from their places, and were all carried to
+the side in which the door was situated, in readiness to hurl down upon
+any who might assault it. Some of the beams of the upper flooring were
+removed from their places, and being carried down, were wedged against
+the upper part of the door, securing it as firmly as did the stones
+below. These preparations being finished, Malcolm took a survey of the
+situation outside.
+
+The group of peasants had increased largely, some thirty or forty men
+armed with pikes, bills, and scythes being gathered in a body, while
+many more could be seen across the country hurrying over the white plain
+towards the spot. The windows of the lower apartment had been barricaded
+with planks, partly to keep out missiles, partly for warmth. A good fire
+now blazed in the centre, and the soldiers, confident in themselves and
+their leader, cracked grim jokes as, their work being finished, they sat
+down around it and awaited the attack, one of their number being placed
+on the summit of the tower to give warning of the approach of the enemy.
+
+“I would that we had a musket or two,” Malcolm said; “for we might then
+keep them from the door. I have only some twenty charges for my pistols,
+and the most of these, at any rate, I must keep for the defence of the
+stairs.”
+
+Presently the sentry from above called out that the peasants were moving
+forward to the attack.
+
+“Sergeant,” Malcolm said, “do you fasten my green scarf to a long strip
+of plank and fix it to the top of the tower. We cannot fight under
+a better banner. Now let us mount to the roof and give them a warm
+reception.”
+
+“Look out, sir,” the sentry exclaimed as Malcolm ascended the stair,
+“three or four of them have got muskets.”
+
+“Then we must be careful,” Malcolm said. “I don't suppose they are much
+of marksmen, but even a random shot will tell at times, and I want to
+take you all back safe with me; so keep low when you get on the roof,
+lads, and don't show your heads more than you can help.”
+
+Heralding their attack by a discharge from their muskets, whose balls
+whistled harmlessly round the tower, the peasants rushed forward to the
+door and commenced an assault upon it with hatchets and axes.
+
+Malcolm and his men each lifted a heavy stone and rolled it over the
+parapet, the five loosing the missiles simultaneously. There was a dull
+crash, and with a terrible cry the peasants fled from the door. Looking
+over, Malcolm saw that six or seven men had been struck down. Five of
+these lay dead or senseless; two were endeavouring to drag themselves
+away.
+
+“That is lesson number one,” he said. “They will be more prudent next
+time.”
+
+The peasants, after holding a tumultuous council, scattered, most of
+them making for a wood a short distance off.
+
+“They are going to cut down a tree and use it as a battering ram,”
+ Malcolm observed. “They know that these large stones are too heavy for
+us to cast many paces from the foot of the wall. We must get to work
+and break some of them up. That will not be difficult, for the wind and
+weather have rotted many of them half through.”
+
+The stones were for the most part from two to three feet long and nine
+or ten inches square. Two were laid down on the platform some eighteen
+inches apart and another placed across them. The four men then lifted
+another stone, and holding it perpendicularly brought it down with all
+their strength upon the unsupported centre of the stone, which broke in
+half at once. To break it again required greater efforts, but it yielded
+to the blows. Other stones were similarly treated, until a large pile
+was formed of blocks of some ten inches each way, besides a number of
+smaller fragments.
+
+In half an hour the peasants reappeared with a slight well grown tree
+some forty feet long which had been robbed of its branches. It was laid
+down about fifty yards from the church, and then twenty men lifted it
+near the butt and advanced to use it as a battering ram, with the small
+end forward; but before they were near enough to touch the door the
+bearers were arrested by a cry from the crowd as the defenders appeared
+on the tower, and poising their blocks of stone above their heads,
+hurled them down. Three of them flew over the heads of the peasants, but
+the others crashed down among them, slaying and terribly mutilating two
+of the bearers of the tree and striking several others to the ground.
+The battering ram was instantly dropped, and before the Scotchmen had
+time to lift another missile the peasants were beyond their reach.
+
+“Lesson number two,” Malcolm said. “What will our friends do next, I
+wonder?”
+
+The peasants were clearly at a loss. A long consultation was held, but
+this was not followed by any renewal of the attack.
+
+“I think they must have made up their minds to starve us out, sir,” the
+sergeant remarked as the hours went slowly by without any renewal of the
+attack.
+
+“Yes; either that, sergeant, or a night attack. In either case I
+consider that we are safe for a time, but sooner or later our fate is
+sealed unless aid comes to us, and therefore I propose that one of you
+should tonight try and bear a message to the Lech. We can lower him down
+by the bell rope from this window in the angle where the tower touches
+the church. Keeping round by the church he will be in deep shadow until
+he reaches the other end, and will then be close to the ruins of the
+village. Before morning he could reach our camp.”
+
+“I will undertake it myself, sir, if you will allow me,” the sergeant
+said, while the other men also volunteered for the duty.
+
+“You shall try first, sergeant,” Malcolm said. “It will be dangerous
+work, for as the news of our being here spreads the peasants will be
+coming in from all quarters. Their numbers are already greatly increased
+since they commenced the attack, and there must be at least three or
+four hundred men around us. They will be sure to keep a sharp lookout
+against our escaping, and it will need all your care and caution to get
+through them.”
+
+“Never fear, sir,” the man replied confidently. “I have stalked the deer
+scores of times, and it will be hard if I cannot crawl through a number
+of thick witted Bavarian peasants.”
+
+“Even beyond the village you will have to keep your eyes open, as you
+may meet parties of peasants on their way here. Fortunately you will
+have no difficulty in keeping the road, so well beaten is it by the
+march of the army. If by tomorrow night no rescue arrives I shall
+consider that you have been taken or killed, and shall try with the
+others to make my way through. It would be better to die sword in hand
+while we have still the strength to wield our arms than to be cooped
+up here until too weak any longer to defend ourselves, and then to be
+slowly tortured to death.”
+
+As soon as it was dusk a sentry was placed on the top of the tower, with
+orders to report the slightest sound or stir. During the day this had
+not been necessary, for a view could be obtained from the windows, and
+the men with firearms, who had now considerably increased in numbers,
+kept up a constant fire at the tower.
+
+An hour later the sentry reported that he could hear the sound of many
+feet in the darkness, with the occasional snapping as of dry twigs.
+
+“They are going to burn down the door,” Malcolm said. “That is what I
+expected. Now, sergeant, is your time. They are all busy and intent upon
+their purpose. You could not have a better time.”
+
+The rope was fastened round the sergeant's waist, and with some
+difficulty he squeezed himself through the narrow window, after
+listening attentively to discover if any were below.
+
+All seemed perfectly still on this side, and he was gradually and
+steadily lowered down. Presently those above felt the rope slack.
+Another minute and it swung loosely. It was drawn up again, and Malcolm,
+placing one of the men at the loophole, with instructions to listen
+intently for any sound of alarm or conflict, turned his attention to the
+other side.
+
+Soon he saw a number of dark figures bearing on their heads great
+bundles which he knew to be faggots approaching across the snow.
+
+As they approached a brisk fire suddenly opened on the tower. Malcolm at
+once called the sentry down.
+
+“It is of no use exposing yourself,” he said, “and we could not do much
+harm to them did we take to stoning them again. We have nothing to do
+now but to wait.”
+
+Soon a series of dull heavy crashes were heard as the faggots were
+thrown down against the door. Malcolm descended the stairs until he
+reached the lowest loophole which lighted them, and which was a few feet
+above the top of the door. He took one of the men with him.
+
+“Here are my flask and bullet pouch,” he said. “Do you reload my pistols
+as I discharge them.”
+
+For some minutes the sound of the faggots being thrown down continued,
+then the footsteps were heard retreating, and all was quiet again.
+
+“Now it is our turn again,” Malcolm said. “It is one thing to prepare
+a fire and another to light it, my fine fellows. I expect that you have
+forgotten that there are firearms here.”
+
+Presently a light was seen in the distance, and two men with blazing
+brands approached. They advanced confidently until within twenty yards
+of the tower, then there was the sharp crack of a pistol, and one of
+them fell forward on his face, the other hesitated and stood irresolute,
+then, summoning up courage, he sprang forward.
+
+As he did so another shot flashed out, and he, too, fell prostrate, the
+brand hissing and spluttering in the snow a few feet from the pile of
+brushwood. A loud yell of rage and disappointment arose on the night
+air, showing how large was the number of peasants who were watching the
+operations. Some time elapsed before any further move was made on the
+part of the assailants, then some twenty points of light were seen
+approaching.
+
+“Donald,” Malcolm said to the soldier, “go up to the top of the tower
+with your comrades. They are sure to light the pile this time, but if
+it is only fired in one place you may possibly dash out the light with a
+stone.”
+
+The lights rapidly approached, but when the bearers came within forty
+yards they stopped. They were a wild group, as, with their unkempt
+hair and beards, and their rough attire, they stood holding the lighted
+brands above their heads. A very tall and powerful man stood at their
+head.
+
+“Come on,” he said, “why do you hesitate? Let us finish with them.” And
+he rushed forward.
+
+Malcolm had his pistol lying on the sill of the loophole covering
+him, and when the peasant had run ten paces he fired, and the man fell
+headlong. The others stopped, and a second shot took effect among them.
+With a yell of terror they hurled the brands towards the pile and fled.
+Most of the brands fell short, others missed their aim, but from his
+loophole Malcolm saw that one had fallen on to the outside faggot of the
+pile.
+
+Almost instantly a heavy stone fell in the snow close by, another,
+and another. Malcolm stood with his eyes fixed on the brand. The twigs
+against which it leaned were catching, and the flames began to shoot up.
+Higher and higher they rose, and a shout of triumph from the peasants
+told how keenly they were also watching. Still the heavy stones
+continued to fall. The flames rose higher, and half the faggot was now
+alight. Another minute and the fire would communicate with the pile.
+Then there was a crash. A shower of sparks leapt up as the faggot,
+struck by one of the heavy stones, was dashed from its place and lay
+blazing twenty feet distant from the pile. There it burnt itself out,
+and for a time the tower was safe.
+
+For an hour the defenders watched the peasants, who had now lighted
+great fires just out of pistol shot from the tower, and were gathered
+thickly round them, the light flashing redly from pike head and scythe.
+
+The uproar of voices was loud; but though the defenders guessed that
+they were discussing the next plan of attack they could catch no meaning
+from such words as reached them, for the patois of the Bavarian
+peasants was unintelligible. At last a large number seized brands, some
+approached as before towards the pile, the others scattered in various
+directions, while the men with muskets again opened fire at the top of
+the tower.
+
+Malcolm took his post at the loophole awaiting attack, but the men in
+front of him did not advance. Suddenly a light sprang up beneath him.
+There was a sound of falling stones, but the light grew brighter and
+brighter, and he knew that this time the pile had been fired. As he ran
+upstairs he was met by one of the soldiers from above.
+
+“They crept round by the back of the church, sir, and round at the foot
+of the tower, and they had fired the pile before we saw that they were
+there.”
+
+“It cannot be helped,” Malcolm said, “they were sure to succeed sooner
+or later. Call the others down from the roof.”
+
+The door at the top of the stairs was now closed, and the crevices were
+stuffed tightly with strips torn from the men's clothes so as to prevent
+the smoke from entering when the door below gave way to the flames. A
+broad glare of light now lit up the scene, and showers of sparks, and an
+occasional tongue of flame were visible through the window.
+
+“Shut down the trapdoor in the roof,” Malcolm said, “that will check the
+draught through the windows.”
+
+The wood was dry, and what smoke made its way in through the window
+found its way out through the loopholes of the upper chamber without
+seriously incommoding those below.
+
+“We can take it easy, now,” Malcolm said as he set the example by
+sitting down against the wall. “It will be hours before the stonework
+below will be cool enough to permit them to attack.”
+
+“They are lighting a circle of fires all round the church,” one of the
+soldiers said looking out.
+
+“They think we shall be trying to escape, now that our door is burned.
+They are too late; I trust our messenger is miles away by this time.”
+
+In half an hour the flames died away, but a deep red glow showed that
+the pile of embers was still giving out an intense heat. One of the
+men was now placed on the top of the tower again, as a measure of
+precaution, but it was certain that hours would elapse before an attack
+could be made. The peasants, indeed, secure of their prey, evinced
+no hurry to commence the attack, but spent the night in shouting and
+singing round their fires, occasionally yelling threats of the fate
+which awaited them against the defenders of the tower.
+
+Towards daylight Malcolm commenced his preparations for defence. The
+door was taken off its hinges and was laid on the stone stairs. These
+were but two feet wide, the door itself being some three inches less.
+The rope was fastened round its upper end to prevent it from sliding
+down.
+
+“I wish we had some grease to pour over it,” Malcolm said, “but dry as
+it is it will be next to impossible for anyone to walk up that sharp
+incline, and we four should be able to hold it against the peasants till
+doomsday.”
+
+It was not until broad daylight that the peasants prepared for the
+attack. So long as the operation had been a distant one it had seemed
+easy enough, but as in a confused mass they approached the open doorway
+they realized that to ascend the narrow staircase, defended at the top
+by desperate men, was an enterprise of no common danger, and that the
+work which they had regarded as finished was in fact scarcely begun.
+
+The greater part then hung back, but a band of men, who by their
+blackened garments and swarthy faces Malcolm judged to be charcoal
+burners, armed with heavy axes, advanced to the front, and with an air
+of dogged resolution approached the door. The defenders gave no sign of
+their presence, no pistol flashed out from window or loophole.
+
+Striding through the still hot ashes the leader of the woodmen passed
+through the doorway and advanced up the stairs. These ran in short
+straight flights round the tower, lighted by narrow loopholes. No
+resistance was encountered until he reached the last turning, where
+a broader glare of light came from the open doorway, where two of the
+soldiers, pike in hand, stood ready to repel them. With a shout to his
+followers to come on, the peasant sprang forward. He ascended three
+steps, and then, as he placed his foot upon the sharply inclined
+plane of the door, which he had not noticed, he stumbled forward. His
+companions, supposing he had been pierced with a spear, pressed on after
+him, but each fell when they trod upon the door until a heap of men
+cumbered the stair. These were not unharmed, for with their long pikes
+the Scottish spearmen ran them through and through as they lay.
+
+Their bodies afforded a foothold to those who followed, but these could
+make but little way, for as but one could advance at a time, each as he
+came on was slain by the pikes. Finding that two were well able to hold
+the door, Malcolm with the other ran up to the top of the tower, and
+toppled over the stones of the parapet upon the mass gathered around
+the door. These at once scattered, and those on the stairs, finding
+themselves unable to get forward, for the narrow passage was now
+completely choked with the dead, made their way out again and rejoined
+their comrades.
+
+“I expect they will send their musketeers first next time,” Malcolm said
+as he rejoined those below, leaving the soldier on the watch. “Now let
+us get the door up again, and bring the dead here; we can form a barrier
+with them breast high.”
+
+The door was quickly shifted on one side, and then the troopers brought
+up the dead, who were eleven in number.
+
+“Now replace the door,” Malcolm ordered; “fill your iron caps with
+blood--there is plenty flowing from these fellows--and pour it over the
+door, it will be as good as oil.”
+
+This was done, and the bodies were then piled shoulder high across the
+door.
+
+“They can fire as much as they like now,” Malcolm said, “they will be no
+nearer, and I defy anyone to climb up that door now.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV A TIMELY RESCUE
+
+
+Although unaware how much more formidable the task before them had
+become, the peasants were disheartened by their defeat, and even the
+boldest hesitated at the thought of again attacking foes so formidably
+posted. None of those who had returned were able to explain what was the
+obstacle which had checked their advance. All that they could tell was,
+that those before them had fallen, in some cases even before they were
+touched by the spears of the defenders. This mystery added to the dread
+which the assault of so difficult a position naturally inspired, and
+some hours were spent in discussing how the next attack should be made.
+Many indeed were strongly in favour of remaining quietly around the
+tower and starving its defenders into surrendering.
+
+Others advocated an attempt to stifle them by heaping green wood and
+damp straw round the tower; but the more timid pointed out that
+many would be killed in carrying out the task by the firearms of the
+besieged, and that even were the combustibles placed in position and
+lighted the success of the experiment would be by no means certain,
+as the besieged might stuff up all the orifices, or at the worst might
+obtain sufficient fresh air on the top of the tower to enable them to
+breathe.
+
+“You are forgetting,” one of the peasants exclaimed, “the powder wagon
+which broke down as Count Tilly retreated from the Lech. Did we not
+carry off the powder barrels and hide them, partly to prevent them
+falling into the hands of these accursed Swedes, partly because the
+powder would last us for years for hunting the wolf and wild boar? We
+have only to stow these inside the tower to blow it into the air.”
+
+The idea was seized with shouts of acclamation. Most of the peasants who
+had assisted in carrying off the contents of the wagon were present, and
+these started instantly to dig up the barrels which they had taken as
+their share of the booty. The shouts of satisfaction and the departure
+of forty or fifty men at full speed in various directions did not pass
+unnoticed by the garrison of the tower.
+
+“They have got a plan of some sort,” Malcolm said; “what it is I have no
+idea, but they certainly seem confident about it. Look at those fellows
+throwing up their caps and waving their arms. I do not see how we can be
+attacked, but I do not like these signs of confidence on their part,
+for they know now how strong our position is. It seems to me that we are
+impregnable except against artillery.”
+
+Unable to repress his uneasiness Malcolm wandered from window to window
+watching attentively what was going on without, but keeping himself as
+far back as possible from the loopholes; for the men with muskets kept
+up a dropping fire at the openings, and although their aim was poor,
+bullets occasionally passed in and flattened themselves against the
+opposite walls.
+
+“There is a man returning,” he said in about half an hour; “he is
+carrying something on his shoulder, but I cannot see what it is.”
+
+In another ten minutes the man had reached the group of peasants
+standing two or three hundred yards from the church, and was greeted
+with cheers and waving of hats.
+
+“Good heavens!” Malcolm exclaimed suddenly, “it is a barrel of powder.
+They must have stripped some broken down ammunition wagon. This is a
+danger indeed.”
+
+The men grasped their weapons and rose to their feet at the news,
+prepared to take any steps which their young officer might command,
+for his promptitude and ingenuity had inspired them with unbounded
+confidence in him.
+
+“We must at all hazards,” he said after a few minutes thought, “prevent
+them from storing these barrels below. Remove the barricade of bodies
+and then carry the door down the stairs. We must fix it again on the
+bottom steps. The bottom stair is but a foot or two inside the doorway;
+if you place it there it will hinder their rushing up to attack you, and
+your pikes, as you stand above it, will prevent any from placing their
+barrels inside.
+
+“I will take my place at the loophole as before. We cannot prevent their
+crawling round from behind as they did to light the faggots; but if they
+pile them outside, they may blow in a hole in the wall of the tower, but
+it is possible that even then it may not fall. Two will be sufficient to
+hold the stairs, at any rate for the present. Do you, Cameron, take
+your place on the tower, and drop stones over on any who may try to make
+their way round from behind; even if you do no harm you will make them
+careful and delay the operation, and every hour now is of consequence.”
+
+Malcolm's instructions were carried out, and all was in readiness
+before the peasants, some of whom had to go considerable distances, had
+returned with the powder.
+
+The lesson of the previous evening had evidently not been lost upon the
+peasants, for Malcolm saw a tall man who was acting as their leader wave
+his hand, and those who had brought the powder started to make a detour
+round the church. Malcolm, finding that no movement was being made
+towards the front, and that at present he could do nothing from his
+loophole, ran up to the top of the tower and took his place by the
+soldier who was lying down on the roof and looking over the edge.
+
+Presently the first of the peasants appeared round the corner of the
+main building, and dashed rapidly across to the angle of the tower. Two
+heavy stones were dropped, but he had passed on long before they had
+reached the bottom. Man after man followed, and Malcolm, seeing that he
+could do nothing to stop them, again ran down. As he did so he heard a
+scream of agony. The leading peasants had reached the doorway, but as
+they dashed in to place their barrels of powder they were run through
+and through by the spears of the pikemen. They fell half in and half out
+of the doorway, and the barrels rolled some distance away. Those behind
+them stopped panic stricken at their sudden fall. Several of them
+dropped their barrels and fled, while others ran round the angle of the
+tower again, coming in violent contact with those following them; all
+then hurried round behind the church. Malcolm stamped his feet with
+vexation.
+
+“What a fool I am,” he muttered, “not to have thought of a sortie! If
+we had all held ourselves in readiness to spring out, we might have cut
+down the whole of them; at any rate none would have got off with their
+barrels.”
+
+This unexpected failure greatly damped the spirit of the peasants, and
+there was much consultation among them before any fresh move was made.
+As he saw that they were fully occupied, and paying no heed to the
+tower, Malcolm said to his men:
+
+“I am going outside; prepare to help me up over the door again quickly
+if necessary.”
+
+Leaving his sword behind him, he took a leap from the step above the
+inclined plane and landed at the bottom, and at once threw himself down
+outside. With his dagger he removed the hoops of one of the barrels, and
+scattered the contents thickly along the front of the tower. None of the
+peasants perceived him, for there were many bodies lying round the
+foot of the tower; and even had any looked that way they would not have
+noticed that one prone figure had been added to the number.
+
+Crawling cautiously along Malcolm pushed two other barrels before him,
+and opening them as before, spread the contents of one upon the ground
+near the side of the tower, and the other by the hinder face. The thick
+black layer on the snow would have told its tale instantly to a soldier,
+but Malcolm had little fear of the peasants in their haste paying
+attention to it. When his task was completed he crawled back again
+to the door and laid a train from the foot of the slide to the powder
+without.
+
+“I will remain here,” he said, “for the present. Do one of you take your
+place in the belfry. Tell Cameron to shout down to you what is passing
+behind, and do you run instantly down the stairs to tell me.”
+
+The peasants advanced next time accompanied by a strong force of their
+armed comrades. As before they came round from behind, intending to
+stack their barrels in the angle there. As the bearers of the first two
+or three powder barrels came round the corner Cameron shouted the news,
+and the soldier below ran down to Malcolm, who fired his pistol into
+the train. A broad flash of fire rose round the tower followed
+instantaneously by two heavy explosions. There was silence for an
+instant, and then a chorus of shrieks and yells.
+
+The powder barrels borne by the two first men had exploded, their heads
+having been knocked in previously to admit of their ignition. Some
+thirty of the peasants were killed or terribly mutilated by the
+explosion, and the rest took to their heels in terror, leaving their
+wounded comrades on the ground.
+
+The echoes of the explosion had scarce died away when a shout of terror
+broke from the main body of peasants, and Malcolm saw them flying in
+all directions. An instant afterwards the ringing sound of the Swedish
+trumpets was heard, and a squadron of horse galloped down full speed.
+The peasants attempted no resistance, but fled in all directions, hotly
+pursued by the Swedes, who broke up into small parties and followed
+the fugitives cross the country cutting down great numbers of them. The
+Swedish leader at once rode up to the foot of the tower, where Malcolm
+had already sallied out.
+
+“I am glad indeed I am in time, Captain Graheme; we have ridden without
+drawing rein since your messenger arrived at four o'clock this morning.”
+
+“Thanks indeed, Captain Burgh,” Malcolm replied. “Your coming is most
+welcome; though I think we have given the peasants so hot a lesson that
+they would not have attacked us again, and by tightening our waistbelts
+we could have held on for another three or four days.”
+
+“I see that you have punished them heavily,” the Swedish officer said,
+looking round at the bodies; “but what was the explosion I heard?”
+
+“You will see its signs behind the tower,” Malcolm said as he led the
+way there. “They tried to blow us up, but burnt their own fingers.”
+
+The scene behind the tower was ghastly. Some thirty peasants lay with
+their clothes completely burned from their bodies, the greater portion
+of them dead, but some still writhing in agony. Malcolm uttered an
+exclamation of horror.
+
+“It were a kindness to put these wretches out of their misery,” the
+Swede said, and dismounting he passed his sword through the bodies of
+the writhing men. “You know I am in favour of carrying on the war as
+mercifully as may be,” he continued turning to Malcolm, “for we have
+talked the matter over before now; and God forbid that I should strike
+a fallen foe; but these poor wretches were beyond help, and it is true
+mercy to end their sufferings.”
+
+“They have had a heavy lesson,” Malcolm said; “there are eleven more
+dead up in the belfry, which they tried to carry by storm, and a dozen
+at least crushed by stones.
+
+“You and your three men have indeed given a good account of yourselves,”
+ Captain Burgh exclaimed; “but while I am talking you are fasting. Here
+is a bottle of wine, a cold chicken, and a manchet of bread which I put
+in my wallet on starting; let us breakfast, for though I do not pretend
+to have been fasting as you have, the morning ride has given me an
+appetite. I see your fellows are hard at work already on the viands
+which my orderly brought for them in his havresack; but first let us
+move away to the tree over yonder, for verily the scent of blood and of
+roasted flesh is enough to take away one's appetite, little squeamish as
+these wars have taught us to be.”
+
+Captain Burgh asked no questions until Malcolm had finished his meal. “I
+have plenty more food,” he said, “for we have brought three led horses
+well laden; but it were better that you eat no more at present, tis ill
+overloading a fasting stomach. My men will not be back from the pursuit
+for a couple of hours yet, for they will not draw rein so long as their
+horses can gallop, so excited are they over the tales of the horrible
+cruelties which have been perpetrated on all our men who have fallen
+into the hands of the peasants, so now you can tell me in full the tale
+of your adventures. I had no time to ask any questions of your sergeant,
+for we were called up and sent off five minutes after he arrived with
+the news that you with three men were beleaguered here by a party of
+peasants.”
+
+Malcolm related the whole incidents which had befallen him since he had
+been suddenly felled and made captive by the women in the hut in the
+village. The Swede laughed over this part of the adventure.
+
+“To think,” he said, “of you, a dashing captain of the Green Brigade,
+being made captive by a couple of old women. There is more than one
+gallant Scot, if reports be true, has fallen a captive to German
+maidens, but of another sort; to be taken prisoner and hid in a straw
+yard is too good.”
+
+“It was no laughing matter, I can tell you,” Malcolm said, “though
+doubtless it will serve as a standing jest against me for a long time;
+however, I am so thankful I have got out of the scrape that those may
+laugh who will.”
+
+When Malcolm finished his story Captain Burgh said: “You have managed
+marvellously well indeed, Graheme, and can well afford to put up with a
+little laughter anent that matter of the women, for in truth there
+are few who would with three men have held a post against four or five
+hundred, as you have done--ay, and fairly defeated them before I came on
+the scene. That thought of yours of laying the door upon the stairs
+was a masterly one, and you rarely met and defeated every device of the
+enemy.
+
+“Now, if you will, I will mount this stronghold of yours with you, and
+see exactly how it stands, for I shall have to tell the tale a score of
+times at least when I get back to camp, and I can do it all the better
+after I have seen for myself the various features of the place.”
+
+By the time they had mounted the top of the tower and Captain Burgh had
+fully satisfied himself as to the details of the defence the troopers
+began to return. Their horses were far too fatigued with the long ride
+from the camp and the subsequent pursuit to be able to travel farther.
+Fires were accordingly lit, rations distributed, and a halt ordered till
+the following morning, when, at daybreak, they returned to the Lech.
+
+Two days later Malcolm and his men marched forward with a brigade
+which was advancing to reinforce the army under Gustavus, and reached
+Ingolstadt on the day when the king raised the siege, and accompanied
+him on his march to Munich.
+
+Malcolm on rejoining was greeted with great pleasure by his comrades,
+who had made up their minds that he had in some way fallen a victim to
+the peasants. The noncommissioned officers and men of his party had been
+severely reprimanded for leaving the village without finding him. In
+their defence they declared that they had searched every house and shed,
+and, having found no sign of him, or of any struggle having taken place,
+they supposed that he must have returned alone. But their excuses were
+not held to be valid, the idea of Malcolm having left his men without
+orders being so preposterous that it was held it should never have been
+entertained for a moment by them.
+
+“I shall never be anxious about you again,” Nigel Graheme said, when
+Malcolm finished the narrative of his adventures to the officers of his
+regiment as they sat round the campfire on the evening when he rejoined
+them. “This is the third or fourth time that I have given you up for
+dead. Whatever happens in the future, I shall refuse to believe the
+possibility of any harm having come to you, and shall be sure that
+sooner or later you will walk quietly into camp with a fresh batch of
+adventures to tell us. Whoever of us may be doomed to lay our bones in
+this German soil, it will not be you. Some good fairy has distinctly
+taken charge of you, and there is no saying what brilliant destiny may
+await you.”
+
+“But he must keep clear of the petticoats, Graheme,” Colonel Munro
+laughed; “evidently danger lurks for him there, and if he is caught
+napping again some Delilah will assuredly crop the hair of this young
+Samson of ours.”
+
+“There was not much of Delilah in that fury who felled me with a mallet,
+colonel,” Malcolm laughed; “however, I will be careful in future, and
+will not give them a chance.”
+
+“Ah! it may come in another form next time, Malcolm,” Munro said; “this
+time it was an old woman, next time it may be a young one. Beware, my
+boy! they are far the most dangerous, innocent though they may look.”
+
+A laugh ran round the circle.
+
+“Forewarned forearmed, colonel,” Malcolm said sturdily, “I will be on
+my guard against every female creature, young or old, in future. But
+I don't think that in this affair the woman has had much to boast
+about--she and her friends had best have left me alone.”
+
+“That is so, Malcolm,” the colonel said warmly. “You have borne yourself
+well and bravely, and you have got an old head on those young shoulders
+of yours. You are as full of plans and stratagems as if you had been
+a campaigner for the last half century; and no man, even in the Green
+Brigade, no, not Hepburn himself, could have held that church tower more
+ably than you did. It will be a good tale to tell the king as we ride
+on the march tomorrow, for he loves a gallant deed, and the more so when
+there is prudence and good strategy as well as bravery. He has more than
+once asked if you have been getting into any new adventures, and seemed
+almost surprised when I told him that you were doing your duty with your
+company. He evidently regards it as your special mission to get into
+harebrained scrapes. He regards you, in fact, as a pedagogue might view
+the pickle of the school.”
+
+There was a general laugh at Malcolm's expense.
+
+“I don't know how it is I am always getting into scrapes,” the lad said
+half ruefully when the laugh subsided. “I am sure I don't want to get
+into them, colonel, and really I have never gone out of my way to do so,
+unless you call my march to help the Count of Mansfeld going out of my
+way. All the other things have come to me without any fault of my own.”
+
+“Quite so, Graheme,” the colonel said smiling; “that's always the excuse
+of the boy who gets into scrapes. The question is, Why do these things
+always happen to you and to nobody else? If you can explain that your
+whole case is made out. But don't take it seriously, Malcolm,” he
+continued, seeing that the lad looked really crestfallen.
+
+“You know I am only laughing, and there is not a man here, including
+myself, who does not envy you a little for the numerous adventures which
+have fallen to your lot, and for the courage and wisdom which you have
+shown in extricating yourself from them.”
+
+“And now, please, will you tell me, colonel,” Malcolm said more
+cheerfully, “why we are turning our backs upon Ingolstadt and are
+marching away without taking it? I have been away for ten days, you
+know, and it is a mystery to me why we are leaving the only enemy
+between us and Vienna, after having beaten him so heartily a fortnight
+since, without making an effort to rout him thoroughly.”
+
+“Maximilian's position is a very strong one, my lad, and covered as he
+is by the guns of Ingolstadt it would be even a harder task to dislodge
+him than it was to cross the Lech in his teeth. But you are wrong; his
+is not the only army which stands between us and Vienna. No sooner
+is old Tilly dead than a greater than Tilly appears to oppose us.
+Wallenstein is in the field again. It has been known that he has for
+some time been negotiating with the emperor, who has been imploring him
+to forgive the slight that was passed upon him before, and to again take
+the field.
+
+“Wallenstein, knowing that the game was in his hands, and that the
+emperor must finally agree to any terms which he chose to dictate, has,
+while he has been negotiating, been collecting an army; and when the
+emperor finally agreed to his conditions, that he was at the conclusion
+of the peace to be assured a royal title and the fief of a sovereign
+state, he had an army ready to his hand, and is now on the point of
+entering Bohemia with 40,000 men.”
+
+“What his plans may be we cannot yet say, but at any rate it would
+not do to be delaying here and leaving Germany open to Wallenstein to
+operate as he will. It was a stern day at Leipzig, but, mark my words,
+it will be sterner still when we meet Wallenstein; for, great captain as
+Tilly undoubtedly was, Wallenstein is far greater, and Europe will hold
+its breath when Gustavus and he, the two greatest captains of the age,
+meet in a pitched battle.”
+
+At Munich the regiments of Munro and Spynie were quartered in the
+magnificent Electoral Palace, where they fared sumptuously and enjoyed
+not a little their comfortable quarters and the stores of old wines in
+the cellar. Sir John Hepburn was appointed military governor of Munich.
+
+In the arsenal armour, arms, and clothing sufficient for 10,000 infantry
+were found, and a hundred and forty pieces of cannon were discovered
+buried beneath the floors of the palace. Their carriages were ready in
+the arsenal, and they were soon put in order for battle. For three
+weeks the army remained at Munich, Gustavus waiting to see what course
+Wallenstein was taking. The Imperialist general had entered Bohemia,
+had driven thence, with scarcely an effort, Arnheim and the Saxons, and
+formed a junction near Eger with the remnants of the army which had been
+beaten on the Lech; then, leaving a strong garrison in Ratisbon, he had
+marched on with an army of sixty thousand men.
+
+He saw that his best plan to force Gustavus to loose his hold of
+Bavaria was to march on some important point lying between him and North
+Germany. He therefore selected a place which Gustavus could not abandon,
+and so would be obliged to leave Bavaria garrisoned only by a force
+insufficient to withstand the attacks of Pappenheim, who had collected
+a considerable army for the recovery of the territories of Maximilian.
+Such a point was Nuremberg, the greatest and strongest of the free
+cities, and which had been the first to open its gates to Gustavus. The
+Swedish king could hardly abandon this friendly city to the assaults of
+the Imperialists, and indeed its fall would have been followed by the
+general defection from his cause of all that part of Germany, and he
+would have found himself isolated and cut off from the North.
+
+As soon as Gustavus perceived that Nuremberg was the point towards
+which Wallenstein was moving, he hastened at once from Munich to the
+assistance of the threatened city. The forces at his disposal had been
+weakened by the despatch of Marshal Horn to the Lower Palatinate, and
+by the garrisons left in the Bavarian cities, and he had but 17,000 men
+disposable to meet the 60,000 with whom Wallenstein was advancing. He
+did not hesitate, however, but sent off messengers at once to direct
+the corps in Swabia under General Banner, Prince William of Weimar, and
+General Ruthven, to join him, if possible, before Nuremberg.
+
+Marching with all haste he arrived at Nuremberg before Wallenstein
+reached it, and prepared at once for the defence of the city. He first
+called together the principal citizens of Nuremberg and explained to
+them his position. He showed them that were he to fall back with his
+army he should be able to effect a junction with the troops under
+his generals, and would ere long be in a position to offer battle to
+Wallenstein upon more equal terms, but that were he to do so he would be
+forced to abandon the city to the vengeance of the Imperialists. He told
+them that did he remain before the city he must to a great extent be
+dependent upon them for food and supplies, as he would be beleaguered
+by Wallenstein, and should be unable to draw food and forage from the
+surrounding country; he could therefore only maintain himself by the aid
+of the cordial goodwill and assistance of the citizens.
+
+The people of Nuremberg were true to the side they had chosen, and
+placed the whole of their resources at his disposal. Gustavus at once
+set his army to work to form a position in which he could confront the
+overwhelming forces of the enemy. Round the city, at a distance of about
+thirteen hundred yards from it, he dug a ditch, nowhere less than twelve
+feet wide and eight deep, but, where most exposed to an attack, eighteen
+feet wide and twelve deep. Within the circuit of this ditch he erected
+eight large forts and connected them with a long and thick earthen
+parapet strengthened with bastions. On the ramparts and forts three
+hundred cannon, for the most part supplied by the city of Nuremberg,
+were placed in position. As the camp between the ramparts and the town
+was traversed by the river Pegnitz numerous bridges were thrown across
+it, so that the whole force could concentrate on either side in case of
+attack. So vigorously did the army, assisted by the citizens, labour at
+these works, that they were completed in fourteen days after Gustavus
+reached Nuremberg.
+
+It was on the 19th of June that the Swedish army arrived there, and on
+the 30th Wallenstein and Maximilian of Bavaria appeared before it
+with the intention of making an immediate assault. The works, however,
+although not yet quite completed, were so formidable that Wallenstein
+saw at once that the success of an assault upon them would be extremely
+doubtful, and, in spite of the earnest entreaties of Maximilian to lead
+his army to the assault, he decided to reduce the place by starvation.
+This method appeared at once easy and certain. The whole of the
+surrounding country belonged to the Bishop of Bamberg, who was devoted
+to the Imperialist cause, and he possessed all the towns, and strong
+places in the circle of country around Nuremberg. Wallenstein had
+brought with him vast stores of provisions, and could draw upon the
+surrounding country for the further maintenance of his army. It was only
+necessary then to place himself in a position where the Swedes could not
+attack him with a hope of success.
+
+Such a position lay at a distance of three miles from Nuremberg, where
+there was a wooded hill known as the Alte Veste. Round this Wallenstein
+threw up a circle of defences, consisting of a ditch behind which was an
+interlacement of forest trees, baggage wagons, and gabions, forming an
+almost insurpassable obstacle to an attacking force. Within this circle
+he encamped his army, formed into eight divisions, each about seven
+thousand strong, while two considerable bodies of troops in the diocese
+of Bamberg and the Upper Palatinate prepared to oppose any forces
+approaching to the aid of Nuremberg, and the Croats, horse and foot,
+scoured the country day and night to prevent any supplies entering the
+city. Having thus adopted every means for starving out the beleaguered
+army and city, Wallenstein calmly awaited the result.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI THE SIEGE OF NUREMBERG
+
+
+Drearily passed the days in the beleaguered camp, varied only by an
+occasional raid by small parties to drive in cattle from the surrounding
+country, or to intercept convoys of provisions on their way to the
+Imperialists' camp. So active and watchful were the Croats that these
+enterprises seldom succeeded, although, to enable his men to move with
+celerity, Gustavus mounted bodies of infantry on horseback. Thus they
+were enabled to get over the ground quickly, and if attacked they
+dismounted and fought on foot.
+
+To these mounted infantry the name of dragoons was given, and so useful
+were they found that the institution was adopted in other armies, and
+dragoons became a recognized portion of every military force. In time
+the custom of dismounting and fighting on foot was gradually abandoned,
+and dragoons became regular cavalry; but in modern times the utility of
+Gustavus's invention of mounted infantry has been again recognized,
+and in all the small wars in which England has been engaged bodies of
+mounted infantry have been organized. Ere long mounted infantry will
+again become a recognized arm of the service.
+
+But these raids in search of provisions occupied but a small portion
+of the army. The rest passed their time in enforced idleness. There was
+nothing to be done save to clean and furbish their arms and armour; to
+stand on the ramparts and gaze on the distant heights of the Alte Veste,
+to watch the solid columns of the Imperial army, which from time to time
+Wallenstein marched down from his stronghold and paraded in order of
+battle, as a challenge to the Swedes to come out and fight, or to loiter
+through the narrow streets of Nuremberg, and to talk to the citizens,
+whose trade and commerce were now entirely at a standstill. Malcolm,
+with the restlessness of youth, seldom stayed many hours quiet in camp.
+He did not care either for drinking or gambling; nor could he imitate
+the passive tranquillity of the old soldiers, who were content to sleep
+away the greater part of their time. He therefore spent many hours every
+day in the city, where he speedily made many acquaintances.
+
+In the city of Nuremberg time dragged as slowly as it did in the camp.
+At ordinary times the centre of a quiet and busy trade, the city was
+now cut off from the world. The shops were for the most part closed; the
+artisans stood idle in the streets, and the townsfolk had nought to do,
+save to gather in groups and discuss the times, or to take occasional
+excursions beyond the gates into the camp of their allies. The advances
+then of the young Scottish officer were willingly responded to, and he
+soon became intimate in the houses of all the principal citizens; and
+while the greater part of his comrades spent their evenings in drinking
+and gambling, he enjoyed the hours in conversation and music in the
+houses of the citizens of Nuremberg.
+
+The long inaction brought its moral consequences, and the troops became
+demoralized and insubordinate from their enforced idleness. Plundering
+and acts of violence became so common that Gustavus was obliged to issue
+the most stringent ordinances to restore discipline; and an officer and
+many men had to be executed before the spirit of insubordination was
+quelled. In order to pass some of the hours of the days Malcolm obtained
+leave from one of the great clockmakers of the town--for Nuremberg was
+at that time the centre of the craft of clockmaking--to allow him to
+work in his shop, and to learn the mysteries of his trade.
+
+Most of the establishments were closed, but Malcolm's acquaintance
+was one of the wealthiest of the citizens, and was able to keep his
+craftsmen at work, and to store the goods he manufactured until better
+times should return. Malcolm began the work purely to occupy his time,
+but he presently came to take a lively interest in it, and was soon
+able to take to pieces and put together again the cumbrous but simple
+machines which constituted the clocks of the period.
+
+Workshops were not in those days factories. The master of a craft
+worked, surrounded by his craftsmen and apprentices. Every wheel and
+spring were made upon the premises, fashioned and finished with chisel
+and file; and there was an interest in the work far beyond any which it
+possesses in the present day, when watches are turned out wholesale, the
+separate parts being prepared by machinery, and the work of the artisan
+consisting solely in the finishing and putting them together.
+
+Laying aside his armour and gay attire, and donning a workman's apron,
+Malcolm sat at the bench by the side of the master, shaping and filing,
+and listening to his stories connected with the trade and history
+of Nuremberg. He anticipated no advantage from the knowledge he was
+gaining, but regarded it simply as a pleasant way of getting through a
+portion of the day.
+
+Thus for three months the armies confronted each other. Provisions were
+becoming terribly scarce, the magazines of the city were emptying fast,
+and although working night and day, the mills of the place did not
+suffice to grind flour for the needs of so many mouths. The population
+of the city itself was greatly swollen by the crowds of Protestant
+fugitives who had fled there for refuge on the approach of the
+Imperialists, and the magazines of the city dwindled fast under the
+demands made upon them by this addition, and that of the Swedish army,
+to the normal population. Fever broke out in the city and camp. The
+waters of the Pegnitz were tainted by the carcasses of dead horses and
+other animals. The supplies of forage had long since been exhausted, and
+the baggage and troop animals died in vast numbers.
+
+Still there was no sign of a change. Wallenstein would not attack,
+Gustavus could not. The Swedish king waited to take advantage of some
+false move on the part of the Imperial commander; but Wallenstein was as
+great a general as himself, and afforded him no opening, turning a deaf
+ear to the entreaties and importunities of Maximilian that he would end
+the tedious siege by an attack upon the small and enfeebled army around
+Nuremberg.
+
+All this time Gustavus was in constant communication with his generals
+outside, his messengers making their way by speed or stratagem through
+the beleaguering Croats, and kept up the spirits of his men by daily
+reviews and by the cheerful countenance which he always wore.
+
+The Swedish columns were gradually closing in towards Nuremberg. One was
+led by the chancellor Oxenstiern, to whom had been committed the care of
+the Middle Rhine and the Lower Palatinate, where he had been confronted
+by the Spanish troops under Don Philip de Sylva.
+
+On the 11th July, leaving Horn with a small force to oppose the
+Spaniards, the chancellor set out to join his master. On the way he
+effected a junction with the forces of the Landgrave of Hesse-Cassel.
+This general had been opposed in Westphalia by Pappenheim, but he seized
+the opportunity when the latter had marched to relieve Maestricht, which
+was besieged by Frederic of Nassau, to march away and join Oxenstiern.
+
+The Scotch officers Ballandine and Alexander Hamilton were with their
+regiment in the Duchy of Magdeburg. When the news of the king's danger
+reached them without waiting for instructions they marched to Halle and
+joining a portion of the division of the Duke of Saxe-Weimar, to which
+they were attached, pushed on to Zeitz, and were there joined by the
+duke himself, who had hurried on from the Lake of Constance, attended
+only by his guards, but, picking up five Saxon regiments in Franconia.
+Together they passed on to Wurtzburg, where they joined Oxenstiern and
+the Landgrave of Hesse-Cassel. General Banner, with the fourth corps,
+was at Augsburg, opposed to Cratz, who was at the head of the remains of
+Tilly's old army.
+
+Slipping away from his foes he marched to Windsheim, and was there
+joined by a body of troops under Bernhard of Weimar. The force from
+Wurtzburg soon afterwards came up, and the whole of the detached corps,
+amounting to 49,000 men, being now collected, they marched to Bruck,
+ten miles north of Nuremberg. Three days later, on the 16th of August,
+Gustavus rode into their camp, and on the 21st marched at their head
+into Nuremberg, unhindered by the Imperialists.
+
+Gustavus probably calculated that the Imperialists would now move down
+and offer battle; but Wallenstein, who had detached 10,000 men to bring
+up supplies, could not place in the field a number equal to those of the
+reinforcements, and preferred to await an attack in the position which
+he had prepared with such care. He knew the straits to which Nuremberg
+and its defenders were reduced, and the impossibility there would be of
+feeding the new arrivals.
+
+The country round for a vast distance had been long since stripped of
+provisions, and Gustavus had no course open to him but to march
+away with his army and leave the city to its fate, or to attack the
+Imperialists in their stronghold.
+
+On the day after his arrival, the 21st of August, Gustavus marched out
+and opened a cannonade upon the Imperialists' position, in order to
+induce Wallenstein to come down and give battle. Wallenstein was not,
+however, to be tempted, but kept his whole army busy with the spade and
+axe further intrenching his position. The next day the king brought his
+guns nearer to the enemy's camp, and for twenty-four hours kept up a
+heavy fire. The only result, however, was that Wallenstein fell back
+a few hundred yards on to two ridges, on one of which was the ruined
+castle called the Alte Veste; the other was known as the Altenburg. The
+ascent to these was steep and craggy, and they were covered by a thick
+forest. Here Wallenstein formed in front of his position a threefold
+barrier of felled trees woven and interlaced with each other, each
+barrier rising in a semicircle one above the other. Before the Swedish
+cannon ceased to fire the new position of the Imperialists had been made
+impregnable.
+
+Unfortunately for Gustavus he had at this moment lost the services
+of the best officer in his army, Sir John Hepburn, whom he had always
+regarded as his right hand. The quarrel had arisen from some trifling
+circumstance, and Gustavus in the heat of the moment made some
+disparaging allusion to the religion of Hepburn, who was a Catholic and
+also to that officer's love of dress and finery. The indignant Hepburn
+at once resigned his commission and swore never again to draw his sword
+in the service of the king--a resolution to which he adhered, although
+Gustavus, when his anger cooled, endeavoured in every way to appease the
+angry soldier.
+
+As he persisted in his resolution Colonel Munro was appointed to the
+command of the Green Brigade. It is probable that the quarrel was the
+consummation of a long standing grievance. Hepburn as well as the other
+Scottish officers had shared the indignation of Sir John Hamilton when
+the latter resigned in consequence of the Swedish troop being placed in
+the post of honour at the storm of the castle of Marienburg after the
+Scots had done all the work. There had, too, been much discontent among
+them concerning the Marquis of Hamilton, whom they considered that
+Gustavus had treated ungenerously; and still more concerning Lieutenant
+Colonel Douglas, whom Gustavus had committed to a common prison for
+a slight breach of etiquette, a punishment at which the English
+ambassador, Sir Harry Vane, remonstrated, and which the whole Scottish
+officers considered an insult to them and their country.
+
+There were probably faults on both sides. The Scottish troops were the
+backbone of the Swedish army, and to them were principally due almost
+the whole of the successes which Gustavus had gained. Doubtless
+they presumed upon the fact, and although Gustavus recognized his
+obligations, as is shown by the immense number of commands and
+governorships which he bestowed upon his Scottish officers, he may
+well have been angered and irritated by the insistance with which they
+asserted their claims and services. It was, however, a most unfortunate
+circumstance that just at this critical moment he should have lost the
+services of an officer whose prudence was equal to his daring, and who
+was unquestionably one of the greatest military leaders of his age.
+
+It is probable that had Hepburn remained by his side the king would
+not have undertaken the attack upon the impregnable position of the
+Imperialists. Deprived of the counsellor upon whose advice he had
+hitherto invariably relied, Gustavus determined to attempt to drive
+Wallenstein from his position, the decision being finally induced by a
+ruse of the Imperialist commander, who desired nothing so much as that
+the Swedes should dash their forces against the terrible position he
+had prepared for them. Accordingly on the 24th of August he directed
+a considerable portion of his force to march away from the rear of his
+position as if, alarmed at the superior strength of the Swedes, he had
+determined to abandon the heights he had so long occupied and to march
+away.
+
+Gustavus fell into the trap, and prepared at once to assault the
+position. Two hundred pieces of artillery heralded the advance, which
+was made by the whole body of the musketeers of the army, drafted
+from the several brigades and divided into battalions 500 strong, each
+commanded by a colonel. It was a terrible position which they were
+advancing to storm. Each of the lines of intrenchments was surmounted
+by rows of polished helmets, while pikes and arquebuses glittered in
+the sunshine; but it was not long that the scene was visible, for as the
+battalions approached the foot of the Altenburg 80 pieces of artillery
+opened from its summit and from the ridge of the Alte Veste, while
+the smoke of the arquebuses drifted up in a cloud from the lines of
+intrenchments.
+
+Steadily and in good order the Scotch and Swedish infantry pressed
+forward, and forcing the lower ditch strove to climb the rocky heights;
+but in vain did they strive. Over and over again they reached the
+intrenchments, but were unable to force their way through the thickly
+bound fallen trees, while their lines were torn with a storm of iron
+and lead. Never did the Scottish soldiers of Gustavus fight with greater
+desperation and valour. Scores of them rolled lifeless down the slope,
+but fresh men took their places and strove to hack their way through the
+impenetrable screen through which the Imperialist bullets whistled like
+hail.
+
+At last, when nigh half their number had fallen, the rest, exhausted,
+broken, and in disorder, fell suddenly back. Gustavus in person then led
+on his Finlanders, but these, after a struggle as obstinate and heroic
+as that of their predecessors, in their turn fell back baffled. The
+Livonians next made the attempt, but in vain.
+
+In the meantime a sharp conflict had taken place between the Imperial
+cavalry and the Swedish left wing. Wallenstein's cuirassiers, hidden by
+the smoke, charged right through a column of Swedish infantry; but this
+success was counterbalanced by the rout of Cronenberg's Invincibles,
+a magnificent regiment of 1500 horsemen, by 200 Finland troopers. The
+troops of Duke Bernhard of Weimar, among whom were still the Scottish
+regiments of Hamilton and Douglas, marched against the heights which
+commanded the Alte Veste, and drove back the Imperialists with great
+loss. Five hundred musketeers of the Green Brigade under Colonel Munro
+then pushed gallantly forward and posted themselves far in advance,
+resisting all attempts of the Imperialists to drive them back, until
+Lieutenant Colonel Sinclair, who was now in command of Munro's own
+regiment, brought it forward to his assistance. Until the next morning
+this body of one thousand men maintained the ground they had won in
+spite of all the efforts of the Imperialists to dislodge them.
+
+Colonel Munro was severely wounded in the left side. Lieutenant Colonel
+Maken, Capt. Innis, and Capt. Traill were killed, and an immense number
+of other Scottish officers were killed and wounded. The news was brought
+down to Gustavus of the advantage gained by Duke Bernhard, but he
+was unable to take advantage of it by moving his army round to that
+position, as he would have exposed himself to a counter attack of the
+enemy while doing so. He therefore launched a fresh column of attack
+against the Alte Veste.
+
+This was followed by another and yet another, until every regiment in
+the army had in its turn attempted to storm the position, but still
+without success.
+
+The battle had now raged for ten hours, and nightfall put an end to
+the struggle. Hepburn had all day ridden behind the king as a simple
+cavalier, and had twice carried messages through the thick of the fire
+when there were no others to bear them, so great had been the slaughter
+round the person of the king.
+
+It was the first time that Gustavus had been repulsed, and he could
+hardly yet realize the fact; but as messenger after messenger came in
+from the different divisions he discovered how terrible had been his
+loss. Most of his generals and superior officers had been killed or
+wounded, 2000 men lay dead on the field, and there were nigh three times
+that number of wounded.
+
+The Imperialists on their side lost 1000 killed and 1500 wounded; but
+the accounts of the losses on both sides differ greatly, some placing
+the Imperial loss higher than that of the Swedes, a palpably absurd
+estimate, as the Imperialists, fighting behind shelter, could not have
+suffered anything like so heavily as their assailants, who were exposed
+to their fire in the open.
+
+Hepburn bore the order from the king for Munro's troops and those of
+Duke Bernhard to retire from the position they had won, as they were
+entirely cut off from the rest of the army, and would at daylight have
+had the whole of the Imperialists upon them. The service was one of
+great danger, and Hepburn had to cut his way sword in hand through the
+Croats who intervened between him and his comrades of the Green Brigade.
+He accomplished his task in safety, and before daylight Munro's men
+and the regiments of Duke Bernhard rejoined the army in the plain. But
+though repulsed Gustavus was not defeated. He took up a new position
+just out of cannon shot of the Altenburg, and then offered battle to
+Wallenstein, the latter, however, well satisfied with his success,
+remained firm in his policy of starving out the enemy, and resisted
+every device of the king to turn him from his stronghold.
+
+For fourteen days Gustavus remained in position. Then he could hold out
+no longer. The supplies were entirely exhausted. The summer had been
+unusually hot. The shrunken waters of the Pegnitz were putrid and
+stinking, the carcasses of dead horses poisoned the air, and fever
+and pestilence raged in the camp. Leaving, then, Kniphausen with eight
+thousand men to aid the citizens of Nuremberg to defend the city should
+Wallenstein besiege it, Gustavus marched on the 8th of September by
+way of Neustadt to Windsheim, and there halted to watch the further
+movements of the enemy.
+
+Five days later Wallenstein quitted his camp and marched to Forsheim.
+So far the advantage of the campaign lay with him. His patience and iron
+resolution had given the first check to the victorious career of the
+Lion of the North.
+
+Munro's regiment, as it was still called--for he was now its full
+colonel, although Lieutenant Colonel Sinclair commanded it in the
+field--had suffered terribly, but less, perhaps, than some of those
+who had in vain attempted to force their way up the slopes of the Alte
+Veste; and many an eye grew moist as at daybreak the regiment marched
+into its place in the ranks of the brigade and saw how terrible had been
+the slaughter among them. Munro's soldiers had had but little of that
+hand to hand fighting in which men's blood becomes heated and all
+thought of danger is lost in the fierce desire to kill. Their losses
+had been caused by the storm of cannonball and bullet which had swept
+through them, as, panting and breathless, they struggled up the steep
+slopes, incapable of answering the fire of the enemy. They had had their
+triumph, indeed, as the Imperial regiments broke and fled before their
+advance; but although proud that they at least had succeeded in a day
+when failure was general, there was not a man but regretted that he had
+not come within push of pike of the enemy.
+
+Malcolm Graheme had passed scatheless through the fray--a good fortune
+that had attended but few of his brother officers. His uncle was badly
+wounded, and several of his friends had fallen. Of the men who had
+marched from Denmark but a year before scarce a third remained in the
+ranks, and although the regiment had been strengthened by the breaking
+up of two or three of the weaker battalions and their incorporation
+with the other Scottish regiments, it was now less than half its former
+strength. While Gustavus and Wallenstein had been facing each other at
+Nuremberg the war had continued without interruption in other parts, and
+the Swedes and their allies had gained advantages everywhere except in
+Westphalia and Lower Saxony, where Pappenheim had more than held his own
+against Baudissen, who commanded for Gustavus; and although Wallenstein
+had checked the king he had gained no material advantages and had
+wrested no single town or fortress from his hands. Gustavus was still in
+Bavaria, nearer to Munich than he was, his garrisons still holding Ulm,
+Nordlingen, and Donauworth, its strongest fortresses.
+
+He felt sure, however, that it would be impossible for Gustavus to
+maintain at one spot the army which he had at Windsheim, and that
+with so many points to defend he would soon break it up into separate
+commands. He resolved then to wait until he did so, and then to sweep
+down upon Northern Germany, and so by threatening the king's line of
+retreat to force him to abandon Bavaria and the south and to march to
+meet him.
+
+At present he was in no position to risk a battle, for he had already
+detached 4000 men to reinforce Holk, whom he had sent with 10,000
+to threaten Dresden. The 13,000 Bavarians who were with him under
+Maximilian had separated from him on his way to Forsheim, and on
+arriving at that place his army numbered but 17,000 men, while Gustavus
+had more than 40,000 gathered at Windsheim.
+
+Gustavus, on his part, determined to carry out his former projects, to
+march against Ingolstadt, which he had before failed to capture, and
+thence to penetrate into Upper Austria. But fearful lest Wallenstein,
+released from his presence, should attempt to recover the fortresses in
+Franconia, he despatched half his force under Duke Bernhard to prevent
+the Imperial general from crossing the Rhine. Could he succeed in
+doing this he would be in a position to dictate terms to the emperor in
+Vienna.
+
+On the 12th of October he reached Neuberg, on the Danube, and halted
+there, awaiting the arrival of his siege train from Donauworth.
+While making the most vigorous exertions to press on the necessary
+arrangements for his march against Vienna he received the most urgent
+messages to return to Saxony. Not only, as he was told, had Wallenstein
+penetrated into that province, but he was employing all his influence to
+detach its elector from the Protestant cause, and there was great fear
+that the weak prince would yield to the solicitations of Wallenstein and
+to his own jealousy of the King of Sweden.
+
+No sooner, in fact, had Gustavus crossed the Danube than Wallenstein
+moved towards Schweinfurt, and by so doing drew to that place the
+Swedish army under the command of Duke Bernhard. He then suddenly
+marched eastward at full speed, capturing Bamberg, Baireuth, and
+Culmbach, and pushed on to Colberg.
+
+The town was captured, but the Swedish Colonel Dubatel, who was really
+a Scotchman, by name M'Dougal, a gallant and brilliant officer, threw
+himself with his dragoons into the castle, which commanded the town, and
+defended it so resolutely against the assaults of Wallenstein that
+Duke Bernhard had time to march to within twenty miles of the place.
+Wallenstein then raised the siege, marched east to Kronach, and then
+north to Weida, on the Elster. Thence he pressed on direct to Leipzig,
+which he besieged at once; and while the main body of his troops were
+engaged before the city, others took possession of the surrounding towns
+and fortresses.
+
+Leipzig held out for only two days, and after its capture Wallenstein
+marched to Merseburg, where he was joined by the army under Pappenheim.
+Thus reinforced he was in a position to capture the whole of Saxony. The
+elector, timid and vacillating, was fully conscious of his danger and
+the solicitations of Wallenstein to break off from his alliance with the
+King of Sweden and to join the Imperialists were strongly seconded by
+Marshal Von Arnheim, his most trusted councillor, who was an intimate
+friend of the Imperialist general.
+
+It was indeed a hard decision which Gustavus was called upon to make. On
+the one hand Vienna lay almost within his grasp, for Wallenstein was
+now too far north to interpose between him and the capital. On the other
+hand, should the Elector of Saxony join the Imperialists, his position
+after the capture of Vienna would be perilous in the extreme. The
+emperor would probably leave his capital before he arrived there, and
+the conquest would, therefore, be a barren one. Gustavus reluctantly
+determined to abandon his plan, and to march to the assistance of
+Saxony.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII THE DEATH OF GUSTAVUS
+
+
+The determination of Gustavus to march to the assistance of Saxony once
+taken, he lost not a moment in carrying it into effect. General Banner,
+whom he greatly trusted, was unfortunately suffering from a wound, and
+until he should recover he appointed the Prince Palatine of Burkenfeldt
+to command a corps 12,000 strong which he determined to leave on
+the Danube; then strengthening the garrisons of Augsburg, Rain, and
+Donauworth, he set out with the remainder of his army on his march to
+Saxony.
+
+From Donauworth he marched to Nuremberg, stayed there forty-eight hours
+to recover the fortress of Lauf, and, having forced the garrison of that
+place to surrender at discretion, pushed on with all possible speed to
+Erfurt, which he had fixed upon as the point of junction for his several
+corps. The Green Brigade formed a portion of the force which Gustavus
+left behind him in Bavaria under the Prince Palatine. So terribly
+weakened were the Scottish regiments by the various battles of the
+campaign, in all of which they had borne the brunt of the fighting,
+that Gustavus determined reluctantly to leave them behind for rest and
+reorganization.
+
+Hepburn, Sir James Hamilton, Sir James Ramsay, and the Marquis of
+Hamilton, who like Hepburn had quarrelled with Gustavus, left the
+Swedish army the day after they arrived at Neustadt, after marching
+away from Nuremberg. All the Scottish officers in the Swedish army
+accompanied Hepburn and his three companions along the road for a long
+German mile from Neustadt, and then parted with great grief from the
+gallant cavalier who had led them so often to victory.
+
+Malcolm Graheme did not remain behind in Bavaria with his comrades of
+the Green Brigade. Gustavus, who had taken a great fancy to the young
+Scotch officer, whose spirit of adventure and daring were in strong
+harmony with his own character, appointed him to ride on his own
+personal staff. Although he parted with regret from his comrades,
+Malcolm was glad to accompany the king on his northward march, for there
+was no probability of any very active service in Bavaria, and it was
+certain that a desperate battle would be fought when Gustavus and
+Wallenstein met face to face in the open field.
+
+At Erfurt Gustavus was joined by Duke Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar with his
+force, which raised his army to a strength of 20,000. The news of his
+approach had again revived the courage of the Elector of Saxony, who
+had occupied the only towns where the Elbe could be crossed, Dresden,
+Torgau, and Wittenberg--he himself, with his main army of 15,000 men,
+lying at Torgau. From him Gustavus learned that the Imperial army was
+divided into three chief corps--that of Wallenstein 12,000 strong, that
+of Pappenheim 10,000, those of Gallas and Holk united 16,000, making a
+total of 38,000 men.
+
+So great was the speed with which Gustavus had marched to Erfurt that
+Wallenstein had received no notice of his approach; and believing that
+for some time to come he should meet with no serious opposition, he had
+on the very day after the Swedes reached Erfurt despatched Gallas with
+12,000 men into Bohemia. A division of his troops was at the same time
+threatening Naumburg, whose possession would enable him to block the
+only easy road with which Gustavus could enter the country held by him.
+
+But Gustavus at Erfurt learned that Naumburg had not yet fallen, and
+marching with great rapidity reached the neighbourhood of that town
+before the Imperialists were aware that he had quitted Erfurt, and
+cutting up a small detachment of the enemy who lay in his way, entered
+the town and at once began to intrench it. Wallenstein first learned
+from the fugitives of the beaten detachment that Gustavus had arrived at
+Naumburg, but as his own position lay almost centrally between Naumburg
+and Torgau, so long as he could prevent the Swedes and Saxons from
+uniting, he felt safe; for although together they would outnumber him,
+he was superior in strength to either if alone. The Imperialist general
+believed that Gustavus intended to pass the winter at Naumburg, and he
+had therefore no fear of an immediate attack.
+
+In order to extend the area from which he could draw his supplies
+Wallenstein despatched Pappenheim to secure the fortress of Halle; for
+although that town had been captured the fortress held out, and barred
+the main road to the north. From Halle Pappenheim was to proceed to the
+relief of Cologne, which was menaced by the enemy.
+
+Having done this, Wallenstein withdrew from the line of the Saale and
+prepared to distribute his army in winter quarters in the towns of the
+district, he himself with a portion of the force occupying the little
+town of Lutzen. But Gustavus had no idea of taking up his quarters for
+the winter at Naumburg; and he proposed to the Elector of Saxony that if
+he would march to Eilenberg, midway to Leipzig, he himself would make
+a detour to the south round Wallenstein's position and join him there.
+Without waiting to receive the answer of the elector, Gustavus, leaving
+a garrison in Naumburg, set out at one o'clock in the morning on the
+5th of November on his march; but before he had proceeded nine miles he
+learned from a number of gentlemen and peasants favourable to the
+cause that Pappenheim had started for Halle, that the remainder of
+the Imperial army lay dispersed among the towns and villages of the
+neighbourhood, and that Wallenstein himself was at Lutzen.
+
+Gustavus called his generals together and informed them of the news.
+Learning that Lutzen was but five miles distant--as it turned out, a
+mistaken piece of information, as it was nearly twice as far--he ordered
+that the men should take some food, and then wheeling to the left, push
+on towards Lutzen.
+
+It was not until some time later that Wallenstein learned from the
+Imperial scouts that Gustavus was upon him. It was then nearly five
+o'clock in the evening, and darkness was at hand. Considering the heavy
+state of the roads, and the fact that Gustavus would have in the last
+three miles of his march to traverse a morass crossed by a bridge over
+which only two persons could pass abreast, he felt confident that the
+attack could not be made until the following morning.
+
+Mounted messengers were sent in all directions to bring up his troops
+from the villages in which they were posted, and in the meantime the
+troops stationed around Lutzen were employed in preparing obstacles to
+hinder the advance of the Swedes. On either side of the roads was a low
+swampy country intersected with ditches, and Wallenstein at once set his
+men to work to widen and deepen these ditches, which the troops as they
+arrived on the ground were to occupy. All night the troops laboured at
+this task.
+
+In the meantime Gustavus had found the distance longer and the
+difficulties greater than he had anticipated; the roads were so heavy
+that it was with difficulty that the artillery and ammunition wagons
+could be dragged along them, and the delay caused by the passage of the
+morass was very great.
+
+Indeed the passage would have been scarcely possible had the men of an
+Imperial regiment of cuirassiers and a battalion of Croats, who were
+posted in a village on the further side of the morass, defended it; but
+instead of doing so they fell back to an eminence in the rear of the
+village, and remained there quietly until, just as the sun set, the
+whole Swedish army got across. The cuirassiers and Croats were at once
+attacked and put to flight; but as darkness was now at hand it was
+impossible for Gustavus to make any further advance, and the army was
+ordered to bivouac as it stood. The state of the roads had defeated the
+plans of Gustavus. Instead of taking the enemy by surprise, as he had
+hoped, and falling upon them scattered and disunited, the delays which
+had occurred had given Wallenstein time to bring up all his forces, and
+at daybreak Gustavus would be confronted by a force nearly equal to
+his own, and occupying a position very strongly defended by natural
+obstacles.
+
+Before the day was won, Pappenheim, for whom Wallenstein would have sent
+as soon as he heard of the Swedish advance, might be on the field,
+and in that case the Imperialists would not only have the advantage of
+position but also that of numbers. It was an anxious night, and
+Gustavus spent the greater part of it in conversation with his generals,
+especially Kniphausen and Duke Bernhard.
+
+The former strongly urged that the army should repass the morass and
+march, as originally intended, to effect a junction with the Saxons.
+He pointed out that the troops were fatigued with their long and weary
+march during the day, and would have to fight without food, as it had
+been found impossible to bring up the wagons with the supplies; he
+particularly urged the point that Pappenheim would arrive on the field
+before the victory could be won. But Gustavus was of opinion that the
+disadvantages of retreat were greater than those of action. The troops,
+hungry, weary, and dispirited, would be attacked as they retired, and
+he believed that by beginning the action early the Imperialists could be
+defeated before Pappenheim could return from Halle.
+
+Gustavus proposed to move forward at two o'clock in the morning; but
+fate was upon this occasion against the great Swedish leader. Just as on
+the previous day the expected length of the march and the heavy state of
+the roads had prevented him from crushing Wallenstein's scattered army,
+so now a thick fog springing up, making the night so dark that a soldier
+could not see the man standing next to him, prevented the possibility of
+movement, and instead of marching at two o'clock in the morning it was
+nine before the sun cleared away the fog sufficiently to enable the
+army to advance. Then, after addressing a few stirring words to his men,
+Gustavus ordered the advance towards Chursitz, the village in front of
+them.
+
+The king himself led the right wing, consisting of six regiments of
+Swedes, supported by musketeers intermingled with cavalry. The left,
+composed of cavalry and infantry intermixed, was commanded by Duke
+Bernhard. The centre, consisting of four brigades of infantry supported
+by the Scottish regiments under Henderson, was commanded by Nicholas
+Brahe, Count of Weissenburg.
+
+The reserves behind each of these divisions were formed entirely of
+cavalry, commanded on the right by Bulach, in the centre by Kniphausen,
+and on the left by Ernest, Prince of Anhalt. The field pieces, twenty
+in number, were disposed to the best advantage between the wings. Franz
+Albert of Lauenburg, who had joined the army the day before, rode by
+the king. A short halt was made at Chursitz, where the baggage was left
+behind, and the army then advanced against the Imperialists, who at once
+opened fire.
+
+Wallenstein had posted his left so as to be covered by a canal, while
+his right was protected by the village of Lutzen. On some rising ground
+to the left of that village, where there were several windmills, he
+planted fourteen small pieces of cannon, while to support his front,
+which was composed of the musketeers in the ditches on either side of
+the road, he planted a battery of seven heavy pieces of artillery.
+
+The main body of his infantry he formed into four massive brigades,
+which were flanked on both sides by musketeers intermixed with cavalry.
+Count Coloredo commanded on the left, Holk on the right, Terzky in the
+centre.
+
+As the Swedish army advanced beyond Chursitz the seven heavy pieces
+of artillery on the side of the road opened upon them, doing much
+execution, while their own lighter guns could not reply effectively. The
+Swedes pressed forward to come to close quarters. The left wing, led
+by Duke Bernhard, was the first to arrive upon the scene of action.
+Gallantly led by the duke his men forced the ditches, cleared the road,
+charged the deadly battery, killed or drove away the gunners, and rushed
+with fury on the Imperialist right.
+
+Holk, a resolute commander, tried in vain to stem the assault; the
+ardour of the Swedes was irresistible, and they scattered, one after
+the other, his three brigades. The battle seemed already lost when
+Wallenstein himself took his place at the head of the fourth brigade,
+and fell upon the Swedes, who were disordered by the rapidity and ardour
+of their charge, while at the same moment he launched three regiments of
+cavalry on their flanks.
+
+The Swedes fought heroically but in vain; step by step they were driven
+back, the battery was recaptured, and the guns, which in the excitement
+of the advance the captors had omitted to spike, were retaken by the
+Imperialists.
+
+In the meantime on the right the king had also forced the road, and had
+driven from the field the Croats and Poles opposed to him, and he was on
+the point of wheeling his troops to fall on the flank of the Imperialist
+centre when one of Duke Bernhard's aides-de-camp dashed up with the news
+that the left wing had fallen back broken and in disorder.
+
+Leaving to Count Stalhaus to continue to press the enemy, Gustavus,
+accompanied by his staff, rode at full gallop to the left at the head of
+Steinboch's regiment of dragoons. Arrived on the spot he dashed to the
+front at a point where his men had not yet been forced back across the
+road, and riding among them roused them to fresh exertions. By his side
+were Franz Albert of Lauenberg and a few other followers. But his pace
+had been so furious that Steinboch's dragoons had not yet arrived. As
+he urged on his broken men Gustavus was struck in the shoulder by a
+musketball. He reeled in his saddle, but exclaimed, “It is nothing,” and
+ordered them to charge the enemy with the dragoons. Malcolm Graheme and
+others on his staff hesitated, but the king exclaimed, “Ride all,
+the duke will see to me.” The cavalry dashed forward, and the king,
+accompanied only by Franz Albert, Duke of Lauenberg, turned to leave the
+field, but he had scarcely moved a few paces when he received another
+shot in the back. Calling out to Franz Albert that it was all over with
+him, the mortally wounded king fell to the ground.
+
+Franz Albert, believing the battle lost, galloped away; the king's
+page alone remained with the dying man. A minute later three Austrian
+cuirassiers rode up, and demanded the name of the dying man. The page
+Leubelfing refused to give it, and firing their pistols at him they
+stretched him mortally wounded beside the dying king. Gustavus then, but
+with difficulty, said who he was. The troopers leapt from their horses
+and stripped his rich armour from him, and then, as they saw Steinboch's
+dragoons returning from their charge, they placed their pistols close to
+the king's head and fired, and then leaping on their horses fled.
+
+Great was the grief when Malcolm, happening to ride near the body,
+recognized it as that of the king. An instant later a regiment of
+Imperialist cavalry charged down, and a furious fight took place for
+some minutes over the king's body. It was, however, at last carried
+off by the Swedes, so disfigured by wounds and by the trampling of the
+horses in the fray as to be unrecognizable.
+
+The news of the fall of their king, which spread rapidly through
+the ranks, so far from discouraging the Swedes, inspired them with a
+desperate determination to avenge his death, and burning with fury they
+advanced against the enemy, yet preserving the most perfect steadiness
+and order in their ranks.
+
+In vain did Wallenstein and his officers strive to stem the attack of
+the left wing, their bravery and skill availed nothing to arrest that
+furious charge. Regiment after regiment who strove to bar their way
+were swept aside, the guns near the windmills were captured and turned
+against the enemy. Step by step the Imperial right wing was forced back,
+and the centre was assailed in flank by the guns from the rising ground,
+while Stalhaus with the right wing of the Swedes attacked them on their
+left.
+
+Hopeless of victory the Imperialist centre was giving way, when the
+explosion of one of their powder wagons still further shook them.
+Attacked on both flanks and in front the Imperialist centre wavered,
+and in a few minutes would have been in full flight. The Swedish victory
+seemed assured, when a mighty trampling of horse was heard, and emerging
+from the smoke Pappenheim with eight regiments of Imperial cavalry
+dashed into the fray.
+
+Pappenheim had already captured the citadel of Halle when Wallenstein's
+messenger reached him. To wait until his infantry, who were engaged in
+plundering, could be collected, and then to proceed at their pace to
+the field of battle, would be to arrive too late to be of service, and
+Pappenheim instantly placed himself at the head of his eight regiments
+of magnificent cavalry, and galloped at full speed to the battlefield
+eighteen miles distant. On the way he met large numbers of flying Poles
+and Croats, the remnants of the Austrian left, who had been driven from
+the field by Gustavus; these he rallied, and with them dashed upon the
+troops of Stalhaus who were pursuing them, and forced them backward.
+The relief afforded to the Imperialists by this opportune arrival
+was immense, and leaving Pappenheim to deal with the Swedish right,
+Wallenstein rallied his own right on the centre, and opposed a
+fresh front to the advancing troops of Duke Bernhard and Kniphausen.
+Inspirited by the arrival of the reinforcements, and burning to turn
+what had just appeared a defeat into a victory, the Imperialists
+advanced with such ardour that the Swedes were driven back, the guns on
+the hills recaptured, and it seemed that in this terrible battle victory
+was at last to declare itself in favour of the Imperialists.
+
+It needed only the return of Pappenheim from the pursuit of the Swedish
+right to decide the day, but Pappenheim was not to come. Though driven
+back by the first impetuous charge of the Imperial cavalry, the Swedes
+under Stalhaus, reinforced by the Scottish regiments under Henderson,
+stubbornly opposed their further attacks.
+
+While leading his men forward Pappenheim fell with two musketballs
+through his body. While lying there the rumour for the first time
+reached him that Gustavus had been killed. When upon inquiry the truth
+of the rumour was confirmed, the eyes of the dying man lighted up.
+
+“Tell Wallenstein,” he said to the officer nearest to him, “that I am
+lying here without hope of life, but I die gladly, knowing, as I now
+know, that the irreconcilable enemy of my faith has fallen on the same
+day.”
+
+The Imperialists, discouraged by the fall of their general, could
+not withstand the ardour with which the Swedes and Scottish infantry
+attacked them, and the cavalry rode from the field. Elsewhere the
+battle was still raging. Wallenstein's right and centre had driven Count
+Bernhard, the Duke of Brahe, and Kniphausen across that desperately
+contested road, but beyond this they could not force them, so stubbornly
+and desperately did they fight. But Stalhaus and his men, refreshed and
+invigorated by their victory over Pappenheim's force, again came up
+and took their part in the fight. Wallenstein had no longer a hope of
+victory, he fought now only to avoid defeat. The sun had already set,
+and if he could but maintain his position for another half hour darkness
+would save his army.
+
+He fell back across the road again, fighting stubbornly and in good
+order, and extending his line to the left to prevent Stalhaus from
+turning his flank; and in this order the terrible struggle continued
+till nightfall. Both sides fought with splendid bravery. The Swedes,
+eager for the victory once again apparently within their grasp, pressed
+on with fury, while the Imperialists opposed them with the most stubborn
+obstinacy.
+
+Seven times did Piccolomini charge with his cavalry upon the advancing
+Swedes. Seven times was his horse shot under him, but remounting each
+time, he drew off his men in good order, and in readiness to dash
+forward again at the first opportunity. The other Imperialist generals
+fought with equal courage and coolness, while Wallenstein, present
+wherever the danger was thickest, animated all by his courage and
+coolness. Though forced step by step to retire, the Imperialists never
+lost their formation, never turned their backs to the foe; and thus
+the fight went on till the darkness gathered thicker and thicker, the
+combatants could no longer see each other, and the desperate battle came
+to an end.
+
+In the darkness, Wallenstein drew off his army and fell back to Leipzig,
+leaving behind him his colours and all his guns. In thus doing he threw
+away the opportunity of turning what his retreat acknowledged to be a
+defeat into a victory on the following morning, for scarcely had he left
+the field when the six regiments of Pappenheim's infantry arrived from
+Halle. Had he held his ground he could have renewed the battle in the
+morning, with the best prospects of success, for the struggle of
+the preceding day had been little more than a drawn battle, and the
+accessions of fresh troops should have given him a decided advantage
+over the weary Swedes. The newcomers, finding the field deserted, and
+learning from the wounded lying thickly over it that Wallenstein had
+retreated, at once marched away.
+
+In the Swedish camp there was no assurance whatever that a victory had
+been gained, for nightfall had fallen on the Imperialists fighting as
+stubbornly as ever. The loss of the king, the master spirit of the war,
+dispirited and discouraged them, and Duke Bernhard and Kniphausen held
+in the darkness an anxious consultation as to whether the army should
+not at once retreat to Weissenburg. The plan was not carried out, only
+because it was considered that it was impracticable--as the army would
+be exposed to destruction should the Imperialists fall upon them while
+crossing the terrible morass in their rear.
+
+The morning showed them that the Imperialists had disappeared, and that
+the mighty struggle had indeed been a victory for them--a victory won
+rather by the superior stubbornness with which the Swedish generals held
+their ground during the night, while Wallenstein fell back, than to the
+splendid courage with which the troops had fought on the preceding
+day. But better far would it have been for the cause which the Swedes
+championed, that they should have been driven a defeated host from the
+field of Lutzen, than that they should have gained a barren victory at
+the cost of the life of their gallant monarch--the soul of the struggle,
+the hope of Protestantism, the guiding spirit of the coalition against
+Catholicism as represented by Ferdinand of Austria.
+
+The losses in the battle were about equal, no less than 9000 having
+fallen upon each side--a proportion without precedent in any battle of
+modern times, and testifying to the obstinacy and valour with which on
+both sides the struggle was maintained from early morning until night
+alone terminated it.
+
+It is said, indeed, that every man, both of the yellow regiments of
+Swedish guards and of the blue regiments, composed entirely of English
+and Scotchmen, lay dead on the field. On both sides many men of high
+rank were killed. On the Swedish side, besides Gustavus himself, fell
+Count Milo, the Count of Brahe, General Uslar, Ernest Prince of
+Anhalt, and Colonels Gersdorf and Wildessein. On the Imperialist
+side Pappenheim, Schenk, Prince and Abbot of Fulda, Count Berthold
+Wallenstein, General Brenner, Issolani, general of the Croats, and six
+colonels were killed. Piccolomini received ten wounds, but none of them
+were mortal.
+
+Holk was severely wounded, and, indeed, so close and desperate was the
+conflict, that it is said there was scarcely a man in the Imperial army
+who escaped altogether without a wound.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII WOUNDED
+
+
+A controversy, which has never been cleared up, has long raged as to the
+death of Gustavus of Sweden; but the weight of evidence is strongly in
+favour of those who affirm that he received his fatal wound, that in
+the back, at the hand of Franz Albert of Lauenburg. The circumstantial
+evidence is, indeed, almost overwhelming. By birth the duke was the
+youngest of four sons of Franz II, Duke of Lauenburg. On his mother's
+side he was related to the Swedish royal family, and in his youth lived
+for some time at the court of Stockholm.
+
+Owing to some impertinent remarks in reference to Gustavus he fell into
+disfavour with the queen, and had to leave Sweden. On attaining manhood
+he professed the Catholic faith, entered the Imperial army, obtained
+the command of a regiment, attached himself with much devotion to
+Wallenstein, and gained the confidence of that general. While the
+negotiations between the emperor and Wallenstein were pending Franz
+Albert was employed by the latter in endeavouring to bring about a
+secret understanding with the court of Dresden.
+
+When Gustavus was blockaded in Nuremberg by Wallenstein Franz Albert
+left the camp of the latter and presented himself in that of Gustavus as
+a convert to the Reformed Religion and anxious to serve as a volunteer
+under him. No quarrel or disagreement had, so far as is known, taken
+place between him and Wallenstein, nor has any explanation ever been
+given for such an extraordinary change of sides, made, too, at a moment
+when it seemed that Gustavus was in a position almost desperate. By his
+profession of religious zeal he managed to win the king's heart, but
+Oxenstiern, when he saw him, entertained a profound distrust of him, and
+even warned the king against putting confidence in this sudden convert.
+
+Gustavus, however, naturally frank and open in disposition, could not
+believe that treachery was intended, and continued to treat him with
+kindness. After the assault made by Gustavus upon Wallenstein's position
+Franz Albert quitted his camp, saying that he was desirous of raising
+some troops for his service in his father's territory. He rejoined him,
+however, with only his personal followers, on the very day before the
+battle of Lutzen, and was received by Gustavus with great cordiality,
+although the absence of his retainers increased the general doubts as to
+his sincerity.
+
+He was by the king's side when Gustavus received his first wound. He
+was riding close behind him when the king received his second and fatal
+wound in the back, and the moment the king had fallen he rode away from
+the field, and it is asserted that it was he who brought the news of the
+king's death to Wallenstein.
+
+Very soon after the battle he exchanged the Swedish service for the
+Saxon, and some eighteen months later he re-embraced the Roman Catholic
+faith and re-entered the Imperial army.
+
+A stronger case of circumstantial evidence could hardly be put together,
+and it would certainly seem as if Lauenburg had entered the Swedish
+service with the intention of murdering the king. That he did not carry
+out his purpose during the attack on the Altenburg was perhaps due to
+the fact that Gustavus may not have been in such a position as to afford
+him an opportunity of doing so with safety to himself.
+
+It is certainly curious that after that fight he should have absented
+himself, and only rejoined on the eve of the battle of Lutzen. The only
+piece of evidence in his favour is that of Truchsess, a chamberlain of
+the king, who, affirmed that he saw the fatal shot fired at a distance
+of ten paces from the king by an Imperial officer, Lieutenant General
+Falkenberg, who at once turned and fled, but was pursued and cut down by
+Luckau, master of horse of Franz Albert.
+
+The general opinion of contemporary writers is certainly to the effect
+that the King of Sweden was murdered by Franz Albert; but the absolute
+facts must ever remain in doubt.
+
+On the morning after the battle Wallenstein, having been joined by
+Pappenheim's infantry, sent a division of Croats back to the battlefield
+to take possession of it should they find that the Swedes had retired;
+but on their report that they still held the ground he retired at once
+from Leipzig, and, evacuating Saxony, marched into Bohemia, leaving the
+Swedes free to accomplish their junction with the army of the Elector,
+thus gaining the object for which they had fought at Lutzen.
+
+After the death of the king, Malcolm Graheme, full of grief and rage at
+the loss of the monarch who was loved by all his troops, and had treated
+him with special kindness, joined the soldiers of Duke Bernhard, and
+took part in the charge which swept back the Imperialists and captured
+the cannon on the hill. At the very commencement of the struggle his
+horse fell dead under him, and he fought on foot among the Swedish
+infantry; but when the arrival of Pappenheim on the field enabled the
+Imperialists again to assume the offensive, Malcolm, having picked up
+a pike from the hands of a dead soldier, fought shoulder to shoulder in
+the ranks as the Swedes, contesting stubbornly every foot of the ground,
+were gradually driven back towards the road.
+
+Suddenly a shot struck him; he reeled backwards a few feet, strove to
+steady himself and to level his pike, and then all consciousness left
+him, and he fell prostrate. Again and again, as the fortune of the
+desperate fray wavered one way or the other, did friend and foe pass
+over the place where he lay.
+
+So thickly strewn was the field with dead that the combatants in their
+desperate struggle had long ceased to pick their way over the fallen,
+but trampled ruthlessly upon and over them as, hoarsely shouting their
+battle cry, they either pressed forward after the slowly retreating foe
+or with obstinate bravery strove to resist the charges of the enemy.
+When Malcolm recovered his consciousness all was still, save that
+here and there a faint moan was heard from others who like himself lay
+wounded on the battlefield. The night was intensely dark, and Malcolm's
+first sensation was that of bitter cold.
+
+It was indeed freezing severely, and great numbers of the wounded who
+might otherwise have survived were frozen to death before morning; but
+a few, and among these were Malcolm, were saved by the frost. Although
+unconscious of the fact, he had been wounded in two places. The first
+ball had penetrated his breastpiece and had entered his body, and a few
+seconds later another ball had struck him in the arm. It was the first
+wound which had caused his insensibility; but from the second, which
+had severed one of the principal veins in the arm, he would have bled to
+death had it not been for the effects of the cold. For a time the life
+blood had flowed steadily away; but as the cold increased it froze and
+stiffened on his jerkin, and at last the wound was staunched.
+
+It was none too soon, for before it ceased to flow Malcolm had lost a
+vast quantity of blood. It was hours before nature recovered from the
+drain. Gradually and slowly he awoke from his swoon. It was some time
+before he realized where he was and what had happened, then gradually
+his recollection of the fight returned to him.
+
+“I remember now,” he murmured to himself, “I was fighting with the
+Swedish infantry when a shot struck me in the body, I think, for I
+seemed to feel a sudden pain like a red hot iron. Who won the day, I
+wonder? How bitterly cold it is! I feel as if I were freezing to death.”
+
+So faint and stiff was he, partly from loss of blood, partly from being
+bruised from head to foot by being trampled on again and again as the
+ranks of the combatants swept over him, that it was some time before
+he was capable of making the slightest movement. His left arm was, he
+found, entirely useless; it was indeed firmly frozen to the ground; but
+after some difficulty he succeeded in moving his right, and felt for the
+flask which had hung from his girdle.
+
+So frozen and stiff were his fingers that he was unable to unbuckle the
+strap which fastened it; but, drawing his dagger, he at last cut through
+this, and removing the stopper of the flask, took a long draught of
+the wine with which it was filled. The relief which it afforded him was
+almost instantaneous, and he seemed to feel life again coursing in his
+veins.
+
+After a while he was sufficiently restored to be enabled to get from his
+havresack some bread and meat which he had placed there after finishing
+his breakfast on the previous morning. He ate a few mouthfuls, took
+another long draught of wine, and then felt that he could hope to hold
+on until morning. He was unable to rise even into a sitting position,
+nor would it have availed him had he been able to walk, for he knew not
+where the armies were lying, nor could he have proceeded a yard in any
+direction without falling over the bodies which so thickly strewed the
+ground around him.
+
+Though in fact it wanted but two hours of daylight when he recovered
+consciousness, the time appeared interminable; but at last, to his
+delight, a faint gleam of light spread across the sky. Stronger and
+stronger did it become until the day was fairly broken. It was another
+hour before he heard voices approaching. Almost holding his breath he
+listened as they approached, and his heart gave a throb of delight as he
+heard that they were speaking in Swedish. A victory had been won, then,
+for had it not been so, it would have been the Imperialists, not the
+Swedes, who would have been searching the field of battle.
+
+“There are but few alive,” one voice said, “the cold has finished the
+work which the enemy began.”
+
+Malcolm, unable to rise, lifted his arm and held it erect to call the
+attention of the searchers; it was quickly observed.
+
+“There is some one still alive,” the soldier exclaimed, “an officer,
+too; by his scarf and feathers he belongs to the Green Brigade.”
+
+“These Scotchmen are as hard as iron,” another voice said; “come, bring
+a stretcher along.”
+
+They were soon by the side of Malcolm.
+
+“Drink this, sir,” one said, kneeling beside him and placing a flask of
+spirits to his lips; “that will warm your blood, I warrant, and you must
+be well nigh frozen.”
+
+Malcolm took a few gulps at the potent liquor, then he had strength to
+say:
+
+“There is something the matter with my left arm, I can't move it, and I
+think I am hit in the body.”
+
+“You are hit in the body, sure enough,” the man said, “for there is
+a bullet hole through your cuirass, and your jerkin below it is all
+stained with blood. You have been hit in the left arm too, and the blood
+is frozen to the ground; but we will soon free that for you. But before
+trying to do that we will cut open the sleeve of your jerkin and bandage
+your arm, or the movement may set it off bleeding again, and you have
+lost a pool of blood already.”
+
+Very carefully the soldiers did their work, and then placing Malcolm on
+the stretcher carried him away to the camp. Here the surgeons were all
+hard at work attending to the wounded who were brought in. They had
+already been busy all night, as those whose hurts had not actually
+disabled them found their way into the camp. As he was a Scotch officer
+he was carried to the lines occupied by Colonel Henderson with his
+Scotch brigade. He was known to many of the officers personally, and no
+time was lost in attending to him. He was nearly unconscious again by
+the time that he reached the camp, for the movement had caused the wound
+in his body to break out afresh.
+
+His armour was at once unbuckled, and his clothes having been cut the
+surgeons proceeded to examine his wounds. They shook their heads as
+they did so. Passing a probe into the wound they found that the ball,
+breaking one of the ribs in its course, had gone straight on. They
+turned him gently over.
+
+“Here it is,” the surgeon said, producing a flattened bullet. The
+missile indeed had passed right through the body and had flattened
+against the back piece, which its force was too far spent to penetrate.
+
+“Is the case hopeless, doctor?” one of the officers who was looking on
+asked.
+
+“It is well nigh hopeless,” the doctor said, “but it is just possible
+that it has not touched any vital part. The lad is young, and I judge
+that he has not ruined his constitution, as most of you have done, by
+hard drinking, so that there is just a chance for him. There is nothing
+for me to do but to put a piece of lint over the two holes, bandage it
+firmly, and leave it to nature. Now let me look at his arm.
+
+“Ah!” he went on as he examined the wound, “he has had a narrow escape
+here. The ball has cut a vein and missed the principal artery by an
+eighth of an inch. If that had been cut he would have bled to death in
+five minutes. Evidently the lad has luck on his side, and I begin to
+think we may save him if we can only keep him quiet.”
+
+At the earnest request of the surgeons tents were brought up and a
+hospital established on some rising ground near the field of battle for
+the serious cases among the wounded, and when the army marched away
+to join the Saxons at Leipzig a brigade was left encamped around the
+hospital.
+
+Here for three weeks Malcolm lay between life and death. The quantity of
+blood he had lost was greatly in his favour, as it diminished the risk
+of inflammation, while his vigorous constitution and the life of fatigue
+and activity which he had led greatly strengthened his power. By a
+miracle the bullet in its passage had passed through without injuring
+any of the vital parts; and though his convalescence was slow it was
+steady, and even at the end of the first week the surgeons were able to
+pronounce a confident opinion that he would get over it.
+
+But it was not until the end of the month that he was allowed to move
+from his recumbent position. A week later and he was able to sit up. On
+the following day, to his surprise, the Count of Mansfeld strode into
+his tent.
+
+“Ah! my young friend,” he exclaimed, “I am glad indeed to see you so
+far recovered. I came to Leipzig with the countess and my daughter;
+for Leipzig at present is the centre where all sorts of political
+combinations are seething as in a cooking pot. It is enough to make one
+sick of humanity and ashamed of one's country when one sees the greed
+which is displayed by every one, from the highest of the princes down to
+petty nobles who can scarce set twenty men in the field.
+
+“Each and all are struggling to make terms by which he may better
+himself, and may add a province or an acre, as the case may be, to his
+patrimony at the expense of his neighbours. Truly I wonder that the
+noble Oxenstiern, who represents Sweden, does not call together the
+generals and troops of that country from all parts and march away
+northward, leaving these greedy princes and nobles to fight their own
+battles, and make the best terms they may with their Imperial master.
+
+“But there, all that does not interest you at present; but I am so full
+of spleen and disgust that I could not help letting it out. We arrived
+there a week since, and of course one of our first inquiries was for
+you, and we heard to our grief that the Imperialists had shot one of
+their bullets through your body and another through your arm. This, of
+course, would have been sufficient for any ordinary carcass; but I knew
+my Scotchman, and was not surprised when they told me you were mending
+fast.
+
+“I had speech yesterday with an officer who had ridden over from this
+camp, and he told me that the doctors said you were now convalescent,
+but would need repose and quiet for some time before you could again
+buckle on armour. The countess, when I told her, said at once, 'Then we
+will take him away back with us to Mansfeld.' Thekla clapped her hands
+and said, 'That will be capital! we will look after him, and he shall
+tell us stories about the wars.'
+
+“So the thing was settled at once. I have brought over with me a horse
+litter, and have seen your surgeon, who says that although it will be
+some weeks before you can sit on a horse without the risk of your wound
+bursting out internally, there is no objection to your progression in a
+litter by easy stages; so that is settled, and the doctor will write to
+your colonel saying that it will be some months before you are fit for
+duty, and that he has therefore ordered you change and quiet.
+
+“You need not be afraid of neglecting your duty or of getting out of the
+way of risking your life in harebrained ventures, for there will be no
+fighting till the spring. Everyone is negotiating at present, and you
+will be back with your regiment before fighting begins again. Well, what
+do you say?”
+
+“I thank you, indeed,” Malcolm replied. “It will of all things be the
+most pleasant; the doctor has told me that I shall not be fit for duty
+until the spring, and I have been wondering how ever I should be able to
+pass the time until then.”
+
+“Then we will be off without a minute's delay,” the count said. “I sent
+off the litter last night and started myself at daybreak, promising the
+countess to be back with you ere nightfall, so we have no time to lose.”
+
+The news soon spread that Malcolm Graheme was about to leave the camp,
+and many of the Scottish officers came in to say adieu to him; but time
+pressed, and half an hour after the arrival of the count he started
+for Leipzig with Malcolm in a litter swung between two horses. As they
+travelled at a foot pace Malcolm did not find the journey uneasy, but
+the fresh air and motion soon made him drowsy, and he was fast asleep
+before he had left the camp an hour, and did not awake until the sound
+of the horses' hoofs on stone pavements told him that they were entering
+the town of Leipzig.
+
+A few minutes later he was lying on a couch in the comfortable
+apartments occupied by the count, while the countess with her own hands
+was administering refreshments to him, and Thekla was looking timidly
+on, scarce able to believe that this pale and helpless invalid was the
+stalwart young Scottish soldier of whose adventures she was never weary
+of talking.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX A PAUSE IN HOSTILITIES
+
+
+Never had Malcolm Graheme spent a more pleasant time than the two months
+which he passed at Mansfeld. Travelling by very easy stages there he
+was so far convalescent upon his arrival that he was able to move about
+freely and could soon ride on horseback. For the time the neighbourhood
+of Mansfeld was undisturbed by the peasants or combatants on either
+side, and the count had acted with such vigour against any parties of
+brigands and marauders who might approach the vicinity of Mansfeld,
+or the country under his control, that a greater security of life and
+property existed than in most other parts of Germany. The ravages made
+by war were speedily effaced, and although the peasants carried on their
+operations in the fields without any surety as to who would gather the
+crops, they worked free from the harassing tyranny of the petty bands of
+robbers.
+
+As soon as he was strong enough Malcolm rode with the count on his
+visits to the different parts of his estates, joined in several parties
+got up to hunt the boar in the hills, or to make war on a small scale
+against the wolves which, since the outbreak of the troubles, had vastly
+increased in number, committing great depredations upon the flocks and
+herds, and rendering it dangerous for the peasants to move between their
+villages except in strong parties.
+
+The evenings were passed pleasantly and quietly. The countess would
+read aloud or would play on the zither, with which instrument she would
+accompany herself while she sang. Thekla would sit at her embroidery and
+would chat merrily to Malcolm, and ask many questions about Scotland
+and the life which the ladies led in that, as she asserted, “cold and
+desolate country.” Sometimes the count's chaplain would be present and
+would gravely discuss theological questions with the count, wearying
+Malcolm and Thekla so excessively, that they would slip away from the
+others and play checkers or cards on a little table in a deep oriel
+window where their low talk and laughter did not disturb the discussions
+of their elders.
+
+Once Malcolm was absent for two days on a visit to the village in
+the mountains he had so much aided in defending. Here he was joyfully
+received, and was glad to find that war had not penetrated to the quiet
+valley, and that prosperity still reigned there. Malcolm lingered at
+Mansfeld for some time after he felt that his strength was sufficiently
+restored to enable him to rejoin his regiment; but he knew that until
+the spring commenced no great movement of troops would take place, and
+he was so happy with his kind friends, who treated him completely as one
+of the family, that he was loath indeed to tear himself away. At last
+he felt that he could no longer delay, and neither the assurances of the
+count that the Protestant cause could dispense with his doughty services
+for a few weeks longer, or the tears of Thekla and her insistance that
+he could not care for them or he would not be in such a hurry to leave,
+could detain him longer, and mounting a horse with which the count had
+presented him he rode away to rejoin his regiment.
+
+No military movements of importance had taken place subsequent to the
+battle of Lutzen. Oxenstiern had laboured night and day to repair as far
+as possible the effects of the death of Gustavus. He had been left by
+the will of the king regent of Sweden until the king's daughter, now a
+child of six years old, came of age, and he at once assumed the supreme
+direction of affairs. It was essential to revive the drooping courage
+of the weaker states, to meet the secret machinations of the enemy, to
+allay the jealousy of the more powerful allies, to arouse the friendly
+powers, France in particular, to active assistance, and above all to
+repair the ruined edifice of the German alliance and to reunite the
+scattered strength of the party by a close and permanent bond of union.
+
+Had the emperor at this moment acted wisely Oxenstiern's efforts would
+have been in vain. Wallenstein, farseeing and broad minded, saw the
+proper course to pursue, and strongly urged upon the emperor the
+advisability of declaring a universal amnesty, and of offering
+favourable conditions to the Protestant princes, who, dismayed at the
+loss of their great champion, would gladly accept any proposals which
+would ensure the religious liberty for which they had fought; but the
+emperor, blinded by this unexpected turn of fortune and infatuated by
+Spanish counsels, now looked to a complete triumph and to enforce his
+absolute will upon the whole of Germany.
+
+Instead, therefore, of listening to the wise counsels of Wallenstein he
+hastened to augment his forces. Spain sent him considerable supplies,
+negotiated for him with the ever vacillating Elector of Saxony, and
+levied troops for him in Italy. The Elector of Bavaria increased his
+army, and the Duke of Lorraine prepared again to take part in the
+struggle which now seemed to offer him an easy opportunity of increasing
+his dominions. For a time the Elector of Saxony, the Duke of Brunswick,
+and many others of the German princes wavered; but when they saw that
+Ferdinand, so far from being disposed to offer them favourable terms to
+detach them from the league, was preparing with greater vigour than
+ever to overwhelm them, they perceived that their interest was to remain
+faithful to their ally, and at a great meeting of princes and deputies
+held at Heilbronn the alliance was re-established on a firmer basis.
+
+Before, however, the solemn compact was ratified scarce one of the
+German princes and nobles but required of Oxenstiern the gratification
+of private greed and ambition, and each bargained for some possession
+either already wrested or to be afterwards taken from the enemy. To the
+Landgrave of Hesse the abbacies of Paderborn, Corvey, Munster, and Fulda
+were promised, to Duke Bernhard of Weimar the Franconian bishoprics,
+to the Duke of Wurtemburg the ecclesiastical domains and the Austrian
+counties lying within his territories, all to be held as fiefs of
+Sweden.
+
+Oxenstiern, an upright and conscientious man, was disgusted at the
+greed of these princes and nobles who professed to be warring solely
+in defence of their religious liberties, and he once exclaimed that he
+would have it entered in the Swedish archives as an everlasting memorial
+that a prince of the German empire made a request for such and such
+territory from a Swedish nobleman, and that the Swedish noble complied
+with the request by granting him German lands. However, the negotiations
+were at last completed, the Saxons marched towards Lusatia and Silesia
+to act in conjunction with Count Thurn against the Austrians in that
+quarter, a part of the Swedish army was led by the Duke of Weimar into
+Franconia, and the other by George, Duke of Brunswick, into Westphalia
+and Lower Saxony.
+
+When Gustavus had marched south from Ingolstadt on the news of
+Wallenstein's entry into Saxony he had left the Count Palatine of
+Birkenfeld and General Banner to maintain the Swedish conquests
+in Bavaria. These generals had in the first instance pressed their
+conquests southward as far as Lake Constance; but towards the end of
+the year the Bavarian General Altringer pressed them with so powerful an
+army that Banner sent urgent requests to Horn to come to his assistance
+from Alsace, where he had been carrying all before him. Confiding his
+conquests to the Rhinegrave Otto Ludwig, Horn marched at the head of
+seven thousand men towards Swabia. Before he could join Banner,
+however, Altringer had forced the line of the Lech, and had received
+reinforcements strong enough to neutralize the aid brought to Banner by
+Horn. Deeming it necessary above all things to bar the future progress
+of the enemy, Horn sent orders to Otto Ludwig to join him with all the
+troops still remaining in Alsace; but finding himself still unable to
+resist the advance of Altringer, he despatched an urgent request to Duke
+Bernhard, who had captured Bamberg and the strong places of Kronach
+and Hochstadt in Franconia, to come to his assistance. The duke at once
+quitted Bamberg and marched southward, swept a strong detachment of the
+Bavarian army under John of Werth from his path, and pressing on reached
+Donauwurth in March 1633.
+
+Malcolm had rejoined his regiment, which was with Duke Bernhard, just
+before it advanced from Bamberg and was received with a hearty welcome
+by his comrades, from whom he had been separated nine months, having
+quitted them three months before the battle of Lutzen.
+
+The officers were full of hope that Duke Bernhard was going to strike
+a great blow. Altringer was away on the shore of Lake Constance facing
+Horn, Wallenstein was in Bohemia. Between Donauworth and Vienna were
+but the four strong places of Ingolstadt, Ratisbon, Passau, and Linz.
+Ingolstadt was, the duke knew, commanded by a traitor who was ready to
+surrender. Ratisbon had a Protestant population who were ready to open
+their gates. It seemed that the opportunity for ending the war by a
+march upon Vienna, which had been snatched by Wallenstein from Gustavus
+just when it appeared in his grasp, was now open to Duke Bernhard.
+But the duke was ambitious, his demands for Franconia had not yet been
+entirely complied with by Oxenstiern, and he saw an opportunity to
+obtain his own terms. The troops under his orders were discontented,
+owing to the fact that their pay was many months in arrear, and private
+agents of the duke fomented this feeling by assuring the men that their
+general was with them and would back their demands. Accordingly they
+refused to march further until their demands were fully satisfied. The
+Scotch regiments stood apart from the movement, though they too were
+equally in arrear with their pay. Munro and the officers of the Brigade
+chafed terribly at this untimely mutiny just when the way to Vienna
+appeared open to them. Duke Bernhard forwarded the demands of the
+soldiers to Oxenstiern, sending at the same time a demand on his own
+account, first that the territory of the Franconian bishoprics should at
+once be erected into a principality in his favour, and secondly, that
+he should be nominated commander-in-chief of all the armies fighting in
+Germany for the Protestant cause with the title of generalissimo.
+
+Oxenstiern was alarmed by the receipt of the mutinous demands of the
+troops on the Danube, and was disgusted when he saw those demands
+virtually supported by their general. His first thought was to dismiss
+Duke Bernhard from the Swedish service; but he saw that if he did so the
+disaffection might spread, and that the duke might place himself at
+the head of the malcontents and bring ruin upon the cause. He therefore
+agreed to bestow at once the Franconian bishoprics upon him, and gave a
+pledge that Sweden would defend him in that position.
+
+He declined to make him generalissimo of all the armies, but appointed
+him commander-in-chief of the forces south of the Maine. The duke
+accepted this modification, and had no difficulty in restoring order in
+the ranks of his army. But precious months had been wasted before this
+matter was brought to a conclusion, and the month of October arrived
+before the duke had completed all his preparations and was in a position
+to move forward.
+
+While the delays had been going on Altringer, having been joined by the
+army of the Duke of Feria, quitted the line of the Danube, in spite
+of Wallenstein's absolute order not to do so, and, evading Horn and
+Birkenfeldt, marched into Alsace. The Swedish generals, however, pressed
+hotly upon him, and finally drove him out of Alsace. Ratisbon being left
+open by Altringer's disobedience to Wallenstein's orders, Duke Bernhard
+marched upon that city without opposition, and laid siege to it.
+Maximilian of Bavaria was himself there with a force sufficient to
+defend the city had he been supported by the inhabitants; but a large
+majority of the people were Protestants, and, moreover, bitterly hated
+the Bavarians, who had suppressed their rights as a free city.
+
+Maximilian wrote urgently to the emperor and to Wallenstein, pledging
+himself to maintain Ratisbon if he could receive a reinforcement of
+5000 men. The emperor was powerless; he had not the men to send, but he
+despatched to Wallenstein, one after another, seven messengers,
+urging him at all hazards to prevent the fall of so important a place.
+Wallenstein replied to the order that he would do all in his power, and
+in presence of the messengers ordered the Count of Gallas to march
+with 12,000 men on Ratisbon, but privately furnished the general with
+absolute orders, forbidding him on any account to do anything which
+might bring on an action with the duke.
+
+Wallenstein's motives in so acting were, as he afterwards assured the
+emperor, that he was not strong enough to divide his army, and that he
+could best cover Vienna by maintaining a strong position in Bohemia, a
+policy which was afterwards justified by the event. Ratisbon resisted
+for a short time; but, finding that the promised relief did not arrive,
+it capitulated on the 5th of November, Maximilian having left the town
+before the surrender.
+
+The duke now pushed on towards Vienna, and captured Straubing and
+Plattling. John of Werth, who was posted here, not being strong enough
+to dispute the passage of the Isar, fell back towards the Bohemian
+frontier, hoping to meet the troops which the emperor had urged
+Wallenstein to send to his aid, but which never came. Duke Bernhard
+crossed the Isar unopposed, and on the 12th came within sight of Passau.
+
+So far Wallenstein had not moved; he had seemed to comply with the
+emperor's request to save Ratisbon, but had seemed only, and had not
+set a man in motion to reinforce John of Werth. He refused, in fact, to
+fritter away his army. Had he sent Gallas with 12,000 men to join John
+of Werth, and had their united forces been, as was probable, attacked
+and defeated by the Swedes, Wallenstein would have been too weak to save
+the empire. Keeping his army strong he had the key of the position in
+his hands.
+
+He had fixed upon Passau as the point beyond which Duke Bernhard should
+not be allowed to advance, and felt that should he attack that city he
+and his army were lost. In front of him was the Inn, a broad and deep
+river protected by strongly fortified places; behind him John of Werth,
+a bitterly hostile country, and the river Isar. On his left would
+be Wallenstein himself marching across the Bohemian forest. When,
+therefore, he learned that Duke Bernhard was hastening on from the Isar
+towards Passau he put his army in motion and marched southward, so as to
+place himself in the left rear of the duke. This movement Duke Bernhard
+heard of just when he arrived in sight of Passau, and he instantly
+recognized the extreme danger of his position, and perceived with his
+usual quickness of glance that to be caught before Passau by Wallenstein
+and John of Werth would be absolute destruction. A moment's hesitation
+and the Swedish army would have been lost. Without an hour's delay he
+issued the necessary orders, and the army retraced its steps with all
+speed to Ratisbon, and not stopping even there marched northward
+into the Upper Palatinate, to defend that conquered country against
+Wallenstein even at the cost of a battle.
+
+But Wallenstein declined to fight a battle there. He had but one army,
+and were that army destroyed, Duke Bernhard, with the prestige of
+victory upon him, could resume his march upon Vienna, which would then
+be open to him. Therefore, having secured the safety of the capital, he
+fell back again into winter quarters in Bohemia. Thus Ferdinand again
+owed his safety to Wallenstein, and should have been the more grateful
+since Wallenstein had saved him in defiance of his own orders.
+
+At the time he fully admitted in his letters to Wallenstein that the
+general had acted wisely and prudently, nevertheless he was continually
+listening to the Spaniards, the Jesuits, and the many envious of
+Wallenstein's great position, and hoping to benefit by his disgrace,
+and, in spite of all the services his great general had rendered him,
+was preparing to repeat the humiliation which he had formerly laid upon
+him and again to deprive him of his command.
+
+Wallenstein was not ignorant of the intrigue against him. Vast as
+were his possessions, his pride and ambition were even greater. A
+consciousness of splendid services rendered and of great intellectual
+power, a belief that the army which had been raised by him and was to
+a great extent paid out of his private funds, and which he had so often
+led to victory, was devoted to him, and to him alone, excited in his
+mind the determination to resist by force the intriguers who dominated
+the bigoted and narrow minded emperor, and, if necessary, to hurl the
+latter from his throne.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX FRIENDS IN TROUBLE
+
+
+One day in the month of December, when Malcolm Graheme was with his
+regiment on outpost duty closely watching the Imperialists, a countryman
+approached.
+
+“Can you direct me to Captain Malcolm Graheme, who, they tell me,
+belongs to this regiment?”
+
+“You have come to the right man,” Malcolm said. “I am Captain
+Graheme--what would you with me?”
+
+“I am the bearer of a letter to you,” the man said, and taking off his
+cap he pulled out the lining and brought out a letter hidden beneath it.
+
+“I am to ask for some token from you by which it may be known that it
+has been safely delivered.”
+
+Malcolm cut with his dagger the silk with which the letter was fastened.
+It began:
+
+“From the Lady Hilda, Countess of Mansfeld, to Captain Malcolm Graheme
+of Colonel Munro's Scottish regiment.--My dear friend,--I do not know
+whether you have heard the misfortune which has fallen upon us. The
+town and castle of Mansfeld were captured two months since by a sudden
+assault of the Imperialists, and my dear husband was grievously wounded
+in the defence. He was brought hither a prisoner, and Thekla and I also
+carried here. As the count still lies ill with his wounds he is not
+placed in a prison, but we are treated as captives and a close watch
+is kept upon us. The count is threatened with the forfeiture of all his
+possessions unless he will change sides and join the Imperialists, and
+some of his estates have been already conferred upon other nobles as a
+punishment for the part he has taken.
+
+“Were my husband well and free he would treat the offers with scorn,
+believing that the tide will turn and that he will recover his
+possessions. Nor even were he certain of their perpetual forfeiture
+would he desert the cause of Protestantism. Moreover, the estates which
+I brought him in marriage lie in the north of Pomerania, and the income
+there from is more than ample for our needs. But the emperor has ordered
+that if the count remain contumacious Thekla shall be taken from us and
+placed in a convent, where she will be forced to embrace Catholicism,
+and will, when she comes of age, be given in marriage to some adherent
+of the emperor, who will with her receive the greater portion of her
+father's lands.
+
+“She is now sixteen years old, and in another year will be deemed
+marriageable. My heart is broken at the thought, and I can scarce see
+the paper on which I write for weeping. I know not why I send to you,
+nor does the count know that I am writing, nor does it seem possible
+that any aid can come to us, seeing that we are here in the heart
+of Bohemia, and that Wallenstein's army lies between us and you. But
+somehow in my heart I have a hope that you may aid us, and at any rate I
+know that you will sympathize with us greatly. I feel sure that if there
+be any mode in which we may be aided it will be seized by your ready
+wit. And now adieu! This letter will be brought to you by a messenger
+who will be hired by a woman who attends us, and who has a kind heart
+as well as an eye to her own interests. Send back by the messenger
+some token which she may pass on to me, that I may know that you have
+received it. Send no written answer, for the danger is too great.”
+
+Malcolm twisted off two or three links of the chain which had long
+before been presented to him by the count, and then, until relieved from
+duty, paced up and down, slowly revolving in his mind what could best
+be done to aid his friends. His mind was at last made up, and when his
+company was called in he went to his colonel and asked for leave of
+absence, stating his reasons for wishing to absent himself from the
+regiment.
+
+“It is a perilous business, Malcolm,” Colonel Munro said. “I have scarce
+a handful of the friends with whom I joined Gustavus but three years and
+a half ago remaining, and I can ill spare another; nevertheless I will
+not stay you in your enterprise. The Count of Mansfeld has been a steady
+ally of ours, and is one of the few who has appeared to have at heart
+the cause of Protestantism rather than of personal gain.
+
+“Moreover, he is as you say a friend of yours, and has shown you real
+kindness in time of need. Therefore go, my boy, and Heaven be with you!
+It is not likely that there will be any more serious fighting this
+year. Wallenstein lies inactive, negotiating now with Saxony, now with
+Oxenstiern. What are his aims and plans Heaven only knows; but at any
+rate we have no right to grumble at the great schemer, for ever since
+Lutzen he has kept the emperor's best army inactive. Make it a point,
+Malcolm, to find out, so far as you can, what is the public opinion in
+Bohemia as to his real intentions. If you can bring back any information
+as to his plans you will have done good service to the cause, however
+long your absence from the camp may be.”
+
+That evening Malcolm packed up his armour, arms, court suits, and
+valuables, and sent them away to the care of his friend the syndic of
+the clockmakers of Nuremberg, with a letter requesting him to keep them
+in trust for him until he returned; and in the event of his not arriving
+to claim them in the course of six months, to sell them, and to devote
+the proceeds to the assistance of sick or wounded Scottish soldiers.
+Then he purchased garments suitable for a respectable craftsman, and
+having attired himself in these, with a stout sword banging from his
+leathern belt, a wallet containing a change of garments and a number
+of light tools used in clockmaking, with a long staff in his hand, and
+fifty ducats sewed in the lining of the doublet, he set out on foot on
+his journey.
+
+It was nigh three weeks from the time when he started before he arrived
+at Prague, for not only had he to make a very long detour to avoid the
+contending armies, but he was forced to wait at each considerable town
+until he could join a company of travellers going in the same direction,
+for the whole country so swarmed with disbanded soldiers, plunderers,
+and marauding bands that none thought of traversing the roads save in
+parties sufficiently strong to defend themselves and their property.
+None of those with whom he journeyed suspected Malcolm to be aught but
+what he professed himself--a craftsman who had served his time at a
+clockmaker's in Nuremberg, and who was on his way to seek for employment
+in Vienna.
+
+During his three years and a half residence in Germany he had come
+to speak the language like a native, and, indeed, the dialect of the
+different provinces varied so widely, that, even had he spoken the
+language with less fluency, no suspicion would have arisen of his being
+a foreigner. Arrived at Prague, his first care was to hire a modest
+lodging, and he then set to work to discover the house in which the
+Count of Mansfeld was lying as a prisoner.
+
+This he had no difficulty in doing without exciting suspicion, for the
+count was a well known personage, and he soon found that he and his
+family had apartments in a large house, the rest of which was occupied
+by Imperialist officers and their families. There was a separate
+entrance to the portion occupied by the count, and a sentry stood always
+at the door.
+
+The day after his arrival Malcolm watched the door from a distance
+throughout the whole day, but none entered or came out. The next morning
+he resumed his watch at a much earlier hour, and presently had the
+satisfaction of seeing a woman in the attire of a domestic issue
+from the door. She was carrying a basket, and was evidently bent upon
+purchasing the supplies for the day. He followed her to the market, and,
+after watching her make her purchases, he followed her until, on her
+return, she entered a street where but few people were about. There he
+quickened his pace and overtook her.
+
+“You are the attendant of the Countess of Mansfeld, are you not?” he
+said.
+
+“I am,” she replied; “but what is that to you?”
+
+“I will tell you presently,” Malcolm replied, “but in the first place
+please inform me whether you are her only attendant, and in the next
+place how long you have been in her service. I can assure you,” he went
+on, as the woman, indignant at thus being questioned by a craftsman who
+was a stranger to her, tossed her head indignantly, and was about to
+move on, “that I ask not from any impertinent curiosity. Here is a ducat
+as a proof that I am interested in my questions.”
+
+The woman gave him a quick and searching glance; she took the piece
+of money, and replied more civilly. “I am the only attendant on the
+countess. I cannot be said to be in her service, since I have been
+placed there by the commandant of the prison, whither the count will
+be moved in a few days, but I have been with them since their arrival
+there, nigh three months since.”
+
+“Then you are the person whom I seek. I am he to whom a certain letter
+which you wot of was sent, and who returned by the messenger as token
+that he received it two links of this chain.”
+
+The woman started as he spoke, and looked round anxiously to see that
+they were not observed; then she said hurriedly:
+
+“For goodness sake, sir, if you be he, put aside that grave and earnest
+look, and chat with me lightly and laughingly, so that if any observe us
+speaking they will think that you are trying to persuade me that my face
+has taken your admiration. Not so very difficult a task, methinks,” she
+added coquettishly, acting the part she had indicated.
+
+“By no means,” Malcolm replied laughing, for the girl was really good
+looking, “and were it not that other thoughts occupy me at present you
+might well have another captive to look after; and now tell me, how is
+it possible for me to obtain an interview with the count?”
+
+“And the countess, and the Fraulein Thekla,” the girl said laughing,
+“for I suppose you are the young Scottish officer of whom the young
+countess is always talking. I don't see that it is possible.”
+
+“Twenty ducats are worth earning,” Malcolm said quietly.
+
+“Very well worth earning,” the woman replied, “but a costly day's work
+if they lead to a prison and flogging, if not to the gallows.”
+
+“But we must take care that you run no risk,” Malcolm said. “Surely such
+a clever head as I see you have can contrive some way for me to get in.”
+
+“Yes; it might be managed,” the girl said thoughtfully. “The orders were
+strict just at first, but seeing that the count cannot move from his
+couch, and that the countess and the fraulein have no motive in seeking
+to leave him, the strictness has been relaxed. The orders of the sentry
+are stringent that neither of the ladies shall be allowed to set foot
+outside the door, but I do not think they have any orders to prevent
+others from going in and out had they some good excuse for their visit.”
+
+“Then it is not so impossible after all,” Malcolm said with a smile,
+“for I have an excellent excuse.
+
+“What is that?” the woman asked.
+
+“The clock in the count's chamber has stopped, and it wearies him to lie
+there and not know how the time passes, so he has requested you to fetch
+in a craftsman to set it going again.”
+
+“A very good plan,” the girl said. “There is a clock, and it shall stop
+this afternoon. I will find out from the sentry as I go in whether he
+has any orders touching the admission of strangers. If he has I will
+go across to the prison and try and get a pass for you. I shall come to
+market in the morning.”
+
+So saying, with a wave of her hand she tripped on towards the house,
+which was now near at hand, leaving Malcolm to arrange his plans for
+next day. His first care was to purchase a suit of clothes such as would
+be worn by a boy of the class to which he appeared to belong. Then he
+went to one of the small inns patronized by the peasants who brought
+their goods into market, and without difficulty bargained with one of
+them for the purchase of a cart with two oxen, which were to remain at
+the inn until he called for them. Then he bought a suit of peasant's
+clothes, after which, well satisfied with the day's work, he returned to
+his lodging. In the morning he again met the servant.
+
+“It was well I asked,” she said, “for the sentry had orders to prevent
+any, save nobles and officers, from passing in. However, I went to the
+prison, and saw one of the governor's deputies, and told him that the
+count was fretting because his clock had stopped, and, as while I said
+so I slipped five ducats the countess had given me for the purpose into
+his hand, he made no difficulty about giving me the pass. Here it is.
+Now,” she said, “I have earned my twenty ducats.”
+
+“You have earned them well,” Malcolm replied, handing them to her.
+
+“Now mind,” she said, “you must not count on me farther. I don't know
+what you are going to do, and I don't want to know. I have run quite
+a risk enough as it is, and mean, directly the count is lodged in the
+prison, to make my way home, having collected a dowry which will enable
+me to buy a farm and marry my bachelor, who has been waiting for me for
+the last three years. His father is an old curmudgeon, who has declared
+that his son shall never marry except a maid who can bring as much money
+as he will give him. I told Fritz that if he would trust to my wits and
+wait I would in five years produce the dowry. Now I have treble the sum,
+and shall go off and make Fritz happy.”
+
+“He is a lucky fellow,” Malcolm said laughing. “It is not every one who
+gets beauty, wit, and wealth all together in a wife.”
+
+“You are a flatterer,” the girl laughed; “but for all that I think
+myself that Fritz is not unfortunate.”
+
+“And now tell me,” Malcolm asked, “at what time is the sentry generally
+changed?”
+
+“At sunrise, at noon, at sunset, and at midnight,” the girl replied;
+“but what is that to you?”
+
+“Never mind;” Malcolm laughed; “you know you don't want to be told what
+I'm going to do. I will tell you if you like.”
+
+“No, no,” the girl replied hurriedly. “I would rather be able to always
+take my oath on the holy relics that I know nothing about it.”
+
+“Very well,” Malcolm replied; “then this afternoon I will call.”
+
+Having hidden away under his doublet the suit of boy's clothes, and with
+the tools of his trade in a small basket in his hand, Malcolm presented
+himself at three o'clock in the afternoon to the sentry at the door
+leading to the count's apartments. The soldier glanced at the pass and
+permitted him to enter without remark.
+
+The waiting maid met him inside and conducted him upstairs, and ushered
+him into a spacious apartment, in which the count was lying on a couch,
+while the countess and Thekla sat at work beside him. She then retired
+and closed the door after her. The count and Thekla looked with surprise
+at the young artisan, but the countess ran to meet him, and threw her
+arms round his neck as if she had been his mother, while Thekla gave a
+cry of delight as she recognized him.
+
+“Welcome a thousand times! Welcome, my brave friend!” the countess
+exclaimed. “What dangers must you not have encountered on your way
+hither to us! The count and Thekla knew not that I had written to
+you, for I feared a failure; and when I learned yesterday that you had
+arrived I still kept silence, partly to give a joyful surprise to my
+lord today, partly because, if the governor called, I was sure that this
+child's telltale face would excite his suspicion that something unusual
+had happened.”
+
+“How imprudent!” the count said, holding out his hand to Malcolm. “Had
+I known that my wife was sending to you I would not have suffered her to
+do so, for the risk is altogether too great, and yet, indeed, I am truly
+glad to see you again.”
+
+Thekla gave Malcolm her hand, but said nothing. She had now reached an
+age when girls feel a strange shyness in expressing their feelings; but
+her hand trembled with pleasure as she placed it in Malcolm's, and her
+cheek flushed hotly as, in accordance with the custom of the times, she
+presented it to his kiss.
+
+“Now,” the count said, “do not let us waste time; tell us quickly by
+what miracle you have arrived here, and have penetrated to what is
+really my prison. You must be quick, for we have much to say, and your
+visit must be a short one for every third day the governor of the prison
+pays me a visit to see how I am getting on, and I expect that he will be
+here ere long.”
+
+“Then,” Malcolm said, “I had best prepare for his coming, for assuredly
+I am not going to hurry away.”
+
+So saying, he lifted down the great clock which stood on a bracket on
+the wall, and placed it on a side table. “I am a clockmaker,” he said,
+“and am come to put this machine, whose stopping has annoyed you sadly,
+into order.”
+
+So saying, he took some tools from his basket, removed the works of the
+clock, and, taking them in pieces, laid them on the table.
+
+“I spent much of my time at Nuremberg,” he said, in answer to the
+surprised exclamations of the count, “in learning the mysteries of
+horology, and can take a clock to pieces and can put it together again
+with fair skill. There, now, I am ready, and if the governor comes he
+will find me hard at work. And now I will briefly tell you how I got
+here; then I will hear what plans you may have formed, and I will tell
+you mine.”
+
+“For myself, I have no plans,” the count said. “I am helpless, and
+must for the present submit to whatever may befall me. That I will not
+renounce the cause of my religion you may be sure; as for my wife, we
+know not yet whether, when they remove me to the fortress, they will
+allow her to accompany me or not. If they do, she will stay with me, but
+it is more likely that they will not. The emperor is merciless to those
+who oppose him. They will more likely keep her under their eye here or
+in Vienna. But for ourselves we care little; our anxiety is for Thekla.
+It is through her that they are striking us. You know what they have
+threatened if I do not abandon the cause of Protestantism. Thekla is to
+be placed in a convent, forced to become a Catholic, and married to the
+man on whom the emperor may please to bestow my estates.”
+
+“I would rather die, father, than become a Catholic,” Thekla exclaimed
+firmly.
+
+“Yes, dear!” the count said gently, “but it is not death you have to
+face; with a fresh and unbroken spirit, it were comparatively easy to
+die, but it needs an energy and a spirit almost superhuman to resist the
+pressure which may be placed on those who are committed to a convent.
+The hopelessness, the silence, the gloom, to say nothing of threats,
+menaces, and constant and unremitting pressure, are sufficient to break
+down the firmest resolution. The body becomes enfeebled, the nerves
+shattered, and the power of resistance enfeebled. No, my darling, brave
+as you are in your young strength, you could not resist the influence
+which would be brought to bear upon you.”
+
+“Then it is clear,” Malcolm said cheerfully, “that we must get your
+daughter out of the clutches of the emperor and the nuns.”
+
+“That is what I have thought over again and again as I have lain here
+helpless, but I can see no means of doing so. We have no friends in the
+city, and, could the child be got safely out of this place, there is
+nowhere whither she could go.”
+
+“And it is for that I have sent for you,” the countess said. “I knew
+that if it were in any way possible you would contrive her escape and
+aid her to carry it out.”
+
+“Assuredly I will, my dear countess,” Malcolm said. “You only wanted a
+friend outside, and now you have got one. I see no difficulty about it.”
+
+At this moment the door suddenly opened; the waiting maid put in her
+head and exclaimed, “The governor is alighting at the door.” Malcolm at
+once seated himself at the side table and began oiling the wheels of the
+clock, while the countess and Thekla took up their work again and seated
+themselves, as before, by the couch of the count. A moment later the
+attendant opened the door and in a loud voice announced the Baron of
+Steinburg.
+
+The governor as he entered cast a keen glance at Malcolm, and then
+bowing ceremoniously approached the count and inquired after his health,
+and paid the usual compliments to the countess. The count replied
+languidly that he gained strength slowly, while the countess said
+quietly that he had slept but badly and that his wound troubled him
+much. It was well for Thekla that she was not obliged to take part
+in the conversation, for she would have found it impossible to speak
+quietly and indifferently, for every nerve was tingling with joy at
+Malcolm's last words. The prospect had seemed so hopeless that her
+spirits had sunk to the lowest ebb. Her mother had done her best to
+cheer her, but the count, weakened by pain and illness, had all along
+taken the most gloomy view. He had told himself that it was better for
+the girl to submit to her fate than to break her heart like a wild bird
+beating out its life against the bars of its cage, and he wished to show
+her that neither he nor the world would blame her for yielding to the
+tremendous pressure which would be put upon her.
+
+For himself, he would have died a thousand times rather than renounce
+his faith; but he told himself that Thekla was but a child, that women
+cared little for dogmas, and that she would learn to pray as sincerely
+in a Catholic as in a Protestant church, without troubling her mind as
+to whether there were gross abuses in the government of the church, in
+the sale of absolutions, or errors in abstruse doctrines. But to Thekla
+it had seemed impossible that she could become a Catholic.
+
+The two religions stood in arms against each other; Catholics and
+Protestants differed not only in faith but in politics. In all things
+they were actively and openly opposed to each other, and the thought
+that she might be compelled to abjure her faith was most terrible to the
+girl; and she was firmly resolved that, so long as her strength lasted
+and her mind was unimpaired, she would resist whatever pressure might
+be placed upon her, and would yield neither to menaces, to solitary
+confinement, or even to active cruelty. The prospect, however; had
+weighed heavily upon her mind. Her father had appeared to consider any
+escape impossible; her mother had said nothing of her hopes; and the
+words which Malcolm had spoken, indicating something like a surety of
+freeing her from her terrible position, filled her with surprise and
+delight.
+
+“Whom have you here?” the governor asked, indicating Malcolm by a motion
+of the head.
+
+“It is a craftsman from Nuremberg. The clock had stopped, and the count,
+with whom the hours pass but slowly, fretted himself at not being able
+to count them; so I asked our attendant to bring hither a craftsman
+to put it in order, first sending her with a note to you asking for
+permission for him to come; as you were out your deputy signed the
+order.”
+
+“He should not have done so,” the baron said shortly, “for the orders
+are strict touching the entry of any here. However, as he has taken the
+clock to pieces, he can put it together again.” So saying he went over
+to the table where Malcolm was at work and stood for a minute or two
+watching him. The manner in which Malcolm fitted the wheels into their
+places, filing and oiling them wherever they did not run smoothly,
+satisfied him that the youth was what he seemed.
+
+“You are young to have completed your apprenticeship,” he said.
+
+“It is expired but two months, sir,” Malcolm said, standing up
+respectfully.
+
+“Under whom did you learn your trade?” the governor asked; “for I have
+been in Nuremberg and know most of the guild of clockmakers by name.”
+
+“Under Jans Boerhoff, the syndic of the guild,” Malcolm replied.
+
+“Ah!” the baron said shortly; “and his shop is in--”
+
+“The Cron Strasse,” Malcolm said promptly in answer to the implied
+question.
+
+Quite satisfied now, the baron turned away and conversed a few minutes
+with the count, telling him that as the surgeon said he could now be
+safely removed he would in three days be transferred to an apartment in
+the fortress.
+
+“Will the countess be permitted to accompany me?” the count asked.
+
+“That I cannot tell you,” the baron replied. “We are expecting a
+messenger with his majesty's orders on the subject tomorrow or next day.
+I have already informed you that, in his solicitude for her welfare, his
+majesty has been good enough to order that the young countess shall
+be placed in the care of the lady superior of the Convent of St.
+Catherine.”
+
+A few minutes later he left the room. Not a word was spoken in the room
+until the sound of horse's hoofs without told that he had ridden off.
+
+As the door closed the countess and Thekla had dropped their work and
+sat anxiously awaiting the continuance of the conversation. The count
+was the first to speak.
+
+“How mean you, Malcolm? How think you it possible that Thekla can
+escape, and where could she go?”
+
+“I like not to make the proposal,” Malcolm said gravely, “nor under
+any other circumstances should I think of doing so; but in a desperate
+position desperate measures must be adopted. It is impossible that in
+your present state you can escape hence, and the countess will not leave
+you; but what is absolutely urgent is that your daughter should be freed
+from the strait. Save myself you have no friends here; and therefore,
+count, if she is to escape it must be through my agency and she must be
+committed wholly to my care. I know it is a great responsibility; but if
+you and the countess can bring yourselves to commit her to me I swear to
+you, as a Scottish gentleman and a Protestant soldier, that I will watch
+over her as a brother until I place her in all honour in safe hands.”
+
+The count looked at the countess and at Thekla, who sat pale and still.
+
+“We can trust you, Malcolm Graheme,” he said after a pause. “There are
+few, indeed, into whose hands we would thus confide our daughter; but we
+know you to be indeed, as you say, a Scottish gentleman and a Protestant
+soldier. Moreover, we know you to be faithful, honourable, and true.
+Therefore we will, seeing that there is no other mode of escape from the
+fate which awaits her, confide her wholly to you. And now tell us what
+are your plans?”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI FLIGHT
+
+
+“I THANK you, count, and you, dear lady,” Malcolm said gratefully, “for
+the confidence you place in me, and will carry out my trust were it to
+cost me my life. My plan is a simple one. The guard will be changed in
+half an hour's time. I have brought hither a suit of boy's garments,
+which I must pray the Countess Thekla to don, seeing that it will be
+impossible for her to sally out in her own garb. I show my pass to
+the sentry, who will deem that my companion entered with me, and is my
+apprentice, and will suppose that, since the sentry who preceded him
+suffered him to enter with me he may well pass him out without question.
+In the town I have a wagon in readiness, and shall, disguised as a
+peasant, start with it this evening. Thekla will be in the bottom
+covered with straw. We shall travel all night.
+
+“Tomorrow, when your attendant discovers that your daughter has escaped,
+she will at once take the news to the governor. The sentries will all be
+questioned, and it will be found that, whereas but one clockmaker came
+in two went out. The city will be searched and the country round scoured
+but if the horsemen overtake me they will be looking for a craftsman and
+his apprentice, and will not suspect a solitary peasant with a wagon.
+
+“The first danger over I must be guided by circumstances; but in any
+case Thekla must travel as a boy to the end of the journey, for in such
+troubled times as these it were unsafe indeed for a young girl to travel
+through Germany except under a strong escort of men-at-arms. I design
+to make my way to Nuremberg, and shall then place her in the hands of
+my good friend Jans Boerhoff, whose wife and daughters will, I am sure,
+gladly receive and care for her until the time, which I hope is not far
+off, that peace be made and you can again rejoin her.”
+
+“The plan is a good one,” the count said when Malcolm had concluded,
+“and offers every prospect of success. 'Tis hazardous, but there is no
+escape from such a strait as ours without risk. What say you, wife?”
+
+“Assuredly I can think of nothing better. But what say you, Thekla?
+Are you ready to run the risks, the danger, and the hardships of such a
+journey under the protection only of this brave Scottish gentleman?”
+
+“I am ready, mother,” Thekla said quickly, “but I wish--I wish”--and she
+hesitated.
+
+“You wish you could go in your own garments, Thekla, with jewels on
+your fingers and a white horse to carry you on a pillion behind your
+protector,” the count said with a smile, for his spirits had risen
+with the hope of his daughter's escape from the peril in which she was
+placed. “It cannot be, Thekla. Malcolm's plan must be carried out to the
+letter, and I doubt not that you will pass well as a 'prentice boy. But
+your mother must cut off that long hair of yours; I will keep it, my
+child, and will stroke it often and often in my prison as I have done
+when it has been on your head; your hair may be long again before I next
+see you.”
+
+His eyes filled with tears as he spoke, and Thekla and the countess both
+broke into a fit of crying. Leaving them by themselves, Malcolm returned
+to his work, and in half an hour had replaced the machinery of the clock
+and had set it in motion, while a tender conversation went on between
+the count and countess and their daughter. By this time the sun had
+set, and the attendant entered and lighted the candles in the apartment,
+saying, as she placed one on the table by Malcolm, “You must need a
+light for your work.” No sooner had she left the room than Malcolm said:
+
+“I would not hurry your parting, countess, but the sooner we are off now
+the better.”
+
+Without a word the countess rose, and, taking the clothes which Malcolm
+produced from his doublet, retired to her chamber, followed by Thekla.
+
+“Malcolm Graheme,” the count said, “it may be that we shall not meet
+again. The emperor is not tender with obstinate prisoners, and I have no
+strength to support long hardships. Should aught happen to me I beseech
+you to watch over the happiness of my child. Had she been a year older,
+and had you been willing, I would now have solemnly betrothed her to
+you, and should then have felt secure of her future whatever may befall
+me. Methinks she will make a good wife, and though my estates may be
+forfeited by the emperor her mother's lands will make a dowry such as
+many a German noble would gladly accept with his wife.
+
+“I might betroth her to you now, for many girls are betrothed at a far
+younger age, but I would rather leave it as it is. You are young yet,
+and she in most matters is but a child, and it would be better in every
+way did she start on this adventure with you regarding you as a brother
+than in any other light. Only remember that if we should not meet again,
+and you in future years should seek the woman who is now a child as your
+wife, you have my fullest approval and consent--nay, more, that it is my
+dearest wish.”
+
+“I thank you most deeply for what you have said, count,” Malcolm replied
+gravely. “As I have seen your daughter growing up from a child I have
+thought how sweet a wife she would make, but I have put the thought from
+me, seeing that she is heiress to broad lands and I a Scottish soldier
+of fortune, whose lands, though wide enough for me to live in comfort at
+home, are yet but a mere farm in comparison with your broad estates.
+I have even told myself that as she grew up I must no longer make long
+stays in your castle, for it would be dishonourable indeed did I reward
+your kindness and hospitality by winning the heart of your daughter; but
+after what you have so generously said I need no longer fear my heart,
+and will, when the time comes, proudly remind you of your promise. For
+this journey I will put all such thoughts aside, and will regard Thekla
+as my merry playfellow of the last three years. But after I have once
+placed her in safety I shall thenceforward think of her as my wife who
+is to be, and will watch over her safety as over my greatest treasure,
+trusting that in some happy change of times and circumstances you
+yourself and the dear countess, whom I already regard almost as my
+parents, will give her to me.”
+
+“So be it,” the count said solemnly. “My blessing on you both should
+I ne'er see you again. I can meet whatever fate may be before me with
+constancy and comfort now that her future is assured--but here they
+come.”
+
+The door opened, and the countess appeared, followed by Thekla,
+shrinking behind her mother's skirts in her boyish attire.
+
+“You will pass well,” the count said gravely, for he knew that jest now
+would jar upon her. “Keep that cap well down over your eyes, and try
+and assume a little more of the jaunty and impudent air of a boy.
+Fortunately it will be dark below, and the sentry will not be able
+to mark how fair is your skin and how delicate your hands. And now
+farewell, my child. Let us not stand talking, for the quicker a parting
+is over the better. May God in heaven bless you and keep you! Malcolm
+knows all my wishes concerning you, and when I am not with you trust
+yourself to his advice and guidance as you would to mine. There, my
+darling, do not break down. You must be brave for all our sakes. Should
+the emperor hold me in durance your mother will try and join you ere
+long at Nuremberg.”
+
+While the count was embracing Thekla, as she bravely but in vain tried
+to suppress her tears, the countess opened the door, and glanced into
+the anteroom to see that all was clear and the attendant in her own
+apartment. Then she returned, kissed her daughter fondly, and placed her
+hand in Malcolm's, saying to the latter, “God bless you, dear friend!
+Take her quickly away for her sake and ours.” One last adieu and Malcolm
+and Thekla stood alone in the anteroom.
+
+“Now, Thekla,” he said firmly, “be brave, the danger is at hand, and
+your safety and escape from your fate, and my life, depend upon your
+calmness. Do you carry this basket of tools and play your part as my
+apprentice. Just as we open the door drop the basket and I will rate you
+soundly for your carelessness. Keep your head down, and do not let the
+light which swings over the door fall upon your face.”
+
+For a minute or two Thekla stood struggling to master her emotions. Then
+she said, in a quiet voice, “I am ready now,” and taking up the basket
+of tools she followed Malcolm down the stairs. Malcolm opened the door,
+and as he did so Thekla dropped the basket.
+
+“How stupid you are!” Malcolm exclaimed sharply. “How often have I told
+you to be careful! You don't suppose that those fine tools can stand
+being knocked about in that way without injury? Another time an' you are
+so careless I will give you a taste of the strap, you little rascal.”
+
+“What is all this?” the sentry asked, barring the way with his pike,
+“and who are you who are issuing from this house with so much noise? My
+orders are that none pass out here without an order from the governor.”
+
+“And such an order have I,” Malcolm said, producing the document.
+“There's the governor's seal. I have been sent for to repair the clock
+in the Count of Mansfeld's apartment, and a rare job it has been.”
+
+The sentry was unable to read, but he looked at the seal which he had
+been taught to recognize.
+
+“But there is only one seal,” he said, “and there are two of you.”
+
+“Pooh!” Malcolm said scornfully. “Dost think that when ten persons are
+admitted to pass in together the governor puts ten seals on the pass?
+You see for yourself that it is but a young boy, my apprentice. Why, the
+governor himself left scarce an hour ago, and was in the apartment with
+me while I was at work. Had it not been all right he would have hauled
+me to the prison quickly enough.”
+
+As the sentry knew that the governor had left but a short time before
+he came on guard this convinced him, and, standing aside, he allowed
+Malcolm and his companion to pass. Malcolm made his way first to the
+apartment he had occupied, where he had already settled for his lodging.
+
+Leaving Thekla below he ran upstairs, and hastily donned the suit of
+peasant's clothes, and then making the others into a bundle descended
+again, and with Thekla made his way to the quiet spot outside the city
+gates where the wagon was standing ready for a start. He had already
+paid the peasant half the sum agreed, and now handed him the remainder.
+
+“I should scarce have known you,” the peasant said, examining Malcolm by
+the light of his pinewood torch. “Why, you look like one of us instead
+of a city craftsman.”
+
+“I am going to astonish them when I get home,” Malcolm said, “and shall
+make the old folks a present of the wagon. So I am going to arrive just
+as I was when I left them.”
+
+The peasant asked no farther questions, but, handing the torch to
+Malcolm, and telling him that he would find half a dozen more in the
+wagon, he took his way back to the town, where he intended to sleep in
+the stables and to start at daybreak for his home.
+
+He thought that the transaction was a curious one; but, as he had
+been paid handsomely for his wagon, he troubled not his head about any
+mystery there might be in the matter. As soon as he had gone Malcolm
+arranged the straw in the bottom of the wagon so as to form a bed; but
+Thekla said that for the present she would rather walk with him.
+
+“It is weeks since I have been out, and I shall enjoy walking for a
+time; besides, it is all so strange that I should have no chance to
+sleep were I to lie down.”
+
+Malcolm at once consented, and taking his place at the head of the oxen,
+he started them, walking ahead to light the way and leading them by
+cords passed through their nostrils. He had not the least fear of
+pursuit for the present, for it had been arranged that the countess
+should inform their attendant that Thekla was feeling unwell, and had
+retired to bed, and the woman, whatever she might suspect, would
+take care not to verify the statement, and it would be well on in the
+following morning before her absence was discovered.
+
+Malcolm tried his best to distract Thekla's thoughts from her parents,
+and from the strange situation in which she was placed, and chatted to
+her of the events of the war since he had last seen her, of the route
+which he intended to adopt, and the prospects of peace. In two hours'
+time the girl, unaccustomed to exercise, acknowledged that she was
+tired; she therefore took her place in the wagon.
+
+Malcolm covered her up with straw and threw some sacks lightly over
+her, and then continued his journey. He travelled all night, and in the
+morning stopped at a wayside inn, where his arrival at that hour excited
+no surprise, as the peasants often travelled at night, because there was
+then less chance of their carts being seized and requisitioned by the
+troops. He only stopped a short time to water and feed the oxen, and
+to purchase some black bread and cheese. This he did, not because he
+required it, for he had an ample supply of provisions in the cart far
+more suited for Thekla's appetite than the peasant's fare, but to act
+in the usual manner, and so avoid any comment. Thekla was still asleep
+under the covering, which completely concealed her. Malcolm journeyed on
+until two miles further he came to a wood, then, drawing aside from the
+road, he unyoked the oxen and allowed them to lie down, for they had
+already made a long journey. Then he woke Thekla, who leaped up gaily
+on finding that it was broad daylight. Breakfast was eaten, and after a
+four hours' halt they resumed their way, Thekla taking her place in
+the wagon again, and being carefully covered up in such a manner that
+a passerby would not suspect that anyone was lying under the straw
+and sacks at one end of the wagon. Just at midday Malcolm heard the
+trampling of horses behind him and saw a party of cavalry coming along
+at full gallop. The leader drew rein when he overtook the wagon.
+
+“Have you seen anything,” he asked Malcolm, “of two seeming craftsmen, a
+man and a boy, journeying along the road?”
+
+Malcolm shook his head. “I have seen no one on foot since I started an
+hour since.”
+
+Without a word the soldiers went on. They had no reason, indeed,
+for believing that those for whom they were in search had taken that
+particular road. As soon as Thekla's disappearance had been discovered
+by the waiting woman she had hurried to the governor, and with much
+perturbation and many tears informed him that the young countess was
+missing, and that her couch had not been slept on. The governor had at
+once hurried to the spot. The count and countess resolutely refused to
+state what had become of their daughter.
+
+The sentries had all been strictly questioned, and it was found that the
+mender of clocks had, when he left, been accompanied by an apprentice
+whom the sentry previously on duty asserted had not entered with him.
+The woman was then closely questioned; she asserted stoutly that she
+knew nothing whatever of the affair. The count had commissioned her to
+obtain a craftsman to set the clock in order, and she had bethought her
+of a young man whose acquaintance she had made some time previously, and
+who had informed her in the course of conversation that he had come
+from Nuremberg, and was a clockmaker by trade, and was at present out of
+work. She had met him, she said, on several occasions, and as he was a
+pleasant youth and comely, when he had spoken to her of marriage she
+had not been averse, now it was plain he had deceived her; and here she
+began to cry bitterly and loudly.
+
+Her story seemed probable enough, for any friend of the count who
+had intended to carry off his daughter would naturally have begun by
+ingratiating himself with her attendant. She was, however, placed in
+confinement for a time. The count and countess were at once removed
+to the fortress. Orders were given that the town should be searched
+thoroughly, and any person answering to the description which the
+governor was able to give of the supposed clockmaker should be arrested,
+while parties of horse were despatched along all the roads with orders
+to arrest and bring to Prague any craftsman or other person accompanied
+by a young boy whom they might overtake by the way. Several innocent
+peasants with their sons were pounced upon on the roads and hauled to
+Prague; but no news was obtained of the real fugitives, who quietly
+pursued their way undisturbed further by the active search which was
+being made for them. The anger of the emperor when he heard of the
+escape of the prize he had destined for one of his favourite officers
+was extreme. He ordered the count to be treated with the greatest
+rigour, and declared all his estates and those of his wife forfeited,
+the latter part of the sentence being at present inoperative, her
+estates being in a part of the country far beyond the range of the
+Imperialist troops. The waiting maid was after some weeks' detention
+released, as there was no evidence whatever of her complicity in the
+affair.
+
+Malcolm continued his journey quietly towards the frontier of Bavaria;
+but, on arriving at a small town within a few miles of Pilsen, he
+learned that Wallenstein had fallen back with his army to that place.
+Much alarmed at the news he determined to turn off by a cross road and
+endeavour to avoid the Imperialists. He had not, however, left the place
+before a party of Imperialist horse rode in.
+
+Malcolm was at once stopped, and was told that he must accompany the
+troops to Pilsen, as they had orders to requisition all carts for the
+supply of provisions for the army. Malcolm knew that it was of no use to
+remonstrate, but, with many loud grumblings at his hard lot, he moved to
+the marketplace, where he remained until all the wagons in the place and
+in the surrounding country had been collected.
+
+Loud and bitter were the curses which the peasants uttered at finding
+themselves taken from their homes and compelled to perform service for
+which the pay, if received at all, would be scanty in the extreme. There
+was, however, no help for it; and when all were collected they started
+in a long procession guarded by the cavalry for Pilsen. On arriving
+there they were ordered to take up their station with the great train of
+wagons collected for the supply of the army.
+
+Thekla had from her hiding place heard the conversation, and was
+greatly alarmed at finding that they were again in the power of the
+Imperialists. No one, however, approached the wagon, and it was not
+until darkness had set in that she heard Malcolm's voice whispering to
+her to arise quietly.
+
+“We must leave the wagon; it will be impossible for you to remain
+concealed here longer, for tomorrow I may be sent out to bring in
+supplies. For the present we must remain in Pilsen. The whole country
+will be scoured by the troops, and it will not be safe to traverse the
+roads. Here in Pilsen no one will think of looking for us.
+
+“Wallenstein's headquarters are the last place where we should be
+suspected of hiding, and you may be sure that, however close the search
+may be elsewhere, the governor of Prague will not have thought of
+informing Wallenstein of an affair so foreign to the business of war as
+the escape from the emperor's clutches of a young lady. I have donned my
+craftsman dress again, and we will boldly seek for lodgings.”
+
+They soon entered the town, which was crowded with troops, searching
+about in the poorer quarters.
+
+Malcolm presently found a woman who agreed to let him two rooms. He
+accounted for his need for the second room by saying that his young
+brother was ill and needed perfect rest and quiet, and that the filing
+and hammering which was necessary in his craft prevented the lad from
+sleeping. As Malcolm agreed at once to the terms she asked for the
+rooms, the woman accepted his statement without doubt. They were soon
+lodged in two attics at the top of the house, furnished only with a
+table, two chairs, and a truckle bed in each; but Malcolm was well
+contented with the shelter he had found.
+
+Seeing that it would be extremely difficult at present to journey
+further, he determined to remain some little time in the town, thinking
+that he might be able to carry out the instructions which he had
+received from Colonel Munro, and to obtain information as to the plans
+of Wallenstein and the feelings of the army.
+
+“You will have to remain a prisoner here, Thekla, I am afraid, almost
+as strictly as at Prague, for it would not do to risk the discovery that
+you are a girl by your appearing in the streets in daylight, and after
+dark the streets of the town, occupied by Wallenstein's soldiers, are no
+place for any peaceful persons.
+
+“I may as well be here as at Nuremberg,” Thekla said, “and as I shall
+have you with me instead of being with strangers, the longer we stay
+here the better.”
+
+The next morning Malcolm sallied out into the town to see if he could
+find employment. There was, however, but one clockmaker in Pilsen,
+and the war had so injured his trade that he had discharged all his
+journeymen, for clocks were still comparatively rare luxuries, and were
+only to be seen in the houses of nobles and rich citizens. Knowing that
+Wallenstein was devoted to luxury and magnificence, always taking with
+him, except when making the most rapid marches, a long train of baggage
+and furniture, Malcolm thought it possible that he might obtain some
+employment in his apartments. He accordingly went boldly to the castle
+where the duke had established himself, and, asking for his steward,
+stated that he was a clockmaker from the workshop of the celebrated
+horologist, Master Jans Boerhoff, and could repair any clocks or watches
+that might be out of order.
+
+“Then you are the very man we need,” the steward said. “My master, the
+duke, is curious in such matters, and ever carries with him some half
+dozen clocks with his other furniture; and, use what care I will in
+packing them, the shaking of the wagons is constantly putting them
+out of repair. It was but this morning the duke told me to bring a
+craftsman, if one capable of the work could be found in the town, and
+to get the clocks put in order, for it displeases him if they do not all
+keep the time to the same minute. Follow me.”
+
+He led the way into the private apartments of the duke. These were
+magnificently furnished, the walls being covered with rich velvet
+hangings. Thick carpets brought from the East covered the floors.
+Indeed, in point of luxury and magnificence, Wallenstein kept up a state
+far surpassing that of his Imperial master.
+
+There were several clocks standing on tables and on brackets, for
+Wallenstein, although in most respects of a clear and commanding
+intellect, was a slave to superstition. He was always accompanied by an
+astrologer, who read for him the course of events from the movements of
+the stars, who indicated the lucky and unlucky days, and the hours at
+which it was not propitious to transact important business. Hence it
+was that he placed so great an importance on the exact observance of the
+hour by his numerous time pieces.
+
+“Here are some of the clocks,” the steward said, indicating them. “Of
+course you cannot work here, and they are too heavy to be removed,
+besides being too costly to intrust out of my charge, I will have a room
+prepared in the castle where you can work. Come again at noon with your
+tools, and all shall be in readiness.”
+
+At the hour appointed Malcolm again presented himself.
+
+“The duke has given personal instructions,” he said, “that a closet
+close by shall be fitted up for you, in order that he himself if he
+chooses may see you at work.”
+
+Malcolm was conducted to a small room near at hand. Here one of the
+clocks which had stopped had been placed on the table, and he at once
+set to work. He soon discovered that one of the wheels had been shaken
+from its place by the jolting of the wagons, and that the clock could be
+set going by a few minutes work. As, however, his object was to prolong
+his visit to the castle as long as possible, he set to work and took it
+entirely to pieces. Two hours later the door opened and a tall handsome
+man of commanding presence entered. Malcolm rose and bowed respectfully,
+feeling that he was in the presence of the great general.
+
+“You come from Nuremberg,” Wallenstein said, “as I am told, and have
+learned your craft in the workshop of Master Jans Boerhoff, who is well
+known as being the greatest master of his craft.”
+
+Malcolm bowed silently.
+
+“It is strange,” Wallenstein muttered to himself, “that this young man's
+destiny should be connected with mine; and yet the astrologer said that
+he who should present himself at the castle nearest to the stroke of
+nine this morning would be a factor in my future, and, as my steward
+tells me, the clock sounded nine as this young man addressed him.” He
+then asked Malcolm several questions as to the work upon which he was
+engaged, and then said abruptly: “Dost know the day and hour on which
+you were born?”
+
+Malcolm was somewhat surprised at the question, for he had not heard the
+muttered words of Wallenstein, but he at once replied that he had heard
+that he was born at the stroke of midnight on the last day in the year.
+
+The duke said no more, but left the closet and proceeded at once to an
+apartment near his own bed chamber, which, although he had arrived but
+a few hours previously, had already been fitted up for the use of his
+astrologer. The walls were hidden by a plain hanging of scarlet cloth;
+a large telescope stood at the window, a chart of the heavens was spread
+out on the table, and piles of books stood beside it. On the ceiling the
+signs of the zodiac had been painted, and some mystical circles had been
+marked out on the floor. A tall spare old man with a long white beard
+was seated at the table. He rose when Wallenstein entered.
+
+“I cannot but think,” the duke said, “that your calculations must for
+once have been mistaken, and that there must have been an error in the
+hour, for I see not how the destiny of this craftsman, who seems to be a
+simple lad, can in any way be connected with mine.”
+
+“I have made the calculation three times, your grace,” the old man
+replied, “and am sure there is no error.”
+
+“He was born,” Wallenstein said, “at midnight on December 31st, 1613.
+Work out his nativity, and see what stars were in the ascendant, and
+whether there are any affinities between us.”
+
+“I will do so at once,” the astrologer said; “by tonight I shall be able
+to give your grace the information you require.”
+
+“Tonight,” the duke said, “we will go over your calculations together
+as to our great enterprise. It is all important that there should be no
+mistake. I have for a whole year remained inactive because you told
+me that the time had not yet come, and now that you say the propitious
+moment is approaching would fain be sure that no error has been
+committed. All seems well, the troops are devoted to me, and will
+fight against whomsoever I bid them. By lavish gifts and favours I have
+attached all my generals firmly to me, and soon this ungrateful emperor
+shall feel how rash and foolish he has been to insult the man to whom
+alone he owes it that he was not long ago a fugitive and an exile, with
+the Swedes victorious masters of his capital and kingdom.
+
+“Have not I alone saved him? Did not I at my own cost raise an army and
+stand between him and the victorious Gustavus? Have not I alone of all
+his generals checked the triumphant progress of the invaders? And yet
+he evades all his promises, he procrastinates and falters. Not one step
+does he take to give me the sovereignty of Bohemia which he so solemnly
+promised me, and seems to think that it is honour and reward enough for
+me to have spent my treasure and blood in his service. But my turn is at
+hand, and when the hand which saved his throne shall cast him from it
+he will learn how rash he has been to have deceived and slighted me.
+And you say that the stars last night all pointed to a favourable
+conjunction, and that the time for striking the great blow is at hand?”
+
+“Nothing could be better,” the astrologer said; “Jupiter, your own
+planet, and Mars are in the ascendant. Saturn is still too near them to
+encourage instant action, but he will shortly remove to another house
+and then your time will have come.”
+
+“So be it,” Wallenstein said, “and the sooner the better. Now I will
+leave you to your studies, and will ride out to inspect the troops, and
+to see that they have all that they need, for they must be kept in the
+best of humours at present.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII THE CONSPIRACY
+
+
+The next day Wallenstein again entered Malcolm's workroom and said
+abruptly to him: “What deeds of bravery have you performed?”
+
+Malcolm looked astonished.
+
+“In an idle moment,” the duke said, “having an interest in nativities
+and seeing that you were born between two years, I asked my astrologer
+to work out the calculations. He tells me that it was fated that you
+should perform deeds of notable bravery while still young. It seemed
+the horoscope of a soldier rather than of a craftsman, and so I told the
+sage; but he will have it that he has made no mistake.”
+
+Malcolm hesitated for a moment; the blind faith which the otherwise
+intelligent and capable general placed in the science of astrology was
+well known to the world. Should he deny that he had accomplished any
+feats, the duke, believing implicitly the statement which his astrologer
+had made him, would suspect that he was not what he seemed; he therefore
+replied modestly, “I have done no deeds worthy relating to your
+excellency, but I once swam across a swollen river to direct some
+travellers who would otherwise have perished, and my neighbours were
+good enough to say that none in those parts save myself would have
+attempted such a feat.”
+
+“Ah!” the duke exclaimed in a tone of satisfaction, “as usual the stars
+have spoken correctly. Doubtless as great courage is required to swim a
+river in flood as to charge into the ranks of the enemy.”
+
+So saying Wallenstein left the room, filled with a desire to attach to
+himself the young man whom his adviser had assured him was in some
+way connected with his destiny. Wallenstein a day or two later offered
+Malcolm to take him into his permanent service, saying that he was
+frequently plagued by the stoppages of his clocks, and desired to have
+a craftsman capable of attending to them on his establishment. He even
+told the young man that he might expect promotion altogether beyond his
+present station.
+
+Malcolm could not refuse so flattering an offer, and was at once
+installed as a member of Wallenstein's household, declining however the
+use of the apartment which the steward offered him, saying that he had a
+sick brother lodging with him in the town. Mingling with the soldiers in
+the evenings Malcolm learned that there were rumours that negotiations
+for peace were going on with Saxony and Sweden. This was indeed the
+case, but Wallenstein was negotiating on his own behalf, and not on that
+of the emperor. So far but little had come of these negotiations, for
+Oxenstiern had the strongest doubts of Wallenstein's sincerity, and
+believed that he was only trying to gain time and delay operations
+by pretended proposals for peace. He could not believe that the great
+Imperialist general, the right hand of the emperor, had any real
+intention of turning against his master. Towards the end of January
+there was some excitement in Pilsen owing to the arrival there of all
+the generals of the Imperialist army save only Gallas, Coloredo, and
+Altringer.
+
+Malcolm was sure that such a gathering could only have been summoned
+by Wallenstein upon some matter of the most vital importance, and he
+determined at all hazards to learn what was taking place, in order that
+he might enlighten Oxenstiern as to the real sentiments of the duke.
+Learning that the principal chamber in the castle had been cleared, and
+that a meeting of the officers would take place there in the evening, he
+told Thekla when he went home to his meal at midday that she must not be
+surprised if he did not return until a late hour. He continued his work
+until nearly six o'clock, the time at which the meeting was to begin,
+and then extinguishing his light, he made his way through the passages
+of the castle until he reached the council chamber, meeting with no
+interruption from the domestics, who were by this time familiar with his
+person, and who regarded him as one rising in favour with their master.
+He waited in the vicinity of the chamber until he saw an opportunity for
+entering unobserved, then he stole into the room and secreted himself
+behind the arras beneath a table standing against the wall, and where,
+being in shadow, the bulge in the hanging would not attract attention.
+
+In a few minutes he heard heavy steps with the clanking of swords and
+jingling of spurs, and knew that the council was beginning to assemble.
+The hum of conversation rose louder and louder for a quarter of an
+hour; then he heard the door of the apartment closed, and knew that the
+council was about to commence. The buzz of conversation ceased, and then
+a voice, which was that of Field Marshal Illo, one of the three men in
+Wallenstein's confidence, rose in the silence. He began by laying before
+the army the orders which the emperor had sent for its dispersal to
+various parts of the country, and by the turn he gave to these he found
+it easy to excite the indignation of the assembly.
+
+He then expatiated with much eloquence upon the merits of the army
+and its generals, and upon the ingratitude with which the emperor had
+treated them after their noble efforts in his behalf. The court, he
+said, was governed by Spanish influence. The ministry were in the pay of
+Spain. Wallenstein alone had hitherto opposed this tyranny, and had thus
+drawn upon himself the deadly enmity of the Spaniards. To remove him
+from the command, or to make away with him entirely, had, he asserted,
+been long the end of their desires, and until they could succeed they
+endeavoured to abridge his power in the field. The supreme command was
+to be placed in the hands of the King of Hungary solely to promote
+the Spanish power in Germany, as this prince was merely the passive
+instrument of Spain.
+
+It was only with the view of weakening the army that six thousand troops
+were ordered to be detached from it, and solely to harass it by a winter
+campaign that they were now called upon at this inhospitable season
+to undertake the recovery of Ratisbon. The Jesuits and the ministry
+enriched themselves with the treasure wrung from the provinces, and
+squandered the money intended for the pay of the troops.
+
+The general, then, abandoned by the court, was forced to acknowledge
+his inability to keep his engagements to the army. For all the services
+which for two-and-twenty years he had rendered to the house of Austria,
+in return for all the difficulties with which he had struggled, for all
+the treasures of his own which he had expended in the Imperial service,
+a second disgraceful dismissal awaited him. But he was resolved the
+matter should not come to this; he was determined voluntarily to resign
+the command before it should be wrested from his hands, “and this,”
+ continued the speaker, “is what he has summoned you here to make known
+to you, and what he has commissioned me to inform you.”
+
+It was now for them to say whether they would permit him to leave them;
+it was for each man present to consider who was to repay him the sums
+he had expended in the emperor's service; how he was ever to reap the
+rewards for his bravery and devotion, when the chief who alone was
+cognizant of their efforts, who was their sole advocate and champion,
+was removed from them.
+
+When the speaker concluded a loud cry broke from all the officers that
+they would not permit Wallenstein to be taken from them. Then a babel
+of talk arose, and after much discussion four of the officers were
+appointed as a deputation to wait upon the duke to assure him of the
+devotion of the army, and to beg him not to withdraw himself from
+them. The four officers intrusted with the commission left the room and
+repaired to the private chamber of the general. They returned in a short
+time, saying that the duke refused to yield.
+
+Another deputation was sent to pray him in even stronger terms to remain
+with them. These returned with the news that Wallenstein had reluctantly
+yielded to their request; but upon the condition that each of them
+should give a written promise to truly and firmly adhere to him, neither
+to separate or to allow himself to be separated from him, and to
+shed his last drop of blood in his defence. Whoever should break this
+covenant, so long as Wallenstein should employ the army in the emperor's
+service, was to be regarded as a perfidious traitor and to be treated by
+the rest as a common enemy.
+
+As these last words appeared to indicate clearly that Wallenstein had no
+thought of assuming a position hostile to the emperor, or of defying his
+authority, save in the point of refusing to be separated from his army,
+all present agreed with acclamations to sign the documents required.
+
+“Then, gentlemen,” Marshal Illo said, “I will have the document for your
+signatures at once drawn up. A banquet has been prepared in the next
+room, of which I invite you now all to partake, and at its conclusion
+the document shall be ready.”
+
+Malcolm from his hiding place heard the general movement as the officers
+left the apartment, and looking cautiously out from beneath the arras,
+saw that the chamber was entirely empty. He determined, however, to
+remain and to hear the conclusion of the conference. He accordingly
+remained quiet for upwards of an hour. During this time the attendants
+had entered and extinguished the lights, as the guests would not return
+to the council chamber.
+
+He now left his hiding place and made his way to the door which
+separated him from the banqueting hall. Listening intently at the
+keyhole, he heard the clinking of glasses and the sound of voices loudly
+raised, and he guessed that the revelry was at its height. More and more
+noisy did it become, for Marshal Illo was plying his guests with wine in
+order that they might sign without examination the document which he had
+prepared for their signatures. Feeling confident that none would hear
+him in the state at which they had now arrived, Malcolm cautiously
+opened the door an inch or two, and was able to hear and see all that
+passed.
+
+It was another hour before Marshal Illo produced the document and passed
+it round for signature. Many of those to whom it was handed signed it
+at once without reading the engagement; but one more sober than the
+rest insisted on reading it through, and at once rising to his feet,
+announced to the others that the important words “as long as Wallenstein
+shall employ the army for the emperor's service,” which had been
+inserted in the first draft agreed to by Wallenstein and the deputation,
+had been omitted.
+
+A scene of noisy confusion ensued. Several of the officers declared that
+they would not sign the document as it stood. General Piccolomini, who
+had only attended the meeting in order that he might inform the emperor,
+to whom he was devoted, of what took place there, had drunk so much wine
+that he forgot the part he was playing, and rose to his feet and with
+drunken gravity proposed the health of the emperor.
+
+Louder and louder grew the din of tongues until Count Terzky, who was
+alone with Illo and Colonel Kinsky in Wallenstein's confidence, arose,
+and in a thundering voice declared that all were perjured villains
+who should recede from their engagement, and would, according to their
+agreements be treated as enemies by the rest. His menaces and the
+evident danger which any who might now draw back would run, overcame the
+scruples of the recalcitrants, and all signed the paper. This done
+the meeting broke up, and Malcolm, stealing away from his post of
+observation, made his way back to his lodgings.
+
+He slept little that night. What he had seen convinced him that
+Wallenstein was really in earnest in the propositions which he had made
+to Oxenstiern and the Elector of Saxony, and that he meditated an
+open rebellion against the emperor. It was of extreme importance that
+Oxenstiern should be made acquainted with these facts; but it would
+be next to impossible to escape from Pilsen, burdened as he was with
+Thekla, and to cross the country which intervened between the two armies
+and which was constantly traversed by cavalry parties and scouts of both
+sides.
+
+After much deliberation, therefore, he determined upon the bold course
+of frankly informing Wallenstein who he was and what he had heard, and
+to beg of him to furnish him with an escort to pass through the lines in
+order that he might make his way with all speed to Oxenstiern in order
+to assure him of the good faith of the duke and of the importance of
+his frankly and speedily accepting his proposals. It was possible, of
+course, that he might fall a victim to Wallenstein's first anger when he
+found out that he had been duped, and the plot in which he was engaged
+discovered; but he resolved to run the risk, believing that the duke
+would see the advantage to be gained by complying with his proposal.
+
+It was necessary, however, to prepare Thekla for the worst.
+
+“Thekla,” he said in the morning, “an end has come to our stay here.
+Circumstances have occurred which will either enable us to continue our
+journey at once and in safety or which may place me in a prison.”
+
+Thekla gave a cry of surprise and terror. “I do not think, my dear
+girl,” Malcolm went on, “that there is much fear of the second
+alternative, but we must be prepared for it. You must obey my
+instructions implicitly. Should I not return by nightfall you will know
+that for a time at least I have been detained. You will tell the woman
+of the house, who is aware that I am employed by Wallenstein, that I
+have been sent by him to examine and set in order the clocks in his
+palace in Vienna in readiness for his return there, but that as you were
+too unwell to travel I have bade you remain here until I return to fetch
+you.
+
+“You have an ample supply of money even without the purse of gold which
+the duke presented to me yesterday. You must remain here quietly until
+the spring, when the tide of war is sure to roll away to some other
+quarter, and I trust that, long ere that, even should I be detained,
+I shall be free to come to you again; but if not, do you then despatch
+this letter which I have written for you to Jans Boerhoff. In this
+I tell him where you are, in order that, if your mother comes to him
+asking for you, or your parents are able to write to him to inquire for
+you, he may inform them of your hiding place. I have also written you a
+letter to the commander of any Swedish force which may enter this town,
+telling him who you are, and praying him to forward you under an escort
+to Nuremberg.”
+
+“But what shall I do without you?” Thekla sobbed.
+
+“I trust, my dear, that you will not have to do without me, and
+feel convinced that tomorrow we shall be upon our way to the Swedish
+outposts. I only give you instructions in case of the worst. It troubles
+me terribly that I am forced to do anything which may possibly deprive
+you of my protection, but my duty to the country I serve compels me to
+take this step, which is one of supreme importance to our cause.”
+
+It was long before Thekla was pacified, and Malcolm himself was
+deeply troubled at the thought that the girl might be left alone and
+unprotected in a strange place. Still there appeared every probability
+that she would be able to remain there in safety until an opportunity
+should occur for her to make her way to Nuremberg. It was with a heavy
+heart, caused far more by the thought of Thekla's position than of
+danger to himself, that he took his way to the castle; but he felt that
+his duty was imperative, and was at heart convinced that Wallenstein
+would eagerly embrace his offer.
+
+It was not until midday that he was able to see the duke. Wallenstein
+had been greatly angered as well as alarmed at the resistance which his
+scheme had met with on the previous evening. He had believed that his
+favours and liberality had so thoroughly attached his generals to
+his person that they would have followed him willingly and without
+hesitation, even in a war against the emperor, and the discovery that,
+although willing to support him against deprivation from his command,
+they shrunk alarmed at the idea of disloyalty to the emperor, showed
+that his position was dangerous in the extreme.
+
+He found that the signatures to the document had for the most part been
+scrawled so illegibly that the writers would be able to repudiate them
+if necessary, and that deceit was evidently intended. In the morning he
+called together the whole of the generals, and personally received them.
+After pouring out the bitterest reproaches and abuse against the court,
+he reminded them of their opposition to the proposition set before them
+on the previous evening, and declared that this circumstance had induced
+him to retract his own promise, and that he should at once resign his
+command.
+
+The generals, in confusion and dismay, withdrew to the antechamber, and
+after a short consultation returned to offer their apologies for their
+conduct on the previous evening and to offer to sign anew the engagement
+which bound them to him. This was done, and it now remained only for
+Wallenstein to obtain the adhesion of Gallas, Altringer, and Coloredo,
+which, as they held important separate commands, was necessary for the
+success of his plan. Messengers were accordingly sent out at once to
+request them to come instantly to Pilsen.
+
+After this business was despatched and Wallenstein was disengaged he was
+informed that Malcolm desired earnestly to speak to him on particular
+business. Greatly surprised at the request, he ordered that he should be
+shown in to him.
+
+“Your excellency,” Malcolm began when they were alone, “what I am about
+to say may anger you, but as I trust that much advantage may arise from
+my communication, I implore you to restrain your anger until you hear me
+to the end, after which it will be for you to do with me as you will.”
+
+Still more surprised at this commencement, Wallenstein signed to him to
+continue.
+
+“I am, sir,” Malcolm went on, “no clockmaker, although, indeed, having
+worked for some time in the shop of Master Jans Boerhoff at the time of
+the siege of Nuremberg, I am able to set clocks and watches in repair,
+as I have done to those which have been placed in my hands here. In
+reality, sir, I am a Scottish officer, a captain in the service of
+Sweden.”
+
+Wallenstein gave a short exclamation of angry surprise. “You must not
+think, sir, that I have come hither in disguise to be a spy upon the
+movements of your army. I came here unwillingly, being captured by your
+troops, and forced to accompany them.
+
+“I left the Swedish camp on a private mission, having received there a
+missive from the Countess of Mansfeld, who, with her husband, was a kind
+friend of mine, telling me that they were prisoners of the emperor at
+Prague, and begging me to come to their assistance. Bethinking me of
+the occupation which had amused my leisure hours during the weary months
+when we were shut up by you in Nuremberg, I obtained leave of absence,
+attired myself as a craftsman, and made my way to Prague. There I found
+the count confined to his couch by a wound and unable to move. The
+countess had no thought of quitting him. Her anxiety was wholly for her
+daughter, a girl of fifteen, whom the emperor purposed to shut up in a
+convent and force to change her religion, and then to bestow her hand
+upon one of his favourites, with her father's confiscated estates as her
+dowry.
+
+“I succeeded in effecting her escape, disguised as a boy; I myself
+travelling in the disguise of a peasant with a wagon. We were making our
+way towards the Swedish lines when we came across your army, which had,
+unknown to me, suddenly moved hither. I and my cart were requisitioned
+for the service of the army. On the night of my arrival here I resumed
+my disguise as a craftsman, left my wagon, and with my young companion
+took up my lodging here, intending to remain quietly working at the
+craft I assumed until an opportunity offered for continuing our journey.
+Accident obtained me employment here, and as rumour said that overtures
+for peace were passing between yourself and the Swedish chancellor,
+I may frankly say that I determined to use the position in which I
+accidentally found myself for the benefit of the country I served, by
+ascertaining, if I could, how far your excellency was in earnest as
+to the offers you were making. In pursuance of that plan I yesterday
+concealed myself and overheard all that passed in the council chamber
+with the officers, and at the banquet subsequently.”
+
+Wallenstein leapt to his feet with an angry exclamation.
+
+“Your excellency will please to remember,” Malcolm went on quietly,
+“that I could have kept all this to myself and used it to the benefit or
+detriment of your excellency, but it seemed to me that I should benefit
+at once your designs and the cause I serve by frankly acquainting you
+with what I have discovered. It would be a work of time for me to make
+my way with my companion through the lines of your army and to gain
+those of the Swedes. I might be slain in so doing and the important
+information I have acquired lost.
+
+“It is of all things important to you that the Swedish chancellor, whose
+nature is cautious and suspicious, should be thoroughly convinced that
+it is your intention to make common cause with him and to join him heart
+and soul in forcing the emperor to accept the conditions which you and
+he united may impose upon him. This the information I have acquired will
+assuredly suffice to do, and he will, without doubt, at once set his
+army in motion to act in concert with yours.”
+
+Wallenstein paced the room for a minute or two in silence.
+
+“The stars truly said that you are a brave man and that your destiny is
+connected with mine,” he said at length, “for assuredly none but a brave
+man would venture to tell me that he had spied into my councils. I see,
+however, that what you say is reasonable and cogent, and that the news
+you have to tell may well induce Oxenstiern to lay aside the doubts
+which have so long kept us asunder and at once to embrace my offer.
+What, then, do you propose?”
+
+“I would ask, sir,” Malcolm replied, “that you would at once order a
+squadron of horse to escort me and my companion through the debatable
+land between your army and that of the Swedes, with orders for us
+to pass freely on as soon as we are beyond your outposts and in the
+neighbourhood of those of the Swedes.”
+
+“It shall be done,” Wallenstein said. “In half an hour a squadron of
+horse shall be drawn up in the courtyard here, and a horse and pillion
+in readiness for yourself and the maiden. In the meantime I will myself
+prepare a letter for you to present to the Swedish chancellor with fresh
+proposals for common action.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII THE MURDER OF WALLENSTEIN
+
+
+Malcolm hurried back to his lodging, where he was received with a cry
+of delight from Thekla, who had passed the time since he had left her on
+her knees praying for his safety. He told her at once that she was about
+to be restored to safety among friends, that her troubles were at an
+end, and she was again to resume her proper garments which she had
+brought with her in the basket containing his tools at the time of her
+flight.
+
+A few minutes sufficed to make the change, and then she accompanied
+Malcolm to the castle. Wallenstein's orders had been rapidly carried
+out; a squadron of cavalry were formed up in the courtyard, and in front
+of them an attendant held a horse with a pillion behind the saddle.
+Malcolm lifted Thekla on to the pillion and sprang into the saddle in
+front of her. One of Wallenstein's household handed a letter to him and
+then gave him into the charge of the officer commanding the squadron,
+who had already received his orders. The officer at once gave the word
+and rode from the castle followed by the cavalry.
+
+As soon as they were out of the town the pace was quickened, and the
+cavalcade proceeded at a trot which was kept up with few intermissions
+until nightfall, by which time twenty miles had been covered. They
+halted for the night in a small town where the soldiers were billeted
+on the inhabitants, comfortable apartments being assigned to Malcolm and
+his charge.
+
+Soon after daybreak the journey was continued. A sharp watch was now
+kept up, as at any moment parties of the Swedish cavalry making a raid
+far in advance of their lines might be met with. No such adventure
+happened, and late in the afternoon the troop halted on the crest of a
+low hill.
+
+“Here,” the officer said, “we part. That town which you see across
+the river is held by the Swedes, and you will certainly meet with no
+molestation from any of our side as you ride down to it.”
+
+Malcolm thanked the officer for the courtesy he had shown him on the
+journey, and then rode forward towards the town. It was getting dusk as
+he neared the bridge, but as he came close Malcolm's heart gave a bound
+as he recognized the green scarves and plumes worn by the sentries at
+the bridge. These seeing only a single horseman with a female behind
+him did not attempt to question him as he passed; but he reined in his
+horse.
+
+“Whose regiment do you belong to?” he asked.
+
+The men looked up in surprise at being addressed in their own language
+by one whose attire was that of a simple craftsman, but whom they now
+saw rode a horse of great strength and beauty.
+
+“We belong to Hamilton's regiment,” they replied.
+
+“And where shall I find that of Munro?”
+
+“It is lying in quarters fifteen miles away,” one of the soldiers
+answered.
+
+“Then we cannot get on there tonight,” Malcolm said. “Where are your
+officers quartered?”
+
+A soldier standing near at once volunteered to act as guide, and in a
+few minutes Malcolm arrived at the house occupied by them. He was
+of course personally known to all the officers, and as soon as their
+surprise at his disguise and at seeing him accompanied by a young lady
+had subsided, they received him most heartily.
+
+Thekla was at once taken to the house of the burgomaster, which was
+close at hand, and handed over to the wife of that functionary for the
+night, and Malcolm spent a merry evening with the Scottish officers,
+to whom he related the adventures which had so satisfactorily
+terminated--making, however, no allusion to the political secrets which
+he had discovered or the mission with which he was charged. He was soon
+furnished from the wardrobes of the officers with a suit of clothes,
+and although his craftsman attire had served him well he was glad to don
+again the uniform of the Scottish brigade.
+
+“You have cut your narrative strangely short at the end, Graheme,”
+ Colonel Hamilton said when Malcolm brought his story to a conclusion.
+“How did you get away from Pilsen at last, and from whom did you steal
+that splendid charger on whom you rode up to the door?”
+
+“That is not my own secret, colonel, and I can only tell you at present
+that Wallenstein himself gave it to me.”
+
+A roar of incredulous laughter broke from the officers round the table.
+
+“A likely story indeed, Graheme; the duke was so fascinated with your
+talents as a watchmaker that he bestowed a charger fit for his own
+riding upon you to carry you across into our lines.”
+
+“It does not sound likely, I grant you,” Malcolm said, “but it is true,
+as you will acknowledge when the time comes that there will be no longer
+any occasion for me to keep the circumstances secret. I only repeat,
+Wallenstein gave me the honour of an escort which conducted me to the
+crest of the hill two miles away, where, if your sentries and outposts
+had been keeping their eyes open, they might have seen them.”
+
+It was late before the party broke up, but soon after daylight Malcolm
+was again in the saddle, and with Thekla as before on the pillion he
+continued his journey, and in three hours reached the town where his
+regiment was quartered.
+
+Alighting at the door of the colonel's quarters, he led Thekla to his
+apartments. The colonel received him with the greatest cordiality and
+welcomed Thekla with a kindness which soon put her at her ease, for
+now that the danger was past she was beginning to feel keenly the
+strangeness of her position.
+
+She remembered Colonel Munro perfectly, as he and the other officers of
+the regiment had been frequently at her father's during the stay of the
+regiment at Maintz. The colonel placed her at once in charge of the
+wife of one of the principal citizens, who upon hearing that she was the
+daughter of the Count of Mansfeld, well known for his attachment to the
+Protestant cause, willingly received her, and offered to retain her
+as her guest until an opportunity should occur for sending her on to
+Nuremberg, should Malcolm not be able at once to continue his journey to
+that city.
+
+“That,” Colonel Munro said as soon as Malcolm informed him of the
+extremely important information he had gained, “is out of the question.
+Your news is of supreme importance, it alters the whole course of
+events, and offers hopes of an early termination of the struggle. There
+is no doubt that Wallenstein is in earnest now, for he has committed
+himself beyond reparation. The only question is whether he can carry the
+army with him. However, it is clear that you must ride with all haste
+to Oxenstiern with your tidings; not a moment must be lost. He is in the
+Palatinate, and it will take you four days of hard riding at the least
+to reach him.
+
+“In the meantime, your little maid, who by the way is already nearly a
+woman, had best remain here--I will see that she is comfortable and well
+cared for, and after all she is as well here as at Nuremberg, as there
+is no fear now of an advance of the Imperialists. In case of anything
+extraordinary occurring which might render this town an unsafe abiding
+place, I will forward her in safety to Nuremberg, even I if I have to
+detach a score of my men as her escort.”
+
+Before mounting again Malcolm paid a hurried visit to Thekla, who
+expressed her contentment with her new abode, and her readiness to stay
+there until he should return to take her to Nuremberg, even should it be
+weeks before he could do so.
+
+“I quite feel among friends now,” she said, “and Colonel Munro and your
+Scotch officers will, I am sure, take good care of me till you return.”
+
+Glad to feel that his charge was left in good hands Malcolm mounted
+his horse with a light heart and galloped away. Four days later he was
+closeted with the Swedish chancellor, and relating to him the scene in
+the castle at Pilsen. When he had finished his narrative Oxenstiern, who
+had, before Malcolm began, read the letter which Wallenstein had sent
+him, said:
+
+“After what you tell me there can be no longer the slightest doubts of
+Wallenstein's intention. Ever since the death of the king he has been
+negotiating privately with me, but I could not believe that he was
+in earnest or that such monstrous treachery was possible. How could I
+suppose that he who has been raised from the rank of a simple gentleman
+to that of a duke and prince, and who, save the fortunes which he
+obtained with his wives, owes everything to the bounty of the emperor,
+could be preparing to turn his arms against him?”
+
+“It is true that he has done great things for Ferdinand, but his
+ambition is even greater than his military talent. Any other man would
+have been content with the enormous possessions and splendid dignity
+which he has attained, and which in fact render him far richer than his
+Imperial master; but to be a prince does not suffice for him. He has
+been promised a kingdom, but even that is insufficient for his ambition.
+It is clear that he aims to dethrone the emperor and to set himself up
+in his place; however, his ingratitude does not concern me, it suffices
+now that at any rate he is sincere, and that a happy issue out of the
+struggle opens before us henceforth.
+
+“I can trust him thoroughly; but though he has the will to join us has
+he the power? Wallenstein, with his generals and his army fighting for
+the emperor, is a mighty personage, but Wallenstein a rebel is another
+altogether. By what you tell me it seems more than doubtful whether his
+officers will follow him; and although his army is attached to him, and
+might follow him could he put himself at its head, it is scattered in
+its cantonments, and each section will obey the orders which the general
+in its command may give.
+
+“Probably some of those who signed the document, pledging their fidelity
+to Wallenstein, have already sent news to the emperor of what is being
+done. It is a strange situation and needs great care; the elements are
+all uncertain. Wallenstein writes to me as if he were assured of the
+allegiance of the whole of his army, and speaks unquestionably of his
+power to overthrow the emperor; but the man is clearly blinded by his
+ambition and infatuated by his fixed belief in the stars. However, one
+thing is certain, he and as much of his army as he can hold in hand are
+now our allies, and I must lose no time in moving such troops as are
+most easily disposable to his assistance.
+
+“I will send to Saxony and urge the elector to put in motion a force to
+support him, and Duke Bernhard shall move with a division of our troops.
+I will at once pen a despatch to Wallenstein, accepting his alliance and
+promising him active aid as soon as possible.
+
+“What say you, young sir? You have shown the greatest circumspection
+and ability in this affair. Will you undertake to carry my despatch?
+You must not travel as a Scottish officer, for if there are any traitors
+among the officers of Wallenstein they will assuredly endeavour to
+intercept any despatches which may be passing between us in order to
+send them to the emperor as proofs of the duke's guilt.”
+
+“I will undertake the task willingly, sir,” Malcolm replied, “and doubt
+not that I shall be able to penetrate to him in the same disguise which
+I before wore. When I once reach him is your wish that I should remain
+near him, or that I should at once return?”
+
+“It were best that you should remain for a time,” the chancellor said.
+“You may be able to send me news from time to time of what is passing
+around the duke. Before you start, you shall be supplied with an
+ample amount of money to pay messengers to bring your reports to me.
+Wallenstein hardly appears to see the danger of his situation; but you
+will be more clear sighted. It is a strange drama which is being played,
+and may well terminate in a tragedy. At any rate the next month will
+decide what is to come of these strange combinations.”
+
+The horse on which Malcolm had ridden was knocked up from the speed at
+which he had travelled, and, ordering it to be carefully tended till his
+return, he obtained a fresh horse and again set out. He made the journey
+at the same speed at which he had before passed over the ground, and
+paused for a few hours only at Amberg, where he found Thekla well and
+comfortable, and quite recovered from the effects of her journeys and
+anxiety. She received him with delight; but her joy was dashed when she
+found that, instead of returning to remain with his regiment, as she had
+hoped, he was only passing through on another mission.
+
+At Amberg he again laid aside his uniform and donned his costume as a
+craftsman. Colonel Munro gave him an escort of twenty troopers; with
+these he crossed the river at nightfall, and, making a detour to avoid
+the Imperialist outposts, rode some fifteen miles on his way. He then
+dismounted and handed over his horse to his escort, who at once started
+on their way back to Amberg, while he pursued his journey on foot
+towards Pilsen. It was late the next evening before he reached the town;
+and on arriving he learned that Wallenstein was still there.
+
+The Imperialist general, immediately upon obtaining the signature of
+his officers, had sent to urge Altringer and Gallas, who had been absent
+from the meeting, to come to him with all speed. Altringer, on pretence
+of sickness, did not comply with the invitation. Gallas made
+his appearance, but merely with the intention of finding out all
+Wallenstein's plans and of keeping the emperor informed of them.
+Piccolomini had, immediately the meeting broke up, sent full details
+of its proceedings to the court, and Gallas was furnished with a secret
+commission containing the emperor's orders to the colonels and officers,
+granting an amnesty for their adhesion to Wallenstein at Pilsen, and
+ordering them to make known to the army that it was released from its
+obedience to Wallenstein, and was placed under the command of Gallas
+himself, who received orders, if possible, to arrest Wallenstein.
+
+Gallas on his arrival perceived the impossibility of executing his
+commission, for Wallenstein's troops and officers were devoted to him,
+and not even the crime of high treason could overcome their veneration
+and respect for him. Finding that he could do nothing, and fearful that
+Wallenstein should discover the commission with which he was charged,
+Gallas sought for a pretence to escape from Pilsen, and offered to go to
+Altringer and to persuade him to return with him.
+
+Wallenstein had no doubts of the fidelity of the general, and allowed
+him to depart. As he did not return at once Piccolomini, who was also
+most anxious to get out of the grasp of Wallenstein, offered to go and
+fetch both Gallas and Altringer. Wallenstein consented, and conveyed
+Piccolomini in his own carriage to Lintz. No sooner had Piccolomini
+left him than he hurried to his own command, denounced Wallenstein as a
+traitor, and prepared to surprise the duke in Pilsen. Gallas at the same
+time sent round copies of his commission to all the Imperial camps.
+
+Upon his arrival Malcolm at once proceeded to the castle, and, finding
+the steward, requested him to inform the duke that he had returned. In
+a few minutes he was ushered into his presence, and handed to him the
+letter from Oxenstiern. Wallenstein tore it open without a word and gave
+an exclamation of satisfaction as he glanced it through.
+
+“This is opportune indeed,” he said, “and I thank you for bringing me
+the news so rapidly. Well did the astrologer say that my destiny to
+some extent depended on you; this is a proof that he was right. The
+chancellor tells me that the Duke of Saxe-Lauenberg will march instantly
+with four thousand men to join me, and that Duke Bernhard will move down
+at once with six thousand of the best Swedish troops. I may yet be even
+with the traitors.”
+
+Although the defection of Gallas and Piccolomini and the news of the
+issue of the Imperial proclamation had fallen with stunning force upon
+Wallenstein, he had still faith in the fidelity of the army at large,
+and he had already despatched Marshal Terzky to Prague, where all the
+troops faithful to him were to assemble, intending to follow himself
+with the regiments at Pilsen as soon as carriage could be obtained from
+the country round. His astrologer still assured him that the stars were
+favourable, and Wallenstein's faith in his own destiny was unshaken.
+
+Upon finding that Malcolm had orders to remain with him until he was
+joined by Duke Bernhard, he ordered handsome apartments to be prepared
+for him, and as there was no longer any reason why the fact that a
+Swedish officer was in the castle should be concealed, he commanded that
+Malcolm should be furnished with handsome raiment of all sorts and a
+suit of superb armour. Upon the following morning Wallenstein sent for
+him.
+
+“I have bad news,” he said. “General Suys with an army arrived at Prague
+before Terzky got there, and I fear that the influence of Piccolomini,
+Gallas, and Altringer have withdrawn from me the corps which they
+command. Terzky will return tomorrow morning, and I shall then march
+with him and the troops here to Egra. There I shall effect a junction
+with Duke Bernhard, who is instructed to march upon that town.”
+
+The duke, though anxious, still appeared confident; but the outlook
+seemed to Malcolm extremely gloomy. The whole army save the regiments
+around Pilsen had fallen away from Wallenstein. His princely generosity
+to the generals and officers and his popularity among the troops had
+failed to attach them to him now that he had declared against the
+emperor, and it appeared to Malcolm that he would be able to bring over
+to the Swedish cause only the corps which he immediately commanded.
+
+Still his defection could not but cause a vast gap in the Imperial
+defences, and the loss of the services of the greatest of their leaders
+would in itself be a heavy blow to the Imperialist cause, which had been
+almost solely supported by his commanding talents and his vast private
+income. Terzky arrived on the following morning, and the same afternoon
+Wallenstein with the whole of the troops at Pilsen marched towards Egra.
+
+Among the officers attached to Wallenstein's person was a Scotchman
+named Leslie, to whom and a few other confidants Wallenstein had
+confided his designs. Wallenstein had at once introduced Malcolm to him,
+and the two rode in company during the march to Egra. Malcolm did not
+find him a cheerful companion. They chatted at times of the engagements
+in which both had taken part although on opposite sides; but Malcolm saw
+that his companion was absent and preoccupied, and that he avoided any
+conversation as to the turn which events had taken.
+
+At the end of the first day's ride Malcolm came to the decided
+conclusion that he did not like his companion, and, moreover, that his
+heart was far from being in the enterprise on which they were engaged.
+The following day he avoided joining him, and rode with some of the
+other officers. Upon their arrival at Egra the gates were opened at
+their approach, and Colonel Butler, an Irishman who commanded the
+garrison, met Wallenstein as he entered, and saluted him with all
+honour. Wallenstein was pleased to find that the disaffection which had
+spread so rapidly through the army had not reached Egra.
+
+A few hours after he had entered the town Wallenstein received the news
+that an Imperial edict had been issued proclaiming him a traitor and an
+outlaw; he also learned that the corps under the Duke of Saxe-Lauenburg
+was within a day's march of Egra. As soon as the duke retired to his
+apartments Leslie sought out Colonel Butler, and revealed to him
+the purposes of Wallenstein, and informed him of the Imperial order
+absolving the army from their allegiance to him. The two men, with
+Lieutenant Colonel Gordon, another Imperialist officer, at once
+determined to capture Wallenstein and to hand him over as a prisoner to
+the emperor.
+
+In the afternoon Leslie had an interview with Wallenstein, who told him
+of the near approach of the Dukes of Saxe-Lauenburg and Saxe-Weimar, and
+informed him of his plans for advancing from Egra direct into the heart
+of Bohemia.
+
+The treacherous officer at once hurried away with the news to his two
+associates, and it was agreed that the near approach of the Saxons
+rendered it impossible for them to carry out their first plan, but that
+instant and more urgent steps must be taken. That evening a banquet was
+given by Butler to Wallenstein and his officers. The duke, however, was
+too anxious to appear at it, and remained in his own apartment, the
+rest of the officers, among them Wallenstein's chief confidants, Illo,
+Terzky, and Kinsky, together with Captain Neumann, an intimate adviser
+of Terzky, were among the guests. Malcolm was also present.
+
+The banquet passed off gaily, Wallenstein's health was drunk in full
+bumpers, and his friends boasted freely that in a few days he would
+find himself at the head of as powerful an army as he had ever before
+commanded. Malcolm had naturally been placed at the table near his
+compatriots, and it seemed to him that their gaiety was forced and
+unnatural, and a sense of danger came over him.
+
+The danger indeed was great, although he knew it not. The drawbridge
+of the castle had been drawn up, the avenues leading to it guarded, and
+twenty infantry soldiers and six of Butler's dragoons were in hiding in
+the apartment next to the banqueting hall.
+
+Dessert was placed on the table; Leslie gave the signal, and in an
+instant the hall was filled with armed men, who placed themselves behind
+the chairs of Wallenstein's trusted officers with shouts of “Long live
+Ferdinand!” The three officers instantly sprang to their feet, but
+Terzky and Kinsky were slain before they had time to draw their swords.
+
+Neumann in the confusion escaped into the court, where he too was cut
+down. Illo burst through his assailants, and placing his back against a
+window stood on his defence. As he kept his assailants at bay he poured
+the bitterest reproaches upon Gordon for his treachery, and challenged
+him to fight him fairly and honourably. After a gallant resistance, in
+which he slew two of his assailants, he fell to the ground overpowered
+by numbers, and pierced with ten wounds.
+
+Malcolm had sprung to his feet at the commencement of the tumult, but
+was pressed down again into his chair by two soldiers, while Leslie
+exclaimed, “Keep yourself quiet, sir, I would fain save you as a fellow
+countryman, and as one who is simply here in the execution of his duty;
+but if you draw sword to defend these traitors, you must share their
+fate.”
+
+No sooner had the murder of the four officers been accomplished than
+Leslie, Butler, and Gordon issued into the town. Butler's cavalry
+paraded the streets, and that officer quieted the garrison by telling
+them that Wallenstein had been proclaimed a traitor and an outlaw, and
+that all who were faithful to the emperor must obey their orders. The
+regiments most attached to Wallenstein had not entered the city, and the
+garrison listened to the voice of their commander.
+
+Wallenstein knew nothing of what had taken place in the castle, and had
+just retired to bed when a band of Butler's soldiers, led by Captain
+Devereux, an Irishman, burst into his apartment. The duke leaped from
+his bed, but before he could snatch up a sword he was pierced through
+and through by the murderers' halberts.
+
+So fell one of the greatest men of his age. Even to the present day
+there are differences of opinion as to the extent of his guilt, but
+none as to the treachery with which he was murdered by his most trusted
+officers. That Wallenstein owed much gratitude to the emperor is
+unquestionable, but upon the other hand he had even a greater title to
+the gratitude of Ferdinand, whose crown and empire he had repeatedly
+saved. Wallenstein was no bigot, his views were broad and enlightened,
+and he was therefore viewed with the greatest hostility by the violent
+Catholics around the king, by Maximilian of Bavaria, by the Spaniards,
+and by the Jesuits, who were all powerful at court. These had once
+before brought about his dismissal from the command, after he had
+rendered supreme services, and their intrigues against him were again
+at the point of success when Wallenstein determined to defy and dethrone
+the emperor. The coldness with which he was treated at court, the marked
+inattention to all his requests, the consciousness that while he was
+winning victories in the field his enemies were successfully plotting
+at court, angered the proud and haughty spirit of Wallenstein almost to
+madness, and it may truly be said that he was goaded into rebellion.
+The verdict of posterity has certainly been favourable to him, and the
+dastardly murder which requited a lifetime of brilliant services has
+been held to more than counterbalance the faults which he committed.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV MALCOLM'S ESCAPE
+
+
+After the fall of Wallenstein's colonels Malcolm was led away a
+prisoner, and was conducted to a dungeon in the castle. It was not until
+the door closed behind him that he could fairly realize what had taken
+place, so sudden and unexpected had been the scene in the banqueting
+hall. Five minutes before he had been feasting and drinking the health
+of Wallenstein, now he was a prisoner of the Imperialists. Wallenstein's
+adherents had been murdered, and it was but too probable that a like
+fate would befall the general himself. The alliance from which so much
+had been hoped, which seemed to offer a prospect of a termination of the
+long and bloody struggle, was cut short at a blow.
+
+As to his own fate it seemed dark enough, and his captivity might last
+for years, for the Imperialists' treatment of their prisoners was harsh
+in the extreme. The system of exchange, which was usual then as now,
+was in abeyance during the religious war in Germany. There was an almost
+personal hatred between the combatants, and, as Malcolm knew, many of
+his compatriots who had fallen into the hands of the Imperialists had
+been treated with such harshness in prison that they had died there.
+Some, indeed, were more than suspected of having been deliberately
+starved to death.
+
+However, Malcolm had gone through so many adventures that even the scene
+which he had witnessed and his own captivity and uncertain fate were
+insufficient to banish sleep from his eyes, and he reposed as soundly on
+the heap of straw in the corner of his cell as he would have done in the
+carved and gilded bed in the apartment which had been assigned to him in
+the castle.
+
+The sun was shining through the loophole of his dungeon when he awoke.
+For an hour he occupied himself in polishing carefully the magnificently
+inlaid armour which Wallenstein had presented him, and which, with the
+exception of his helmet, he had not laid aside when he sat down to the
+banquet, for it was very light and in no way hampered his movements, and
+except when quartered in towns far removed from an enemy officers seldom
+laid aside their arms. He still retained his sword and dagger, for his
+captors, in their haste to finish the first act of the tragedy, and to
+resist any rising which might take place among the soldiery, had omitted
+to take them from him when they hurried him away.
+
+On examination he found that with his dagger he could shove back the
+lock of the door, but this was firmly held by bolts without. Thinking
+that on some future occasion the blade might be useful to him, he pushed
+the dagger well into the lock, and with a sharp jerk snapped it off at
+the hilt. Then he concealed the steel within his long boot and cast the
+hilt through the loophole.
+
+Presently a soldier brought him his breakfast--a manchet of bread and
+a stoup of wine. He was visited again at dinner and supper. Before the
+soldier came in the first time Malcolm concealed his sword in the straw,
+thinking that the soldier would be sure to remove it if he noticed it.
+The man who brought his breakfast and dinner was taciturn, and made
+no reply to his questions, but another man brought his supper, and he
+turned out of a more communicative disposition.
+
+“What has happened?” he repeated in reply to Malcolm's question. “Well,
+I don't know much about it myself, but I do know that Wallenstein is
+dead, for the trooper who rides next to me helped to kill him. Everyone
+is content that the traitor has been punished, and as the troops have
+all pronounced for the emperor every thing is quiet. We had a good
+laugh this afternoon. The colonel sent out one of our men dressed up in
+Wallenstein's livery to meet the Duke of Saxe-Lauenburg and invite him
+to come on at once and join him here. The duke suspected no danger, and
+rode on ahead of his troops, with a few attendants, and you should have
+seen his face, when, after passing through the gates, he suddenly found
+himself surrounded by our men and a prisoner. Bernhard of Saxe-Weimar
+will be here tomorrow, as they say, and we shall catch him in the same
+way. It's a rare trap this, I can tell you.”
+
+The news heightened Malcolm's uneasiness. The capture of Duke Bernhard,
+the most brilliant of the German generals on the Protestant side, would
+be a heavy blow indeed to the cause, and leaving his supper untasted
+Malcolm walked up and down his cell in a fever of rage at his impotence
+to prevent so serious a disaster.
+
+At last he ate his supper, and then threw himself upon the straw, but he
+was unable to sleep. The death of Wallenstein had made a deep impression
+upon him. The Imperialist general was greatly respected by his foes. Not
+only was he admired for his immense military talents, but he carried on
+the war with a chivalry and humanity which contrasted strongly with the
+ferocity of Tilly, Pappenheim, and Piccolomini. Prisoners who fell into
+his hands were always treated with courtesy, and although, from motives
+of policy, he placed but little check upon the excesses of his soldiery,
+no massacres, such as those which had caused the names of Tilly and
+Pappenheim to be held in abhorrence by the Protestants of Germany, were
+associated with that of Wallenstein. Then, too, the princely dignity and
+noble presence of the duke had greatly impressed the young soldier, and
+the courtesy with which he had treated him personally had attracted
+his liking as well as respect. To think that this great general, this
+princely noble, the man who alone had baffled the Lion of the North, had
+been foully murdered by those he had trusted and favoured, filled him
+with grief and indignation, the more so since two of the principal
+assassins were Scotchmen.
+
+The thought that on the morrow Duke Bernhard of Weimar--a leader
+in importance second only to the Chancellor of Sweden--would fall
+unsuspiciously into the trap set for him goaded him almost to madness,
+and he tossed restlessly on the straw through the long hours of the
+night. Towards morning he heard a faint creaking of bolts, then there
+was a sound of the locks of the door being turned. He grasped his sword
+and sprang to his feet. He heard the door close again, and then a man
+produced a lantern from beneath a long cloak, and he saw Wallenstein's
+steward before him. The old man's eyes were bloodshot with weeping, and
+his face betokened the anguish which the death of his master had caused
+him.
+
+“You have heard the news?” he asked.
+
+“Alas!” Malcolm replied, “I have heard it indeed.”
+
+“I am determined,” the old man said, “to thwart the projects of these
+murderers and to have vengeance upon them. None have thought of me. I
+was an old man, too insignificant for notice, and I have passed the day
+in my chamber lamenting the kindest of lords, the best of masters. Last
+evening I heard the soldiers boasting that today they would capture
+the Duke of Saxe-Weimar, and I determined to foil them. They have been
+feasting and drinking all night, and it is but now that the troopers
+have fallen into a drunken slumber and I was able to possess myself of
+the key of your dungeon.
+
+“Here is your helmet. I will lead you to the stable, where I have
+saddled the best and fastest of my master's horses. You must remain
+there quietly until you deem that the gates are open, then leap upon the
+horse, and ride for your life. Few will know you, and you will probably
+pass out of the gate unquestioned. If not, you have your sword to cut
+your way. Once beyond the town ride to meet the duke. Tell him my master
+has been murdered, that Egra is in the hands of the Imperialists, and
+that Saxe-Lauenburg is a prisoner. Bid him march on this place with his
+force, take it by assault, and leave not one of the assassins of my lord
+living within its walls.”
+
+“You will run no risk, I hope, for your share in this adventure,”
+ Malcolm said.
+
+“It matters little to me,” the old man replied. “My life is worthless,
+and I would gladly die in the thought that I have brought retribution on
+the head of the murderers of my master. But they will not suspect me. I
+shall lock the door behind us, and place the key again in the girdle of
+the drunken guard, and then return to my own chamber.”
+
+Quietly Malcolm and his conductor made their way through the castle and
+out into the courtyard. Then they entered the stables.
+
+“This is the horse,” the steward said, again uncovering his lantern. “Is
+he not a splendid animal? He was my master's favourite, and sooner than
+that his murderers should ride him I would cut the throat of the noble
+beast with my dagger; but he has a better mission in carrying the
+avenger of his master's blood. And now farewell. The rest is in your
+own hands. May Heaven give you good fortune.” So saying, the old man set
+down his lantern and left Malcolm alone.
+
+The latter, after examining the saddle and bridle, and seeing that every
+buckle was firm and in its place, extinguished the light, and waited
+patiently for morning. In two hours a faint light began to show itself.
+Stronger and stronger it grew until it was broad day. Still there were
+but few sounds of life and movement in the castle. Presently, however,
+the noise of footsteps and voices was heard in the courtyard.
+
+Although apprehensive that at any moment the stable door might open,
+Malcolm still delayed his start, as it would be fatal were he to set out
+before the opening of the gates. At last he felt sure that they must
+be opened to admit the country people coming in with supplies for the
+market. He had donned his helmet before leaving his cell, and he now
+quietly opened the stable door, sprang into the saddle, and rode boldly
+out.
+
+Several soldiers were loitering about the courtyard. Some were washing
+at the trough and bathing their heads beneath the fountain to get rid
+of the fumes of the wine they had indulged in overnight. Others were
+cleaning their arms.
+
+The sudden appearance of a mounted officer armed from head to foot
+caused a general pause in their occupation, although none had any
+suspicion that the splendidly attired officer was a fugitive; but,
+believing that he was one of Leslie's friends who was setting out on
+some mission, they paid no further heed to him, as quietly and without
+any sign of haste he rode through the gateway of the castle into the
+town. The inhabitants were already in the streets, country women with
+baskets were vending their produce, and the market was full of people.
+Malcolm rode on at a foot pace until he was within sight of the open
+gate of the town. When within fifty yards of the gate he suddenly came
+upon Colonel Leslie, who had thus early been making a tour of the walls
+to see that the sentries were upon the alert, for Duke Bernhard's force
+was within a few miles. He instantly recognized Malcolm.
+
+“Ah!” he exclaimed, “Captain Graheme--treachery! treachery! shut the
+gate there,” and drawing his sword, threw himself in Malcolm's way.
+
+Malcolm touched the horse with his spur and it bounded forward; he
+parried the blow which Leslie struck at him, and, with a sweeping cut
+full on the traitor's helmet, struck him to the ground and then dashed
+onward. A sentry was beginning to shut the gate, and his comrades were
+running out from the guardhouse as Malcolm galloped up.
+
+The steward had fastened the holsters on to the saddle, and Malcolm,
+before starting, had seen to the priming of the pistols in them. Drawing
+one he shot the man who was closing the gate, and before his comrades
+could run up he dashed through it and over the drawbridge.
+
+Several bullets whizzed around him, but he was soon out of range, and
+galloping at full speed in the direction in which the steward had told
+him that Duke Bernhard was encamped. In half an hour he reached the
+Swedish lines, and rode at once to the tent of the duke who was upon the
+point of mounting; beside him stood a man in the livery of Wallenstein.
+As he rode up Malcolm drew his pistol, and said to the man:
+
+“If you move a foot I will send a bullet through your head.”
+
+“What is this?” exclaimed the duke in astonishment, “and who are you,
+sir, who with such scant courtesy ride into my camp?”
+
+Malcolm raised his vizor. “I am Captain Graheme of Munro's regiment,”
+ he said, “and I have ridden here to warn your excellency of treachery.
+Wallenstein has been foully murdered. Egra is in the hands of the
+Imperialists, the Duke of Saxe-Lauenburg has been beguiled into a trap
+and taken prisoner, and this fellow, who is one of Butler's troopers,
+has been sent here to lead you into a like snare.”
+
+“Wallenstein murdered!” the duke exclaimed in tones of horror.
+“Murdered, say you? Impossible!”
+
+“It is but too true, sir,” Malcolm replied; “I myself saw his friends
+Illo, Terzky, and Kinsky assassinated before my eyes at a banquet.
+Wallenstein was murdered by his favourites Leslie and Gordon and the
+Irishman Butler. I was seized and thrown into a dungeon, but have
+escaped by a miracle to warn you of your danger.”
+
+“This is a blow indeed,” the duke said mournfully. Turning to his
+attendants he ordered them to hang the false messenger to the nearest
+tree, and then begged Malcolm to follow him into his tent and give him
+full details of this terrible transaction.
+
+“This upsets all our schemes indeed,” the duke said when he had
+concluded. “What is the strength of the garrison at Egra?”
+
+“There were Butler's dragoons and an infantry regiment in garrison there
+when we arrived; six regiments accompanied us on the march, and I
+fear that all these must now be considered as having gone over to the
+Imperialists.”
+
+“Then their force is superior to my own,” the duke said, “for I have but
+six thousand men with me, and have no artillery heavy enough to make
+any impression upon the walls of the town. Much as I should like to meet
+these traitors and to deal out to them the punishment they deserve, I
+cannot adventure on the siege of Egra until I have communicated this
+terrible news to the Swedish chancellor. Egra was all important to us as
+affording an entrance into Bohemia so long as Wallenstein was with
+us, but now that he has been murdered and our schemes thus suddenly
+destroyed I cannot risk the destruction of my force by an assault upon
+the city, which is no longer of use to us.”
+
+Much as Malcolm would have liked to have seen the punishment of
+Wallenstein's treacherous followers, he could not but feel that the
+duke's view was, under the circumstances, the correct one. The tents
+were speedily struck, and the force fell back with all speed towards
+Bavaria, and after accompanying them for a march or two, Malcolm left
+them and rode to join his regiment, the duke having already sent off
+a messenger to Oxenstiern with a full account of the murder of
+Wallenstein.
+
+As none could say what events were likely to follow the changed
+position of things, Malcolm determined at once to carry out the original
+intention of placing Thekla under the care of his friends at Nuremberg,
+in which direction it was not probable that the tide of war would
+for the present flow. After staying therefore a day or two with his
+regiment, where his relation of the events he had witnessed caused
+the greatest excitement and interest, Malcolm obtained leave from his
+colonel to escort Thekla to Nuremberg.
+
+In order that they might pass in perfect safety across the intervening
+country Munro gave him an escort of twelve troopers, and with these he
+journeyed by easy stages to Nuremberg, where the worthy syndic of the
+clockmakers and his wife gladly received Thekla, and promised to treat
+her as one of their own daughters.
+
+Here Malcolm took possession of his arms and valises, which he had sent,
+upon starting for Prague, to the care of Jans Boerhoff; not indeed that
+he needed the armour, for the suit which Wallenstein had given him was
+the admiration and envy of his comrades, and Munro had laughingly said
+that since Hepburn had left them no such gallantly attired cavalier had
+ridden in the ranks of the Scottish brigade.
+
+There were many tears on Thekla's part as her young protector bade her
+adieu, for there was no saying how long a time might elapse before she
+might again see him, and Malcolm was sorely tempted to tell her that
+he had her father's consent to wooing her as his wife. He thought it,
+however, better to abstain from speaking, for should he fall in the
+campaign her grief would be all the greater had she come to think of
+him as her destined husband, for her hearty affection for him already
+assured him that she would make no objection to carrying out her
+father's wishes.
+
+Shortly after rejoining his regiment Malcolm received a communication
+from the Swedish chancellor expressing in high terms his approbation of
+the manner in which he had carried out his instructions with regard to
+Wallenstein, and especially for the great service he had rendered
+the cause by warning the Duke of Saxe-Weimar of the trap which the
+Imperialists had set for him.
+
+The death of Wallenstein was followed by a short pause in the war. It
+had entirely frustrated all the plans and hopes of the Protestants, and
+it caused a delay in the movement of the Imperialists. The emperor, when
+he heard of Wallenstein's death, heaped favours and honours upon the
+three men who had plotted and carried out his murder, and then appointed
+his son Ferdinand, King of Hungary, to the chief command of the army,
+with General Gallas as his principal adviser.
+
+The Duke of Lorraine marched with an army to join the Imperialists, who
+were also strengthened by the arrival of 10,000 Spanish veterans, and
+early in May the new Imperial general entered the Palatinate and marched
+to lay siege to Ratisbon. To oppose the Imperial army, which numbered
+35,000 men, Duke Bernhard, after having drawn together all the troops
+scattered in the neighbourhood, could only put 15,000 in the field. With
+so great a disparity of force he could not offer battle, but in every
+way he harassed and interrupted the advance of the Imperialists, while
+he sent pressing messages to Oxenstiern for men and money, and to
+Marshal Horn, who commanded in Alsace, to beg him march with all haste
+to his assistance.
+
+Unfortunately Horn and Duke Bernhard were men of extremely different
+temperaments. The latter was vivacious, enterprising, and daring even to
+rashness, ready to undertake any enterprise which offered the smallest
+hope of success. Marshal Horn, on the other hand, although a good
+general, was slow, over cautious and hesitating, and would never move
+until his plans appeared to promise almost a certainty of success.
+Besides this, Horn, a Swede, was a little jealous that Duke Bernhard, a
+German, should be placed in the position of general-in-chief, and this
+feeling no doubt tended to increase his caution and to delay his action.
+
+Consequently he was so long a time before he obeyed the pressing
+messages sent by the duke, that Ratisbon, after a valiant defence,
+surrendered on the 29th of July, before he had effected a junction with
+the duke's army. The Imperialists then marched upon Donauworth, and this
+place, after a feeble defence, also capitulated. The duke, heartbroken
+at seeing the conquests, which had been effected at so great a loss of
+life and treasure, wrested from his hands while he was unable to strike
+a blow to save them, in despair marched away to Swabia to meet the
+slowly advancing army of Marshal Horn.
+
+No sooner was the junction effected than he turned quickly back and
+reached the vicinity of Nordlingen, only to find the enemy already there
+before him, and posted on the more advanced of the two heights which
+dominate the plain. By a skillful manoeuvre, however, he was enabled to
+throw within its walls a reinforcement to the garrison of eight hundred
+men.
+
+Nordlingen, an important free town, stands on the south bank of the
+Ries, some 18 miles to the northeast of Donauworth. It was surrounded by
+a wall, interspersed with numerous towers, sufficiently strong to guard
+it against any surprise, but not to defend it against a regular siege by
+a numerous army. The vast plain on which the town stands is broken near
+its centre by two heights rising at a distance of three thousand yards
+from each other.
+
+The height nearest to the town, which is very steep and craggy, is known
+as the Weinberg, the other is called Allersheim; a village stands some
+three hundred yards in advance of the valley between the heights, and is
+nearer to the town than either of the two eminences.
+
+The Scotch brigade formed part of Duke Bernhard's command. It was now
+nearly two years since a pitched battle had been fought, for although
+there had been many skirmishes and assaults in the preceding year no
+great encounter had taken place between the armies since Gustavus fell
+at Lutzen, in October, 1632, and the Scotch brigade had not been present
+at that battle. In the time which had elapsed many recruits had arrived
+from Scotland, and Munro's regiment had been again raised to the
+strength at which it had landed at Rugen four years before. Not half a
+dozen of the officers who had then, full of life and spirit, marched in
+its ranks were now present. Death had indeed been busy among them. On
+the evening of their arrival in sight of the Imperialist army the two
+Grahemes supped with their colonel. Munro had but just arrived from the
+duke's quarters.
+
+“I suppose we shall fight tomorrow, Munro,” Major Graheme said.
+
+“It is not settled,” the colonel replied; “between ourselves the duke
+and Horn are not of one mind. The duke wants to fight; he urges that
+were we to allow Nordlingen to fall, as we have allowed Ratisbon and
+Donauworth, without striking a blow to save it, it would be an evidence
+of caution and even cowardice which would have the worst possible effect
+through Germany. Nordlingen has ever been staunch to the cause, and the
+Protestants would everywhere fall away from us did they find that we had
+so little care for their safety as to stand by and see them fall into
+the hands of the Imperialists without an effort. It is better, in
+the duke's opinion, to fight and to be beaten than to tamely yield
+Nordlingen to the Imperialists. In the one case honour would be
+satisfied and the reformers throughout Germany would feel that we had
+done our utmost to save their co-religionists, on the other hand there
+would be shame and disgrace.”
+
+“There is much in what the duke says,” Nigel Graheme remarked.
+
+“There is much,” Munro rejoined; “but there is much also in the
+arguments of Horn. He reasons that we are outnumbered, the enemy is
+superior to us by at least a third, and to save the town we must attack
+them in an immensely strong position, which it will cost us great
+numbers to capture.
+
+“The chances against our winning a victory are fully five to one.
+Granted the fall of Nordlingen will injure us in the eyes of the princes
+and people of Germany; but with good management on our part the feeling
+thus aroused will be but temporary, for we should soon wipe out the
+reverse. Of the 35,000 men of which the Imperial army is composed, 8000
+at least are Spaniards who are on their way to Flanders, and who will
+very shortly leave it.
+
+“On the other hand the Rhinegrave Otto Ludwig is with 7000 men within a
+few marches of us; in a short time therefore we shall actually outnumber
+the enemy, and shall be able to recover our prestige, just as we
+recovered it at Leipzig after suffering Magdeburg to fall. We shall
+recapture the towns which he has taken, and if the enemy should dare
+to accept battle we shall beat him, and shall be in a position to march
+upon Vienna.”
+
+“Horn's arguments are the strongest,” Nigel Graheme said gravely; “the
+course he advises is the most prudent one.”
+
+“Undoubtedly,” Munro replied; “but I think that it will not be followed.
+The duke is of a fiery spirit, and he would feel it, as most of us would
+feel it, a disgrace to fall back without striking a blow for Nordlingen.
+He has, too, been goaded nearly to madness during the last few days by
+messengers and letters which have reached him from the reformed princes
+and the free towns in all parts of Germany, reproaching him bitterly for
+having suffered Ratisbon and Donauworth to fall into the hands of the
+enemy without a blow, and he feels that his honour is concerned. I have
+little doubt that we shall fight a great battle to save Nordlingen.”
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV NORDLINGEN
+
+
+While Colonel Munro and his companions were discussing the matter a
+council of war was being held, and Duke Bernhard's view was adopted by
+all his generals, who felt with him that their honour was involved in
+the question, and that it would be disgraceful to march away without
+striking a blow to save the besieged city. Horn, therefore, being
+outvoted, was forced to give way. Up to nightfall the Imperialists had
+showed no signs of an intention to occupy the Weinberg, their forces
+being massed on and around the Allersheim Hill. It was determined
+therefore to seize the Weinberg at once, and the execution of this step
+was committed to Horn.
+
+The choice was most unfortunate. The service was one upon the prompt
+carrying out of which victory depended, and Horn, though a brave and
+capable commander, was slow and cautious, and particularly unfitted for
+executing a service which had to be performed in a dark night across a
+country with which he was not familiar. Taking with him four thousand
+chosen musketeers and pikemen and twelve guns he set out at nine
+o'clock, but the rough road, the dikes, and ditches which intercepted
+the country impeded him, and the fact that he was unacquainted with the
+general position of the country made him doubly cautious, and it was not
+until midnight that he reached the foot of the hill.
+
+Here, unfortunately, he came to the conclusion that since he had
+encountered such difficulties in crossing the flat country he should
+meet with even greater obstacles and delays in ascending the hill in the
+dark; he therefore took the fatal resolution of remaining where he
+was until daylight, and accordingly ordered the column to halt. Had he
+continued his march he would have reached the summit of the Weinberg
+unopposed, and the fate of the battle on the following day would have
+been changed. But the Imperialist leaders, Gallas and Cardinal Infanta
+Don Fernando, had not been unmindful of the commanding position of the
+hill upon which Horn was marching, and had given orders that it should
+be occupied before daylight by four hundred Spaniards.
+
+The commander of this force was as over prompt in the execution of his
+orders as Horn was over cautious. He reached the top of the Weinberg
+before midnight, and at once set his men to work to intrench themselves
+strongly. As soon as daybreak enabled Horn to see the fatal consequences
+which had arisen from his delay he ordered his men to advance. With
+their usual gallantry the Swedes mounted the hill and rushed at the
+intrenchment. It was defended with the greatest obstinacy and courage by
+the Spaniards; but after desperate fighting the Swedes forced their way
+into the work at two points, and were upon the point of capturing the
+position when an ammunition wagon accidentally exploded in their midst,
+killing great numbers and throwing the rest into a temporary disorder,
+which enabled the Spaniards to drive them out and again occupy the
+intrenchments.
+
+Before the Swedes had fully recovered themselves the Spanish cavalry,
+which at the first sound of the conflict the cardinal had ordered to
+the spot, charged them in flank and forced them to a precipitate retreat
+down the hillside. Bitterly regretting his delay at midnight, Horn
+brought up fresh troops, and after addressing encouraging words to those
+who had been already repulsed, led the united body to the assault.
+
+But the Weinberg, which had been occupied in the early morning by only
+four hundred men, was now defended by the whole of the Spanish infantry.
+Vain now was the energy of Horn, and ineffectual the valour of his
+troops. Time after time did the Swedes climb the hill and strive to
+obtain a footing on its crest, each assault was repulsed with prodigious
+slaughter. Duke Bernhard was now fully engaged with the Imperialists on
+the Allersheim, and was gradually gaining ground. Seeing, however,
+how fruitless were the efforts of Horn to capture the Weinberg, he
+despatched as many of his infantry as he could spare to reinforce the
+marshal. Among these was Munro's regiment.
+
+“Now, my brave lads,” Colonel Munro shouted, as he led his regiment
+against the hill, “show them what Scottish hearts can do.” With a cheer
+the regiment advanced. Pressing forward unflinchingly under a hail
+of bullets they won their way up the hill, and then gathering, hurled
+themselves with a shout upon the heavy masses of Spanish veterans. For a
+moment the latter recoiled before the onset; then they closed in around
+the Scotch, who had already lost a third of their number in ascending
+the hill.
+
+Never did the famous regiment fight with greater courage and fury; but
+they were outnumbered ten to one, and their opponents were soldiers of
+European reputation. In vain the Scotchmen strove to break through the
+serried line of pikes which surrounded them. Here and there a knot of
+desperate men would win a way through; but ere others could follow them
+the Spanish line closed in again and cut them off from their comrades,
+and they died fighting to the last.
+
+Fighting desperately in the front rank Munro and his officers encouraged
+their men with shouts and example; but it was all in vain, and he at
+last shouted to the remains of his followers to form in a solid body and
+cut their way back through the enemy who surrounded them. Hemmed in as
+they were by enemies the Scottish spearmen obeyed, and, headed by their
+colonel, flung themselves with a sudden rush upon the enemy. Before the
+weight and fury of the charge the veterans of Spain gave way, and the
+Scots found themselves on the crest of the hill which they had lately
+ascended. No sooner were they free from the Spanish ranks than the
+musketeers of the latter opened fire upon them, and numbers fell in the
+retreat. When they reached the foot of the fatal hill, and bleeding and
+breathless gathered round their commander, Munro burst into tears on
+finding that of the noble regiment he had led up the hill scarce enough
+remained to form a single company. Seven times now had Horn striven
+to carry the hill, seven times had he been repulsed with terrible
+slaughter, and he now began to fall back to join the force of Duke
+Bernhard. The latter, recognizing that the battle was lost, and that
+Horn, if not speedily succoured, was doomed, for the Imperialists,
+flushed with victory, were striving to cut him off, made a desperate
+attack upon the enemy hoping to draw their whole forces upon himself,
+and so enable Horn to retire. For the moment he succeeded, but he was
+too weak in numbers to bear the assault he had thus provoked. John of
+Werth, who commanded the Imperial cavalry, charged down upon the Swedish
+horsemen and overthrew them so completely that these, forced back upon
+their infantry, threw them also into complete disorder.
+
+The instant Horn had given the orders to retreat, Colonel Munro, seeing
+the danger of the force being surrounded, formed up the little remnant
+of his regiment and set off at the double to rejoin the force of the
+duke. It was well that he did so, for just when he had passed over the
+intervening ground the Imperialist cavalry, fresh from the defeat of the
+Swedes, swept across the ground, completely cutting off Horn's division
+from that of the duke. A few minutes later Marshal Horn, surrounded
+on all sides by the enemy, and feeling the impossibility of further
+resistance with his weakened and diminished force, was forced to
+surrender with all his command.
+
+Duke Bernhard narrowly escaped the same fate; but in the end he managed
+to rally some nine thousand men and retreated towards the Maine. The
+defeat was a terrible one; ten thousand men were killed and wounded, and
+four thousand under Horn taken prisoners; all the guns, equipage, and
+baggage fell into the hands of the enemy.
+
+Nordlingen was the most decisive battle of the war; its effect was to
+change a war which had hitherto been really only a civil war--a war of
+religion--into one with a foreign enemy. Hitherto France had contented
+herself with subsidizing Sweden, who had played the principal part.
+Henceforward Sweden was to occupy but a secondary position. Cardinal
+Richelieu saw the danger of allowing Austria to aggrandize itself at the
+expense of all Germany, and now took the field in earnest.
+
+Upon the other hand Nordlingen dissolved the confederacy of the
+Protestant German princes against Ferdinand the Second. The Elector of
+Saxony, who had ever been vacillating and irresolute in his policy,
+was the first to set the example by making peace with the emperor. The
+Elector of Brandenburg, Duke William of Weimar, the Prince of Anhalt,
+the Duke of Brunswick-Luneburg, the Duke of Mecklenburg, Pomerania, and
+the cities of Augsburg, Wurzburg, and Coburg, and many others hastened
+to follow the example of all the leading members of the Protestant
+Union.
+
+Dukes Bernhard of Weimar and William of Cassel were almost alone in
+supporting the cause to maintain which Gustavus Adolphus had invaded
+Germany. The Swedish army, whose exploits had made the court of Vienna
+tremble, seemed annihilated, and well might the emperor deem that his
+final triumph over Protestantism was complete when he heard of the
+battle of Nordlingen, for as yet he dreamed not that its result would
+bring France into the field against him.
+
+Malcolm Graheme was one of the few officers of Munro's regiment who
+burst his way through the Spanish lines on the top of the Weinberg. He
+was bleeding from several wounds, but none of them were serious. Nigel
+was beside him as they began to descend the hill; but scarcely had he
+gone a step when he fell headlong, struck by a ball from an arquebus.
+Malcolm and one of the sergeants raised him, and between them carried
+him to the foot of the hill; then, when the remains of the regiments
+started to rejoin Duke Bernhard, they were forced to leave him. Although
+Malcolm kept up with his regiment in the retreat he was so utterly
+exhausted by loss of blood that he could no longer accompany them. By
+the death of so many of his seniors he was now one of the majors of the
+regiment, if that could be called a regiment which was scarce a company
+in strength. A few days after the battle Colonel Munro received orders
+to march with his shattered remnant, scarce one of whom but was from
+wounds unfit for present service, by easy stages to North Germany, there
+to await the arrival of reinforcements from Scotland, which might raise
+the regiment to a strength which would enable it again to take the
+field.
+
+Malcolm remained behind until his strength slowly returned. The colonel,
+before leaving, had bade him take his time before rejoining, as months
+would probably elapse before the regiment would again be fit for
+service. As soon as he was able to travel he journeyed to Nuremberg.
+On arriving at the abode of Jans Boerhoff he learned that Thekla was
+no longer an inmate of the family. The Count of Mansfeld had died in
+prison, and the countess had arrived at Nuremberg and had taken up her
+abode there. Malcolm made his way to the house she occupied. The meeting
+was an affecting one. Malcolm was greatly grieved over the death of
+his staunch friend, and joined in the sorrow of the countess and her
+daughter. A few days after his arrival the countess said to him:
+
+“I am of course aware, Malcolm, of the conversation which the count had
+with you concerning Thekla, and my wishes fully agreed with his on the
+subject. In other times one would not speak of marriage when
+Thekla's father had been but two months dead; but it is no time for
+conventionalities now. All Southern Germany is falling away from the
+Protestant cause, and ere long we may see the Imperialists at the gate
+of Nuremberg, and it may be that in a few months the whole of Germany
+will be in their power. Therefore, I would that there should be no
+delay. Thekla is nearly seventeen; you are twenty-one--over young both
+to enter upon the path of matrimony; but the events of the last few
+months have made a woman of her, while you have long since proved
+yourself both in thoughtfulness and in valour to be a man. Thekla is
+no longer a great heiress. Since Nordlingen we may consider that her
+father's estates have gone for ever, mine may follow in a few months.
+Therefore I must ask you, are you ready to take her without dowry?”
+
+“I am,” Malcolm said earnestly, “and that right gladly, for I love her
+with all my heart.”
+
+“It needs no questioning on my part,” the countess said, “to know that
+she loves you as truly, and that her happiness depends wholly on you. I
+saw her anguish when the news came of the terrible defeat at Nordlingen
+and of the annihilation of some of the Scottish regiments. My heart was
+wrung by her silent despair, her white and rigid face, until the news
+came that you were among the few who had survived the battle, and, in
+the outburst of joy and thankfulness at the news, she owned to me that
+she loved you, her only fear being that you cared for her only as a
+sister, since no word of love had ever passed your lips. I reassured her
+on that score by telling her of your conversation with her father, and
+that a feeling of duty alone had kept you silent while she remained
+under your protection.
+
+“However, Malcolm, she will not come to you penniless, for, seeing that
+it was possible that the war would terminate adversely, and determined
+to quit the country should he be forbidden to worship according to
+his own religion here, the count has from time to time despatched
+considerable sums to the care of a banker at Hamburg, and there are now
+10,000 gold crowns in his hands.
+
+“There are, moreover, my estates at Silesia, but these I have for
+sometime foreseen would follow those of my husband and fall into the
+hands of the emperor. Before the death of the count I talked over the
+whole matter with him, and he urged me in any case, even should you fall
+before becoming the husband of Thekla, to leave this unhappy country and
+to take refuge abroad.
+
+“Before his death I had an interview with my nearest kinsman, who
+has taken sides with the Imperialists, and to him I offered to resign
+Thekla's rights as heiress to the estate for the sum of 10,000 crowns.
+As this was but three years revenue of the estates, and it secured their
+possession to him whether the Imperialists or Swedes were victorious in
+the struggle, he consented, after having obtained the emperor's consent
+to the step, and I have this morning received a letter from him saying
+that the money has been lodged in the hands of the banker at Hamburg,
+and Thekla and I have this morning signed a deed renouncing in his
+favour all claim to the estate. Thus Thekla has a dowry of 20,000 gold
+crowns--a sum not unworthy of a dowry even for the daughter of a Count
+of Mansfeld; but with it you must take me also, for I would fain leave
+the country and end my days with her.”
+
+“Do you keep the dowry so long as you live, countess,” Malcolm said
+earnestly. “It is more than the richest noble in Scotland could give
+with his daughter. My own estate, though small, is sufficient to keep
+Thekla and myself in ease, and my pleasure in having you with us will
+be equal to hers. You would wish, of course, that I should quit the army
+and return home, and, indeed, I am ready to do so. I have had more
+than enough of wars and fighting. I have been preserved well nigh by
+a miracle, when my comrades have fallen around me like grass. I cannot
+hope that such fortune would always attend me. The cause for which I
+have fought seems lost, and since the Protestant princes of Germany are
+hastening to desert it, neither honour nor common sense demand that I,
+a soldier of fortune and a foreigner, should struggle any longer for it;
+therefore I am ready at once to resign my commission and to return to
+Scotland.”
+
+“So be it,” the countess said; “but regarding Thekla's dowry I shall
+insist on having my way. I should wish to see her in a position similar
+to that in which she was born, and with this sum you can largely
+increase your estates and take rank among the nobles of your country.
+Now I will call Thekla in and leave you to ask her to agree to the
+arrangements we have made.
+
+“My child,” she went on, as Thekla in obedience to her summons entered
+the apartment, “Malcolm Graheme has asked your hand of me. He tells
+me that he loves you truly, and is willing to take you as a penniless
+bride, and to carry you and me away with him far from these terrible
+wars to his native Scotland--what say you, my love?”
+
+Thekla affected neither shyness or confusion, her colour hardly
+heightened as in her sombre mourning she advanced to Malcolm, and laying
+her hand in his, said:
+
+“He cannot doubt my answer, mother; he must know that I love him with my
+whole heart.”
+
+“Then, my daughter,” the countess said, “I will leave you to yourselves;
+there is much to arrange, for time presses, and your betrothal must be
+quickly followed by marriage.”
+
+It was but a few days later that Malcolm led Thekla to the altar in St.
+Sebald's Church, Nuremberg. The marriage was a quiet one, seeing that
+the bride had been so lately orphaned, and only Jans Boerhoff and
+his family, and two or three Scottish comrades of Malcolm's, who were
+recovering from their wounds at Nuremberg, were present at the quiet
+ceremony. The following day the little party started for the north.
+Malcolm had already received a letter from Oxenstiern accepting
+his resignation, thanking him heartily for the good services he had
+rendered, and congratulating him on his approaching wedding.
+
+Without adventure they reached Hamburg, and there, arranging with the
+banker for the transmission of the sum in his hands to Edinburgh, they
+took ship and crossed to Scotland.
+
+Three months later Malcolm was delighted by the appearance of his uncle
+Nigel. The latter was indeed in dilapidated condition, having lost an
+arm, and suffering from other wounds. He had been retained a prisoner
+by the Imperialists only until he was cured, when they had freed him in
+exchange for an Imperial officer who had been captured by the Swedes.
+
+Thekla's dowry enabled her husband largely to increase his estates. A
+new and handsome mansion was erected at a short distance from the old
+castle, and here Malcolm Graheme lived quietly for very many years with
+his beautiful wife, and saw a numerous progeny rise around them.
+
+To the gratification of both, five years after her coming to Scotland,
+the Countess of Mansfeld married Nigel Graheme and the pair took up
+their abode in the old castle, which was thoroughly repaired and set in
+order by Malcolm for their use, while he and Thekla insisted that the
+fortune he had received as a dowry with his wife should be shared by the
+countess and Nigel.
+
+
+
+THE END
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Lion of the North, by G.A. Henty
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE LION OF THE NORTH ***
+
+***** This file should be named 5075-0.txt or 5075-0.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/5/0/7/5075/
+
+Produced by Martin Robb
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
+Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the Foundation”
+ or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase “Project
+Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase “Project Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+“Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, “Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+“Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right
+of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.